C48ib001en y Mpds 5 Refguide

Measure
what is measurable
and make measurable
that which is not.
Galileo Galilei (1564-1642)
Reference Guide
mPDS 5
Evaluation Unit
Firmware Version 6.41
Disclaimer
This document may contain errors and omissions. If you discover any such errors or if you would like to see
more information in this document, please contact us at our address below. Anton Paar assumes no liability
for any errors or omissions in this document.
Changes, copyright, trademarks etc.

This document and its contents may be changed or amended by Anton Paar at any time without prior notice.
All rights reserved (including translation). This document, or any part of it, may not be reproduced, changed,
copied, or distributed by means of electronic systems in any form (print, photocopy, microfilm or any other
process) without prior written permission by Anton Paar GmbH.
Trademarks, registered trademarks, trade names, etc. may be used in this document without being marked
as such. They are the property of their respective owner.
Further information
Published and printed by Anton Paar GmbH, Austria
Copyright © 2020 Anton Paar GmbH, Graz, Austria
Address of the instrument producer: Anton Paar GmbH
Anton-Paar-Str. 20
A-8054 Graz / Austria – Europe
Tel: +43 (0) 316 257-0
Fax: +43 (0) 316 257-257
E-Mail: info@anton-paar.com
Web: www.anton-paar.com
Date: April 2020

Document number: C48IB001EN-Y
Reference Guide
mPDS 5
Evaluation Unit
Firmware Version 6.41
Contents
1 Safety Instructions.................................................................................................................................. 9
1.1 General Safety Instructions............................................................................................................... 9
1.2 Special Safety Instructions.............................................................................................................. 10
1.3 Conventions for Safety Messages .................................................................................................. 10
2 mPDS 5 - An Overview ......................................................................................................................... 10
3 Checking the Supplied Parts ............................................................................................................... 11
4 Checklist for Quick Start-up ................................................................................................................ 12
5 General Operating Instructions ........................................................................................................... 13
5.1 How to use the Touch Screen......................................................................................................... 13
5.2 Operating Elements of the Main Screen ......................................................................................... 13
5.2.1 Handling Multiple Process Lines............................................................................................. 15
5.2.2 Logging On/Off ....................................................................................................................... 15
5.3 Operating Elements of the Menu Screens ...................................................................................... 18
5.3.1 Special Operating Elements ................................................................................................... 19
5.4 Calibrating the Touch Screen ......................................................................................................... 21
6 Available Measuring Quantities........................................................................................................... 22
6.1 The most important measuring quantities concerning CO2 measurement ..................................... 37
6.2 Priority of CO2 Sources................................................................................................................... 38
7 Daily Routine Operations ..................................................................................................................... 38
7.1 Selecting a Product......................................................................................................................... 38
7.2 Adjusting mPDS 5 to Laboratory Reference Values ....................................................................... 38
7.2.1 Adjustment According to Laboratory Values........................................................................... 39
7.2.2 Tips for the adjustment of certain product types..................................................................... 40
7.2.2.1 Product Types "Beer 1" and "Beer 2" ............................................................................. 40
7.2.2.2 Product type "Beer 1 Custom" ........................................................................................ 40
7.2.2.3 Product type "Beverages Diets"...................................................................................... 41
7.2.2.4 Product type "Beverages Diets/Col." .............................................................................. 41
7.2.2.5 Offset or gain adjustment - a few guidelines................................................................... 41
7.2.2.6 Product type "Beverages Alc./Sugar" ............................................................................. 41
7.2.3 Manual Adjustment ................................................................................................................ 42
7.2.4 Reset Adjustment ................................................................................................................... 42
7.3 Adjustment/Calibration of mPDS 5 with Davis 5 ............................................................................. 43
8 Product settings.................................................................................................................................... 44
8.1 Quick instructions: Adding, Editing and Deleting Products ............................................................. 44
8.2 Available Product Types ................................................................................................................. 45
8.2.1 Product Types "Beer Wort 1", "Beer Wort 2" , "Beer 1" and "L-Rix Sugar Counter" - Additional
Information....................................................................................................................................... 53
8.2.2 Product Types for CIP Cleaning ............................................................................................. 55
8.2.3 Product Type "Petroleum, Fuels 2 Visc."................................................................................ 55
8.2.4 Product Types "Beverages Diets/Col" and "Beverages Diets/UV" ......................................... 56
8.2.5 Product Type "Milk 2" ............................................................................................................. 56
8.2.6 Calculation of Dynamic and Kinematic Viscosities Using Product Types "L-Vis Low/Mid/High/
Auto Viscosity"or "Petroleum, Fuels, 2 Visc" ................................................................................... 57
8.3 Alarm Function (Alarm Limits and Target) ...................................................................................... 57
8.4 Available Product Parameters and Related Functions ................................................................... 59
8.4.1 Product Parameters "AA", "AB", ..., "AS", "BA", "BB", ... , "BS", "Ref.Density", "Ref.Soundvel.",
"Ref.Temperature" ........................................................................................................................... 65
8.4.2 Product Parameters "KA", "KB", ..., "KU", "Pressure K0", "Pressure K1", "Pressure Stored",
"CA", ..., "CE", "Ref.Density", "Ref.Temperature"............................................................................ 65
8.4.3 Product Parameters "KA", "KB", ..., "KU", "Pressure K0", "Pressure K1", "Press. Stored", "
Ref.Density","Ref.Soundvel.", "Ref.Temperature" ........................................................................... 66
8.4.4 Product Parameters "CO2 Stored", "CO2 High, CO2 Low." ................................................... 66
8.4.5 Product Parameters "Dens. 20 Temp. Corr." , "Eth.%v/v Temp. Corr.","Eth. %w/w Temp.Corr."
66
4 D48IB001EN-Y
8.4.6 Product Parameters "Press. Stored", "Press. High", "Press. Low" ......................................... 66
8.4.7 Product Parameter "Product Group"....................................................................................... 67
8.4.8 Product Parameters "Formula" and "Use Wide Range Formulas" ......................................... 67
8.4.9 Product Parameter "H2O-Density" ......................................................................................... 67
8.4.10 Product Parameters "KA", "KB", ..., "KU", "Ref.Temperature", "Ref. Density"...................... 67
8.4.11 Product Parameter "H2O-Correction", "Zero Diet"................................................................ 68
8.4.12 Product Parameters "K1","K2","K3, "P-Factor", "Set Density", "Tolerance", "Dead Zone", "De-
lay", "Cycle time", "Ref.Temperature ............................................................................................... 68
8.4.13 Product Parameters, "Constant A", "Constant B" ................................................................. 69
8.4.14 Product Parameters "CA", "CB", "Ref. Temperature", "Skim-Dens", "Skim-Fat", "Skim-Temp"
69
8.4.15 Product Parameters "AA", "AB", ..., "AK", "Press. Stored" ................................................... 70
8.4.16 Product Parameters "Ref. Temp./P8", "KB", "KC", "KG", "CA/C(5)", "CB/C(4)", "CC/C(3)".. 70
8.4.17 Product Parameters "Ref. Pressure", "Ref.Temperature", "Ref.Soundvel.", "AA",... "AS",
"BA",...,"BS" ..................................................................................................................................... 71
8.4.18 Product Parameters "Ref. Conduct.", "Ref.Temperature", "Ref.Density", "AA",... "AS",
"BA",...,"BS" ..................................................................................................................................... 71
8.4.19 Product Parameters "Spike Filter Size", "Spike Filter Amplitude", "Average Filter Size"...... 72
8.4.20 Product Parameters "Density 1" , "Density 2"....................................................................... 72
8.4.21 Product Parameter "Ea", "Ref.Temp.L-Vis", "Density Stored","Ref.Density Stored", "Density
Selected", "Density Ref.Temp. Sel." ................................................................................................ 73
8.4.22 Product Parameter "Sound Vel. Delay" ................................................................................ 74
8.4.23 Product Parameters "Count Min", "Extract Max", "Extract Min", "Original Extract", "Real Ex-
tract Correction Factor".................................................................................................................... 74
8.4.24 Product Parameters "Transd. DP0", "Transd. DP1", Transd. DP2", "Transd. DP3", "Transd.
Ref. Press"....................................................................................................................................... 75
8.4.25 Product Parameter "pH-Stored", "pH-Limit", "Back Flushing Local On", "Measuring Time",
"Back Flushing Local Time", "Back Flushing Remote On ", "Back Flushing Remote Time", "Offset",
"BB", "BC", "BE", "BH", "BI", "BN", "BO".......................................................................................... 75
8.4.26 Product Type "Liqueur>30%v/v-Alcohol" .............................................................................. 76
8.4.27 Product type "Ethanol Counter 1" ......................................................................................... 76
8.4.28 Product type "Beer 3" ........................................................................................................... 76
8.4.29 Product Parameters "Ref. Pressure", "Ref.Temperature", "Ref.Density", "AA",... "AS",
"BA",...,"BS" ..................................................................................................................................... 76
8.4.30 Kinematic Viscosity at Reference Temperature using ASTM D341 ..................................... 77
8.4.31 "Type of Sugar", "L-Rix-1/2/3/4 Sugar Type" ........................................................................ 77
8.4.32 Parameters "Original Extract - Min/Max/Stability/Stability Duration/Detection Time/Stored 1/2/
3/4, Start Tank 1/2/3/4" .................................................................................................................... 78
8.5 Filter Settings .................................................................................................................................. 78
9 Recording Measurement Data ............................................................................................................ 81
9.1 Configuration................................................................................................................................... 81
9.2 Exporting Data ................................................................................................................................ 81
9.3 Importing Data in Excel................................................................................................................... 82
10 Control Panel Settings ....................................................................................................................... 83
10.1 Date and Time .............................................................................................................................. 83
10.2 Regional Settings (Language, ...) ................................................................................................. 83
10.3 Network......................................................................................................................................... 84
10.4 Instrument Name and Location..................................................................................................... 84
10.5 Display Brightness ........................................................................................................................ 84
10.6 Davis 5 Interaction Settings .......................................................................................................... 85
11 User Management .............................................................................................................................. 85
11.1 User Groups, Auto Logon and Password Rules ........................................................................... 85
11.2 Creating, Editing and Deleting User Accounts.............................................................................. 86
12 Audit Trail ............................................................................................................................................ 88
13 User Functions................................................................................................................................... 89
13.1 2D Polynomials ............................................................................................................................. 89
13.2 3D Polynomials ............................................................................................................................. 89
D48IB001EN-Y 5
13.3 User Formulas .............................................................................................................................. 89
13.4 Creating a User Function .............................................................................................................. 90
13.5 Export and Import of User Functions ............................................................................................ 91
13.5.1 Export User Function ............................................................................................................ 91
13.5.2 Import User Function ........................................................................................................... 91
14 Backup and Restore Instrument Settings ........................................................................................ 92
15 Service Functions .............................................................................................................................. 93
15.1 Update .......................................................................................................................................... 93
15.2 Live Raw Data............................................................................................................................... 94
15.3 Diagnosis ...................................................................................................................................... 95
15.4 System Information ....................................................................................................................... 95
15.5 Service Log ................................................................................................................................... 96
15.6 Sensor Service.............................................................................................................................. 96
15.6.1 Carbo 510 ............................................................................................................................. 96
15.6.2 Oxy 5100 - Clear History Function........................................................................................ 96
15.6.3 Oxy 510/5100 - Sensor Cap Adjustment .............................................................................. 96
15.6.3.2 Sensor Cap Adjustment Zero Point .............................................................................. 97
15.6.3.3 Sensor Cap Adjustment Oxygen Point ......................................................................... 98
15.6.3.4 Cap Adjustment Set...................................................................................................... 98
15.6.4 Sensor Service for L-Dens 7000/L-Sonic/L-Com.................................................................. 99
15.7 Logging Configuration................................................................................................................... 99
15.8 Unlock Service .............................................................................................................................. 99
15.9 Adjustment/Calibration of an L-Col 6100 Sensor.......................................................................... 99
16 Upkeep and Cleaning ....................................................................................................................... 101
16.1 Software Administration .............................................................................................................. 101
16.2 Cleaning...................................................................................................................................... 101
16.3 Wetted Parts ............................................................................................................................... 101
16.4 Storing and Transporting the Instrument .................................................................................... 102
16.5 Packing the Instrument for Returns ............................................................................................ 102
17 Maintenance and Repair................................................................................................................... 102
17.1 Maintenance Performed by an Authorized Anton Paar Service Engineer .................................. 102
17.2 Maintenance Performed by an Authorized Anton Paar Service Engineer .................................. 102
17.3 Repair Performed by an Authorized Anton Paar Representative ............................................... 102
18 Installation ......................................................................................................................................... 103
18.1 Mounting mPDS 5....................................................................................................................... 103
18.2 Configuration Sheets .................................................................................................................. 104
18.3 Electrical Wiring of Inputs and Outputs....................................................................................... 105
18.3.1 24 V DC Power Supply (CPU board).................................................................................. 107
18.3.2 USB Interface (CPU board) ................................................................................................ 107
18.3.3 Ethernet (LAN) Interface (CPU board)................................................................................ 107
18.3.4 CAN Interface for Carbo 510, Carbo 520, Cobrix 2600, Inline Pump 5, L-Dens/L-Sonic/L-Com
... (CPU board)............................................................................................................................... 108
18.3.5 Transducer Inputs for DPR/DPRn/SPR/SPRn/DSRn (Transd. board) ............................... 110
18.3.6 0/4-20 mA Analog Inputs (Transd. board and I/O board) ................................................... 110
18.3.7 0/4-20 mA Analog Outputs (I/O board) ............................................................................... 110
18.3.8 Digital Outputs (Transd. and I/O board).............................................................................. 110
18.3.9 Digital Outputs on LED board (Cobrix 5500/5600) ............................................................. 111
18.3.10 Relay Outputs (I/O board)................................................................................................. 112
18.3.10.1 Error Relay................................................................................................................ 112
18.3.11 Digital Inputs/Counter Inputs (Transducer and I/O Board) ............................................... 112
18.3.12 PROFIBUS DP Interface (PROFIBUS Board Version 1).................................................. 114
18.3.13 PROFIBUS DP Interface (PROFIBUS board Version 2, Mat.No. 97350)......................... 115
18.3.14 PROFINET IO Interface (PROFINET IO Board, Mat.No. 97352) ..................................... 115
18.3.15 EtherNet/IP Interface (EtherNet/IP Board, Mat.No. 97353) .............................................. 115
18.3.16 Modbus TCP Interface (Modbus TCP Board, Mat.No. 97354) ......................................... 115
18.3.17 DeviceNet Interface (DeviceNet Board, Mat.No. 97349) .................................................. 116
18.3.18 Installing a Carbo 2100/Inline/2100 MVE ......................................................................... 116
6 D48IB001EN-Y
18.3.19 Installation of an Inline Pump 5......................................................................................... 116
18.3.20 Installing an L-Col 6100 Sensor....................................................................................... 117
19 Configuration ................................................................................................................................... 118
19.1 Alarm configuration ..................................................................................................................... 118
19.2 Configuration of analog outputs .................................................................................................. 119
19.3 Sensor and I/O Management...................................................................................................... 120
19.4 Line Configuration....................................................................................................................... 125
19.5 Channel Settings......................................................................................................................... 125
19.5.1 Visible ................................................................................................................................. 125
19.5.2 Adjustable, Limitable, Freezable......................................................................................... 126
19.5.3 Default Filters...................................................................................................................... 126
19.5.4 "Use Offset" ........................................................................................................................ 127
19.5.5 Settings of Global Channels (e.g. Hold, Flowstop, Calibration DI) ..................................... 127
19.6 Unit Settings................................................................................................................................ 128
19.6.1 Input Units (Display Units) .................................................................................................. 128
19.6.2 Processing units ................................................................................................................. 128
19.6.3 Setting the Units ................................................................................................................. 128
19.7 Configuration of External Error Status ........................................................................................ 130
19.8 Configuration of Measurement Values for the Input Data Block (Fieldbus) ................................ 132
20 Fieldbus communication with a PLC ............................................................................................. 133
20.1 PROFIBUS DP............................................................................................................................ 135
20.1.1 System requirements.......................................................................................................... 135
20.1.2 Network setting on the mPDS............................................................................................. 135
20.1.3 : Integration of the mPDS 5 into the PROFIBUS network - GSD - file................................ 135
20.1.4 Installation of the PROFIBUS Board in a PROFIBUS Network (Siemens Simatic S7-300) 135
20.2 PROFINET IO ............................................................................................................................. 136
20.2.2 Network settings on the mPDS 5........................................................................................ 136
20.2.3 Integration of the mPDS 5 into the PROFINET IO Network - GSDML - file........................ 137
20.3 EtherNet/IP ................................................................................................................................. 137
20.3.3 Integration of the mPDS 5 into the EtherNet/IP network ................................................... 137
20.4 Modbus TCP ............................................................................................................................... 138
20.4.3 Integration of the mPDS 5 into the Modbus TCP network .................................................. 138
20.5 DeviceNet ................................................................................................................................... 139
20.5.3 Integration of the mPDS 5 into the DeviceNet network ...................................................... 139
20.6 Input Datablock (for all Fieldbuses) ............................................................................................ 139
20.6.1 General Setup of the Input Data Block ............................................................................... 140
20.6.2 Setup of the Input Data Block for a Single Line Configuration with an Input Data Block of 128
Bytes.............................................................................................................................................. 140
20.6.3 Setup of the Input Data Block for a Two-line Configuration with an Input Data Block of 128
Bytes.............................................................................................................................................. 142
20.6.4 Number of Transferrable Measurement Values Depending on the Block Size ( 64 - 224 Bytes)
and Number of Lines 1 - 4 ............................................................................................................. 144
20.6.5 Start Addresses Depending on Block Size for 2-Line Systems .......................................... 144
20.6.6 Configuration of Measurement Values for the Input Data Block......................................... 144
20.7 Output Data Block (for all Fieldbuses) ........................................................................................ 145
20.7.1 Setup of the Output Data Block for a Single Line Configuration with the Output Data Block Size
of 128 Bytes................................................................................................................................... 146
20.7.2 Setup of the Output Data Block for a Two-line Configuration with Output Data Block Size 128
Bytes.............................................................................................................................................. 149
20.7.3 Setup of the Output Data Block for a Multi-line Configuration with
D48IB001EN-Y 7
Several Output Data Block Sizes................................................................................................... 153
20.7.4 List of Parameter Types...................................................................................................... 154
20.7.5 Simulation of Digital Outputs .............................................................................................. 154
20.7.6 Indices of Measurement Values and Parameters............................................................... 154
20.8 Application Examples for a Single Line System.......................................................................... 155
20.8.1 Selecting a Product............................................................................................................. 155
20.8.2 Changing Product-Specific Parameters in mPDS 5 ........................................................... 155
20.8.3 Changing Product Parameters in mPDS 5
(e.g. "CO2-stored", "Original Extract Stored 1") ............................................................................. 156
20.8.4 Read Product Parameters from mPDS 5............................................................................ 157
20.9 Important Application Notes for PLCs connected via Fieldbus ................................................... 158
20.10 Product Creation/Product Type Change via Fieldbus............................................................... 158
20.10.1 How to Create a new Product via Fieldbus....................................................................... 159
20.10.2 How to Change a Product Type via Fieldbus ................................................................... 159
21 Communication with External PC - Download of System Information ........................................ 160
22 Technical Data................................................................................................................................... 161
22.1 General Technical Data .............................................................................................................. 161
22.2 Analog and Digital Inputs/Output (I/O Board and Transducer Board)......................................... 161
22.3 Transducer Inputs (Transducer Board)....................................................................................... 163
22.4 USB/CAN/Ethernet (CPU Board)................................................................................................ 164
22.5 PROFIBUS (PROFIBUS Board Version 1 and 2) ....................................................................... 164
22.6 Fieldbuses Based on Ethernet (PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP).............................. 166
22.7 Fieldbuses Based on CAN-Bus (DeviceNet) .............................................................................. 166
22.8 UV/Vis board (for L-Col 6100 sensor)......................................................................................... 166
23 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................ 167
23.1 Message List - Inactive Output fields .......................................................................................... 167
23.2 Diagnosis Windows..................................................................................................................... 168
23.3 Smart Sensor (Carbo 510, Carbo 520 Optical, Cobrix 2600, Inline Pump 5,...) Diagnosis......... 169
23.3.1 Inline Pump 5 / Inline Pump 520: Input Quantities, Parameters and Error List .................. 170
23.3.1.1 "Inline Pump Error" - Codes........................................................................................ 171
23.3.2 Carbo 510: Input Quantities, Parameters and Error List..................................................... 173
23.3.2.1 "Error Carbo" available for Carbo 510 ........................................................................ 174
23.3.3 Carbo 520 Optical/Cobrix 2600: Input Quantities, Parameters and Error List .................... 176
23.3.3.1 "Error Carbo" for Carbo 520 Optical/Cobrix 2600....................................................... 178
23.3.4 L-Vis 510 / 520 Ex: Input Quantities, Parameters and Error List ........................................ 180
23.3.5 L-Rix Input Quantities, Parameters and Error List .............................................................. 183
23.3.6 Oxy 510/5100 Input Quantities, Parameters and Error List ................................................ 186
23.4 Carbo 2100/Inline/2100 MVE Diagnosis ..................................................................................... 198
23.4.1 Connectors ......................................................................................................................... 198
23.4.2 Input Quantities................................................................................................................... 198
23.4.3 Output Quantities................................................................................................................ 200
23.4.4 Parameters ......................................................................................................................... 200
23.5 L-Dens 7000, L-Sonic 5100/6100, L-Com 5500 ......................................................................... 201
23.5.1 Connectors ......................................................................................................................... 201
23.5.2 L-Dens 7000 Input quantities.............................................................................................. 201
23.5.3 L-Sonic 5500/5600 Input Quantities ................................................................................... 202
23.5.4 L-Com 5500 Input Quantities.............................................................................................. 202
23.5.5 Editable parameters............................................................................................................ 203
23.5.6 Error / Warning Messages .................................................................................................. 204
23.5.7 L-Dens 7000 Firmware Checksum ..................................................................................... 208
23.6 L-Col 6100: Input Quantities, Parameters and Error List ............................................................ 208
23.7 CAN Error Messages .................................................................................................................. 212
Appendix A: mPDS 5 Menu Structure................................................................................................. 213
Appendix B: EU Declaration of Conformity........................................................................................ 215
Appendix C: Document Numbers........................................................................................................ 216
8 D48IB001EN-Y
1 Safety Instructions
Part 1 - Operation
1 Safety Instructions
• Read the documentation before using mPDS 5. life.
• Follow all hints and instructions contained in the • mPDS 5 is a panel-mounted instrument with an
documentation to ensure the correct use and integrated touch screen. Therefore it needs to
safe functioning of mPDS 5. be installed in:
• The documentation is a part of the product. - a control panel
Keep this document for the complete working - a switch cabinet
life of the product and make sure it is easily - a housing delivered by Anton Paar
accessible to all people involved with the prod-
uct. If you receive any additions or revisions to Maintenance and service
the documentation from Anton Paar GmbH,
• The results delivered by mPDS 5 not only
these must be treated as part of the documenta-
depend on the correct functioning of the instru-
tion.
ment, but also on various other factors. We
therefore recommend you have the results
1.1 General Safety Instructions checked (e.g. plausibility tested) by skilled per-
sonnel before consequential actions are taken
based on the results.
Liability
• Service and repair procedures may only be car-
• This document does not claim to address all ried out by authorized personnel or by Anton
safety issues associated with the use of the Paar GmbH.
instrument and samples. It is your responsibility
to establish health and safety practices and • The front of mPDS 5 is designed to the degree
determine the applicability of regulatory limita- of protection IP 54 and may therefore be
tions. cleaned using a dry or moistened soft cloth. Do
not use any liquid cleaner or spray. It is recom-
• Anton Paar GmbH only warrants the proper mended to switch the power off or to log off
functioning of mPDS 5 if no adjustments have before cleaning the touchscreen to avoid
been made to the mechanics, electronics, and unwanted manipulations. Do not clean the
firmware. frame and the rear of mPDS 5, these parts are
• Only use mPDS 5 for the purpose described in protected from pollution by an extra IP 54 hous-
the documentation. Anton Paar GmbH is not lia- ing.
ble for damages caused by incorrect use of
mPDS 5. Disposal
• Concerning the disposal of mPDS 5, observe
Installation and use the legal requirements in your country.
• The installation procedure should only be car-
ried out by authorized personnel who are famil- Returns
iar with the installation instructions. • For repairs send the cleaned mPDS 5 (instru-
• Do not use any accessories or spare parts other ment) to your Anton Paar representative. Only
than those supplied or approved by Anton Paar return the instrument together with the filled out
GmbH (see Chapter 3). RMA (Return Material Authorization) and the
form "Safety Declaration for Instrument
• Make sure all operators are trained to use the Repairs". Please download the Safety Declara-
instrument safely and correctly before starting tion form from our website www.anton-
any applicable operations. paar.com.
• In case of damage or malfunction, do not con- • Do not return instruments which are contami-
tinue operating mPDS 5. Do not operate the nated by radioactive materials, infectious agents
instrument under conditions which could result or other harmful substances that cause health
in damage to goods and/or injuries and loss of hazards.
C48IB001EN-Y 9
2 mPDS 5 - An Overview
1.2 Special Safety Instructions

• Do not install the instrument in areas with strong
WARNING
electromagnetic fields, as this can cause unsta- Description of risk.
ble measuring results. Warning indicates a hazardous situation which, if
• When using an intrinsically safe DPR(n)/SPRn/ not avoided, could result in death or serious
DSRn sensor, install the IPS 501 (barrier) from injury.
Anton Paar between mPDS 5 and IPS 501 must
NOT be used in areas with risk of explosion.
CAUTION
1.3 Conventions for Safety Messages Description of risk.

Caution indicates a hazardous situation which, if
The following conventions for safety messages are not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
used in this document: injury.
NOTICE
DANGER Description of risk.
Notice indicates a situation which, if not avoided,
Description of risk.
could result in damage to property.
Danger indicates a hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
2 mPDS 5 - An Overview
mPDS 5 is a powerful evaluation unit for continuous to concentration results using a wide range of
measurement of density, sound velocity, concentra- well approved, accurate and reliable formulas.
tion and other properties of liquids in industrial pro-
• Specific formulas to calculate concentrations or
cesses. It combines the highest precision with ease
other quantities in various units are available.
of operation and robust design.
• Single or multiple process lines can be handled.
mPDS 5 allows intuitive operation by a touch screen
user interface. • Changing the used formulas is done within a
mPDS 5 is a modular system equipped with boards few seconds just by changing the product num-
for various inputs and outputs and accommodates ber with a couple of taps on the screen.
the entire range of Anton Paar process sensors (L-
• The graphical output fields give you a quick view
Dens/L-Sonic/L-Com/Carbo Inline/Carbo 2100/Car-
of your process.
bo 2100 MVE/Carbo 510/Carbo 520 Optical, Cobrix
2600, L-Vis 510/L-Vis 520 Ex, L-Rix 510, Oxy 510, • There are self-explanatory functions for adjust-
Oxy 5100 etc). Analog inputs are available for addi- ing the measuring quantities to the laboratory
tional physical quantities such as conductivity, pH, reference results.
pressure, etc.
• There are functions for user authorization, trou-
ble shooting, diagnosis, backup of instrument
Features and Benefits
settings, audit trail, data export, etc.
• Raw measurement values such as density,
sound velocity and temperature are converted
10 C48IB001EN-Y
3 Checking the Supplied Parts
3 Checking the Supplied Parts

mPDS 5 was tested and carefully packed before 2. Check the delivery for completion by comparing
shipment, however, damage could occur during the supplied parts to table 1.
transport.
3. If a part is missing, contact your Anton Paar rep-
1. Keep the packaging material (box, foam piece, resentative.
transport protection) for possible returns and
4. If a part is damaged, contact the transport com-
further questions from the transport or insurance
pany and your Anton Paar representative.
company.
Table 1: Supplied Parts
Photo Pcs. Article Description Mat. No.
1 mPDS 5 with CPU/transducer and I/O boards 79233

or or
mPDS 5 with CPU board 47839
and boards:
- I/O board and/or 23961
- Transducer board and/or 23962
- DeviceNet board 97349
- PROFIBUS DP board Version 2 97350
(new from May 2011)
- PROFINET IO board 97352
- EtherNet/IP board 97353
- Modbus TCP board 97354
- LED Board (for Cobrix 5500/5600 only) 181969
- UV/VIS Board (exclusively supplied in combination 186160
with each L-Col sensor
1 4 GByte USB flash drive 87093
2 Mounting brackets 70335
1 Instruction manual
Options:
1 Stainless steel housing for mPDS 5, complete 86824
1 Power supply for panel mounting: 79719

Input voltage: AC 100-240 V
Output voltage: DC 24 V, 3.75 A
1 PROFIBUS DP 90° connector (12 Mbit) 18689
1 DSUB plug CANopen with terminating resistor 184983
1 Industrial plug 10G RJ45 96694

Cable diameter 4.5 mm - 9 mm
C48IB001EN-Y 11
4 Checklist for Quick Start-up
4 Checklist for Quick Start-up

1. Mount mPDS 5 (see Chapter 18.1). 4. Choose language (see Chapter 10.2)
2. Wire the in- and outputs (see Chapter 18.3). 5. Configure the alarms, analog interfaces, sen-
For details see the configuration sheets sors and units of measure according to your
attached to mPDS 5 needs. (See Chapter 19)
3. Switch on mPDS 5. 6. Start defining products using the required prod-
uct type, parameters and alarm limits (Chapter
TIP: Typically mPDS 5 comes with 4 default users
7.1).
including passwords:
7. In the main window tap on button <Select Prod-
- User: "Administrator" password: "administra-
uct> or tap the header line and choose a prod-
tor"
uct. See Chapter 7.1. The first measurement is
- User: "Manager" password: "manager"
automatically started.
- User: "Operator" password: "operator"
- User: "Guest" password: "guest" 8. Configure the output fields in the content area of
the main screen to match your needs (see
When mPDS 5 is switched on for the first time no
Chapter 6).
user is logged on. You have to log on by pressing
the user group indicator in the upper right corner 9. Compare the measurement values with the
and logon as a default user. The administrator has results from the laboratory reference method. If
the most rights. For details see Chapter 5.2 and required, carry out a first adjustment of the pro-
Chapter 11. cess results (see Chapter 7.2).
12 C48IB001EN-Y
5 General Operating Instructions

5.1 How to use the Touch Screen 2
3
Content area
User name
4 Status area
mPDS 5 is operated by tapping on the touch screen. 5 User grouop indicator
6 Buttons area
NOTICE
Fig. 1: Main screen of mPDS 5
• Only use clean and dry fingers to operate the
touch screen.
TIP: To select a new product tap the header or tap
• Never use any sharp objects.
the button <Select Product> in the buttons area. A
• Operate the touch screen with gentle fingertip list of all available products (Name, number and
pressure only. product type) is displayed. Products can be selected
by name, by number or by type. Change the order
by tapping on the header of a column.
5.2 Operating Elements of the Main The right side of the header displays the current
Screen time and the user group indicator. The user group
indicator shows the level of user currently logged on
After a self test of about 5-6 minutes the main (see Chapter 11).
screen (Fig. 1) appears. Optionally it is possible to get an icon in the header,
The main scree is divided into 4 areas: that tells you whether mPDS 5 currently exchanges
data with Davis 5 or not. Details see Chapter 10.6.
1. Header (information on the current product and
line, a user group indicator)
Davis 5 icon Explanation
2. Content area (numerical or graphical output
fields for the measured quantities) Active data transfer between
mPDS 5 and Davis 5.
3. Status area (warnings, alarms,..)
4. Buttons area (e.g. <menu>, <Laboratory
adjustment>,...)
1 2 3 4 5
Data transfer between mPDS
5 and Davis 5 interrupted. Typ-
ical reasons: PC is not run-
ning, Ethernet cable
disconnected, no valid license
for this mPDS 5 in Davis 5,...
Content area with output fields/graphs:

The measured quantities are displayed as numeri-
cal output fields (name, unit and value) or as graph-
ical output fields (name, unit and trendline with
variable scaling). By tapping the output fields, the
user can select quantity, unit, digits after the comma
and scaling/time for the graphs.
If alarms are activated, the background color chang-
6
es from white (=within specifications) to yellow (=
warning ... Hi/Lo limits exceeded) to red (=alarm ...
HiHi/LoLo limits exceeded). An arrow in the header
1 Header (on the left side: current product line and line of each numerical output field shows whether
selected product) the upper or the lower limit has been exceeded.
C48IB001EN-Y 13
The layout (=number and size of numerical/graphi-

cal output fields) of the content area can be changed
by tapping the <Layout> button in the buttons area.
If an output field reads ’inactive’ instead of the ex-
pected value, the sensor related to this output field
is not connected or defective, or the sensor and the
mPDS 5 are performing the start-up procedure.
Status area:
The status area shows one status button (mes-
sage list) and several status fields (e.g. hold on/
hold off, etc.) The status fields correspond with the
status of the digital inputs (e.g. Pump on/off, Hold
on/off, etc.) Depending on the product type there are
7 status fields possible.
The symbol used for the status button changes de-
pending on the current status of mPDS 5:
Fig. 2: Status fields in the main screen
Table 2: 3 Symbols used for the status button
4) ...Buttons area:
Status = ok
Instrument and measurement val- The buttons area consists of six buttons. The func-
ues are within warning/alarm limits tion of each button depends on the current menu.
The buttons in the main screen have following func-
tions.
Status = Warning Table 3: Functions of the buttons
- One or more warning limits
exceeded <Menu> To open the main menu.
- Special warnings could come
up reminding the user to <Select Prod- To select a new product
carry out a maintenance e.g. uct>
on a Carbo CO2 analyzer <Layout> To select a layout (Type, num-
Status = Alarm/Error ber and size of output fields).
- mPDS 5 errors (configura- <Laboratory To adjust the measurement val-
tion, etc. ) Adjustment> ues to laboratory reference val-
- One or more alarm limits ues.
exceeded
Sensor disconnected or defective <Start Davis 5 To start an adjustment/calibra-
Calibration> tion in Davis 5.
After tapping the status button a list of messages
appears (detailed information about the current TIP: Operate the touch screen with gentle fingertip
warnings, errors...). To exit the message list tap on pressure only.
the <X> button on the upper right side.
To highlight items
To highlight a row in a table or list (e.g. Manual
adjustment - selecting the value to be adjusted, ...),
directly tap on the row. The highlighted row will
change its color from white to dark grey.
14 C48IB001EN-Y
In addition to the above layout which uses the entire

screen for one line, there is one layout which shows
all lines in one screen. To select this layout tap the
<Layout> button and choose "Show all lines". In
Fig. 5 all lines (in this example all lines means 2
lines) are shown on the screen.
Fig. 3: Example: Selecting the quantity to be manually

adjusted
5.2.1 Handling Multiple Process Lines

The above information mainly applies to single line
systems and systems where several lines are in-
stalled. A line consists of a set of sensors, digital Fig. 5: Main screen of a multiple line system (multiple in
and analog inputs and outputs, one or several prod- this case means 2 lines)
ucts and other settings that only apply to one specif- TIP: Product selection is carried out either by tap-
ic line. E.g.: a plant has 2 beverage production lines ping the header of one specific line (e.g. Line: Line
- one for bottles, one for cans - on each line there is 1) or by tapping the key <Select product> in the but-
a Brix Monitor with L-Dens and 25 different prod- tons area on the bottom of the screen.
ucts. There are some differences when using a mul-
tiple line system. The main screen of a 2-line system When using the <Select product> button, an addi-
could look like Fig. 4. tional screen comes up to select the line you want to
adjust.
1
5.2.2 Logging On/Off
When delivered, the instrument comes with 4 de-
fault users. No autologon user is defined. The users
are "Administrator", "Manager", "Operator" and
"Guest". User name and password are identical.
TIP: Make sure to change at least the passwords or
add your own user account and delete the default
users.
To log on
1. Tap on the user group indicator on the right side
of the header in the main screen to open the
logon dialog.
2. Select a "User name", enter the corresponding
1 Line selector "Password" and tap <OK>.
Fig. 4: Main screen of a multiple line system with a line TIP: The user name "other" is used by service tech-
selector displaying one line nicians and for internal purposes at the manufacur-
Use the line selector in the header line to switch beer’s. It is not possible to delete "other".
tween lines (see Fig. 4).
C48IB001EN-Y 15
To log off
1. Tap on the user group indicator on the right side
of the header to open the logon dialog.
2. Tap the <Log off> button.
The user group indicator

changes its appearance to:
The instrument does not accept any input until

someone successfully logs on
To retrieve a forgotten password in the "log on"

dialog:
1. Tap the button <Forgot Password> in the but-
Fig. 6: Selecting a pre-defined layout
tons area.
2. Follow the instructions on the screen. To define the contents of numerical output
fields
TIP: If the administrator has forgotten his password
he has to contact the local sales representative. If a You can directly change the contents of numerical
user with lower rights has forgotten his password output fields by tapping on the field to be changed at
the administrator can reset the password and the any time. The changes are automatically saved for
user can enter a new one. the current type of product and layout. Quantity
name, unit and digits after the decimal point can be
Change the user rights of the operator:
selected via drop-down boxes.
The rights of all "Operators" can be set via menu
"Setup > Operator Permissions" To define the contents of graphical output fields
The following permissions can be switched on/off: You can directly change the contents of graphical
output fields at any time. Changes are automatically
- Starting Davis 5 Calibrations
saved for the current type of product and layout.
- Adjust
- Change product Tap on the output field in the main screen to be
- Reset alarm changed.
TIP: The settings apply to all users of user group 1. Select and define "Name", "Unit"and "Digits"
"Operator". You can easily add users only allowed using the respective drop-down boxes and tap
to change the product, but not allowed to carry out <OK>. "Scaling" and "Time" is only available for
adjustments. graphical output fields.
Related topics
Creating, Editing and Deleting User Accounts:
Chapter 11.2
Audit Trail: Chapter 12
Layout - Output Fields (Size, Number and Contents)
To define the number of graphical and numeri-

cal output fields:
1. Tap <Layout> in the buttons area in the main
screen.
2. Tap a list item, comfirm by tapping <OK> and
mPDS 5 jumps back to the main screen select-
ing the required layout.
TIP: There are layouts for single line systems and Fig. 7: Changing the contents of a graphical output field
layouts for multiple line systems.
16 C48IB001EN-Y
The "Scaling" describes the y-axis of the graph. 5.3 Operating Elements of the Menu
TIP: The alarm limits defined for each quantity are Screens
used for the scaling of graphical output fields too! All
4 limits are represented by red and yellow lines in TIP: For some procedures such as updates or cre-
the graph. See figure below. ating backups etc. it is necessary to use a USB flash
In the above example the user would see the Origi- drive. It is recommended to use high quality flash
nal Extract concentration in the graphical output drives from reliable manufacturers, otherwise some
field, time-axis = 5 minutes = 300 seconds and the functions may fail.
y-axis is 100% + 20% . Since HiHi - LoLo alarm lim- To access the menu, tap <Menu> in the main
its give 1.5 °Plato and the scaling of the output field screen.
is set to 10%, then the visible range of the y-axis is
1.8 °Plato. TIP: The user mainly works within the first 3 menu
items ("Adjustment", "Data Memory", "Product Set-
tings"). "Setup" and "Service" are mainly used by
service engineers. All configurations are in "Setup".
10% 1
1 2 a
100%
10%
Fig. 8: Explanation of the scaling of the y-axis (e.g. 10 %)
1 Header
2 Content area
a) Stylus
Fig. 10: Main screen
1... Header
On the left side of the header, the navigation path to
Fig. 9: Main screen illustrating the above example
your current position in the menu is displayed. You
When the time frame is changed, the graphing func- can go back to any menu position in your current
tion restarts at the beginning. For each quantity path by directly tapping on the respective box of the
1000 historical values are stored to be used in the navigation path.
graphical output fields.
2...Content area
In the content area, you find the menu options of the
current menu level and the menu dialogs. The user
group of the logged on user defines which menu
items are visible.
a... The "stylus" symbol in the right hand corner of a
menu bar means that there is no submenu but the
dialog window directly.
C48IB001EN-Y 17
3... Side menu 4... The buttons area
4
Fig. 11: Menu in "Data Memory"
If you tap on one of the main menu items , e.g. <Da- 1 Buttons area
ta Memory> as in Fig. 11, a side menu with a) the
Fig. 12: Dialog window
symbol for the current menu (e.g."Data Memory")
appears as well as b) the arrow for moving back to After navigating through the menu a dialog window
the previous page and c) the "home" symbol for appears where the actual settings are to be done. In
moving to the main screen. the buttons area all functions necessary for the cur-
rent menu/wizard dialog (e.g. <Edit>, <Next>,
<Cancel>, etc) can be found.
18 C48IB001EN-Y
5.3.1 Special Operating Elements

The symbols have the following functions
Symbols Explanation
Drop-down box:
By tapping the drop-down box, a drop-down list opens.
Highlight an item in the drop-down list and tap <OK> to select the entry and close the
list.
Check box:
The green check indicates that the function is active.
Input box:
By tapping the "A" - Symbol, an on-screen keyboard opens, which enables numeric or
alphanumeric inputs.
Enter characters/numbers/special characters by tapping the buttons on the screen and
then tap <OK>.
Fig. 13: On-screen alphabetical keyboard
C48IB001EN-Y 19
Symbols Explanation
Fig. 14: On-screen numeric-symbol keyboard
Fig. 15: On-screen numeric keyboard

The function of the special buttons are:
- <> Deletes the character on the left side of the cursor position
- <> Moves cursor position to the left
- <> Moves cursor position to the right
- <Alt Gr> Changes to special symbols‘ mode
- <123> Changes to number and symbols
- <abc> Changes to lower case letters
- <ABC> Changes to upper case letters
- <e> e sign. For e notation of exponential numbers, e.g. to enter 2.5 x 10-2 as 2.5 e-2
(only number mode)
- <-> Minus sign (only number mode)
20 C48IB001EN-Y
Symbols Explanation
"+" or "-" buttons increase or decrease a corresponding value. mPDS 5 mainly uses
these buttons in the dialog for new products to find the next higher or lower product
number not used yet.
Scroll bar:
If there are more entries than can be displayed at once, a horizontal or vertical scroll bar
appears.
By tapping on the scroll bar (fast movement) or on the scroll arrows (slow movement)
the visible content changes. By dragging the scroll box it is possible to move very fast.
To exit dialog windows with/without saving 5.4 Calibrating the Touch Screen
1. You have three options to exit a dialog window:
To get directly to the main screen without saving If you have difficulties with tapping the touch screen
the last entries, tap <HOME>. user elements (buttons, drop-down boxes, etc.), you
can calibrate the touch screen. This will improve
2. To get one menu level higher and save changes
touch screen accuracy and prevent incorrect en-
tap <OK> or <Save Adjustment> or <Finish
tries.
Adjustment> etc.
To get one menu level higher without saving 1. Tap <Menu> and select "Setup > Control Panel
changes tap <Cancel>. > Calibrate Touch Screen".
2. Follow the instructions on the screen. Use your
To navigate through wizards
finger, not a stylus. Make sure to keep your fin-
A wizard is a sequence of two or more dialog win- ger pressed for several seconds until the target
dows, connected by step 1 to step 2,3... To navigate has moved to a different place. This procedure
between the wizard steps, use the buttons <Next> must be repeated several times.
and <Previous>.
3. To finish and save the new calibration tap any-
You have 2 options to exit a wizard: where on the screen after the target has disap-
peared from the touch screen.
- To get one level up and save the settings,
complete all steps of the wizard and then tap
<OK>.
- To get one menu level up without saving
changes, tap <Cancel>.
C48IB001EN-Y 21
6 Available Measuring Quantities

The following table describes available variables for TIP: The following tips refer to the table below:
output fields in the content area for the analog out-
• If a specific product type is mentioned in the
puts and for the fieldbus. Most variables are basic or
description column, you will find additional infor-
derived measuring quantities, while others repre-
mation in Chapter 8.2 and Chapter 8.3.
sent the status of a digital input or any other informa-
tion required by the selected product type. The • Names including "-AI" basically refer to analog
variables are listed in alphabetical order and de- input (AI). If a fieldbus is used, the respective
pend on the selected product type. Some are used value can be transferred by the output datablock
by several product types, while others are only avail- of the fieldbus. In this case, there is no 4-20 mA
able in a single product. transmitter.
Some variables are used as auxiliary objects not rel-
• Measuring quantities that are important for the
evant for the operator.
user will be explained in detail. However, there
You find the main unit in the 2nd column - additional
are some measuring quantities that are only
units could be selectable directly on mPDS 5. The
important for Anton Paar internally (they are not
column ’Fieldbus Index’ is needed for certain pa-
specified in detail).
rameters related to measuring quantities (limits, ..)
to be changed via fieldbus and PLC. A ’yes’ in the
last column ’Adjustable’ means that the measuring
quantity can be adjusted (automatically or manual-
ly).
Table 4: Overview of measuring quantities
Name Units Description Fieldbus

Index
Absorbance 1 AU Absorbance at a wavelength of the first 111

L-Col measurement channel
Absorbance 2 AU Absorbance at a wavelength of the second 112

Absorbance 3 AU Absorbance at a wavelength of the third 113

Absorbance 420.10 AU Coming from L-Col for wine 150
AI Skim Density kg/m³, ... Density from the density sensor installed in the 234
skim milk line derived from a 4-20 mA analog
input
AI Skim Temperature °C Temperature from the density sensor installed 235

in the skim milk line derived from a 4-20 analog
input
Air-N2-O2 MVE ppm, ... Foreign gas (Air/N2/O2) concentration calcu- 93

lated by a Carbo 2100 MVE
Alarm 1 Boron EDF Special Alarm for type Boron EDF 59
Alarm 2 Boron EDF -"- 60
22 C48IB001EN-Y

Index
Alarm Output Special Alarm output for product type "Density 97

Control"
Alc. 20 °C Wastewater %v/v This is an auxiliary measuring quantity for the 1

COD calculation for waste water.
Alc./Real Ext.Ratio Ratio alcohol / real extract, used for beverage 22

product types
Alcohol %w/w, ... Used for beverage product types 18
Alcohol 1/2/3/4 %w/w, ... Product type "Beer Ferment. Ri" calculates 18/123/
these results based on the "Original Extract" 124/125
and the actual extract during fermentation.
Alcohol 15 °C %v/v Used for beverage product types 66
Alcohol 20 °C %v/v used for beverage product types 1
Alcohol 20 °C g/l, ... used for beverage product types 92
Alcohol 20 °C 1/2/3/4 %v/v Product type "Beer Ferment. Ri" calculates 1/126/
these results based on the "Original Extract" 127/77
and the actual extract during fermentation.
Alcohol Concentration g/l, ... used for product type "Bioethanol" 160
Amplitude Ratio 1 %, ... Internal service value for SPRn 2T/2S 100
Amplitude Ratio 2 %,... Internal service value for SPRn 2S 101
API 15 °C API number at 15 °C according to ASTM D1250 85
API 15.56 °C API number at 15.56 °C (60°F) according to 245

ASTM D1250
API 20 °C API number at 20 °C according to ASTM D1250 82
App. Degree Ferment. %, ... 6
Apparent Extract °Plato, ... 9
App. Extract Dens. 1/2/ °Plato, ... Product type "Beer Ferment. Ri" calculates 9/120/
3/4 these results based on the "Original Extract" 121/122
and the actual ectryct during fermentation.
Ash Content Ash content for the calculation of carbohydrates 28

in [g/12oz.] or calories in [kcal/12oz.] of beer
product types. Equals the product parameter
"Ash Content"
Back Flushing State of the digital output for back flushing 218
(on=back flushing active)
Back Flushing DI State of the digital input for back flushing by 220
remote control
C48IB001EN-Y 23

Index
Calories kcal/12oz kcal/w 20
Calories (S) kcal/kg 250
Calories kcal/kg 251
Calories kcal/100 ml 252
Calories kJ/100ml 253
Carbohydr. g/12oz Calculation of carbohydrates form real extract, 244

ash content and protein
Closing Time sec, ... Time the control output is closed ("Density Con- 99
trol")
CO2 AI g/l, ... CO2 directly from an analog input signal 5
CO2 Carbo "CO2 Carbo" is the Inline CO2 value from a 30

Carbo CO2 analyzer (in the closed line). This
value is used for CO2 compen-
sation of density/sound velocity. Typically this
value is not adjusted.
CO2 Carbo 1 g/l,... "CO2 Carbo 1/2/3/4" is the Inline CO2 value 30
CO2 Carbo 2 from a Carbo CO2 analyzer (in the closed line). 1
CO2 Carbo 3 This value is used for CO2 compen- 3
CO2 Carbo 4 sation of density/sound velocity. Typically this 5
value is not adjusted.
CO2 Carbo Package g/l,... Initially "CO2 package" is identical with "CO2 31
Carbo". This value should be adjusted via the
laboratory reference value from the bottle/can.
CO2 Carbo Package 1 g/l,... Initially "CO2 package 1/2/3/4" is identical with 31
CO2 Carbo Package 2 "CO2 Carbo". This value should be adjusted via 9
CO2 Carbo Package 3 the laboratory reference value from the bottle/ 16
CO2 Carbo Package 4 can. 23
CO2 Carbo Pressure bar,... "CO2 Carbo Pressure" is the CO2 value in pres- 32
sure units corresponding to "CO2 Carbo Pack-
age 1/2/3/4". This value should be adjusted via
the laboratory reference value from the bottle/
can.
CO2 Carbo Pressure 1 Pa "CO2 Carbo Pressure 1/2/3/4" is the CO2 value 32
CO2 Carbo Pressure 2 in pressure units corresponding to "CO2 Carbo 10
CO2 Carbo Pressure 3 Package 1/2/3/4". This value should be 17
CO2 Carbo Pressure 4 adjusted via the laboratory reference value from 24
the bottle/can.
CO2 for Compens. g/l, ... CO2 value used for compensating the density 15
and sound velocity - either a measured value
(CO2 Carbo) or a stored value/product parame-
ter (CO2 stored)
24 C48IB001EN-Y

Index
CO2-produced total %w/w, ... used for product type "Bioethanol" 15
Coating mm, ... Coating for sensors SPRn 2S 102
COD mg/l, ... Chemical oxygen demand 25
Color AI CU Color from color transmitter connected to an 49

analog input 4-20 mA
Color Beer EBC, SRM Color of beer according to EBC. Color Beer 118
[EBC] = Absorbance 2 * 25 * 10 / OPL.
OPL…Optical Path Length (L-Col parameter).
Color Beer Turb.Comp. EBC, SRM Color of beer according to EBC turbidity com- 119
pensated. Color Beer Turb.Comp. = (Absor-
bance 2 - Absorbance 3 *Turbidity
Compensation Weight)*25*10/OPL[mm]
OPL … Optical Path Length (L-Col parameter).
Color Int. (OIV) AU Color intensity according to OIV (wine) 153
Color Int. (Sudraud) AU Color intensity according to Sudraud (wine) 155
Conc.Diet/Brix %, ml Diet concentration derived from the °Brix value 51

NaOH, calculated from density and temperature
g/l TA
Conc.Diet/Color %, ml Diet concentration derived from the color value 50

NaOH, derived from a color transmitter connected to
g/l TA an analog input
Concentration %, ... 69
Concentration Actual °Brix, ... Concentration of sucrose-based or sugared 29

beverages without inversion compensation or
raw concentration of diets
Concentration Boron ppm, ... Concentration Boron (0 ... 10000 ppm, 100 °C) 57
Concentration Caustic %w/w, ... Concentration Caustic in the waste water of 214
breweries
Concentration Diet %, ml Diet concentration derived from the °Brix value 28

NaOH, calculated from density and temperature ("Bev-
g/l TA erages Diets") or average of Conc.Diet/Brix and
Conc.Diet/Color ("Beverages Diets/Col.")
Concentration Ext. °Plato, ... Extract concentration of wine, wort, ... 42
Concentration Ext. g/l, ... Extract concentration in [g/l] used for product 108
type "Wine"
Concentration Ext.1/2/3/ °Plato, ... Product type "Beer Ferment. Ri" derives these 42/104/
4 values from the basic RI and Termperature val- 105/106
ues using ICUMSA tables.
C48IB001EN-Y 25

Index
Conc. Extract Avg °Plato, ... Weighted average extract concentration in 1

[°Plato] used for product types "Beer Wort1/2"
Concentration Fat %, ... Concentration of milk fat 77
Concentration Fresh °Brix, ... Concentration of sugared beverages inversion 53

compensated
Concentration H2SO4 %w/w, ... Concentration of sulfuric acid 89
Concentration Inv. °Brix, ... Concentration of beverages with sugar or syrup 144
completely inverted
Concentration Oleum %w/w, ... 90
Concentration Sugar °Brix, ... 52
Concentration Sugar g/l, ... for Liqueurs 108
Concentration1 %, ... First concentration of 3 component solution 75
Concentration2 %, ... Second concentration of 3 component solution 76
Conductivity AI mS, ... E.g for display or water correction of diets 24

derived from a 4-20 mA - transmitter
Control Output Status of the control output ("Density Control") 96
Corr. Lactometer Read- Special result provided by the 2 milk product 164
ing types
Counter 1 26
Counter 2 27
Counter Increment 43
Degree of Inversion %, ... Sugar inversion causes suchrose to be split into 88

glucose and fructose. The degree of inversion
indicates how far a product is inverted.
Density kg/m³,... 13
Density 15 °C kg/m³,... Density converted to a temperature of 15 °C 67
Density 2 kg/m³,... Density of a second density tranducer 148
Density 20 °C, kg/m³,... Density converted to a temperature of 20 °C, 4

Density 20 °C - 1 Density at 20 °C for Fermentation Monitor 1
Density 20 °C - 2 kg/m³,... Density at 20 °C for Fermentation Monitor 2 129
Density 20 Inv Comp kg/m³,... Density converted to a temperature of 20 °C 56

and sugar inversion compensated
26 C48IB001EN-Y

Index
Density API 15 °C kg/m³,... API-density converted to a temperature of 15 84

°C
Density API 15.56 °C kg/m³,... API-density converted to a temperature of 244

15.56°C (60 °F)
Density API 20 °C kg/m³,... API-density converted to a temperature of 20 81

°C
Density CO2 Comp. kg/m³,... Density compensated for the influence of CO2 16
dissolved
Density Diff. to H2O kg/m³,... Density difference between medium and water. 152
Available in product types: "Liquids 2-Comp. 1",
"Beer 2", "Liquids 3-Comp. 1"
Density DMA HPM kg/m³,... 71
Density Inv. Comp. kg/m³,... Density compensated for the influence of sugar 55
inversion
Density Number Internal use only 54
Density of H2O kg/m³,... Density of water. Available in product types: 151

"Liquids 2-Comp. 1, "Beer 2", "Liquids 3-Comp.
1"
Density Press.Comp. kg/m³,... Density compensated for the influence of line 87

pressure
Density Ref. Temp. kg/m³,... Density at reference temperature 58
Density Ref.Temp. Density at reference temperature used by L-Vis 139

Product types to calculate the "Kin. Visc. Ref.
Temp."
Density selected kg/m³,... Used by L-Vis products to calculate the "kine- 138
matic viscosity". This is either measured density
or a stored density value.
Density Skim Milk kg/m³,... Density skim milk (either derived from a stored 80
average value or from a second density sensor
installed in the skim milk line)
Density T. Press. Comp. kg/m³,... Density , temperature and pressure compen- 162
sated, available in product types "Gas", "Petro-
leum, Fuels", "Petroleum, Fuels 2", Liquids 3-
Comp 3", "Liquids 2-Comp 1". If no pressure
coefficients are entered, this measurement
value equals the density. This value is used as
input value for polynomials instead of the den-
sity channel.
Density-Sound Number Internal use only 91
DPRn Skim Density kg/m³, ... Density from the DPRn/L-Dens installed in the 231
skim milk line
C48IB001EN-Y 27

Index
DPRn Skim Period Den- µs Density period from the DPRn/L-Dens installed 232
sity in the skim milk line
DPRn Skim Tempera- °C Temperature from the DPRn/L-Dens installed in 233

ture the skim milk line
Error Carbo Error code for Carbo 2100/Inline/2100 MVE, 146

Carbo 510/Carbo 520 Optical, Cobrix 2600
(details of the applied codes see table 70,
table 72 and table 80)
Error Carbo 1/2/3/4 Error code of the Carbo sensor 146/11/18/

25
Error Counter Internal service value for SPRn 2T/2S 103
Ethanol %w/w, ... Used for product types "Ethanol/water" and 18

"Ethanol Proof"
Ethanol 15 °C %v/v Used for product types "Ethanol/water" and 66

"Ethanol Proof"
Ethanol 20 °C %v/v Used for product types "Ethanol/water" and 1

"Ethanol Proof"
Ethanol Avg 1 %w/w, ... Average ethanol concentration derived from 236
counter 1
Ethanol Avg 2 %w/w, ... Average ethanol concentration derived from 238
counter 2
Ethanol Avg 20 °C 1 %v/v Average ethanol concentration derived from 237

counter 1
Ethanol Avg 20 °C 2 %v/v Average ethanol concentration derived from 239

counter 2
Ethanol Mass 1 kg, ... Total of Ethanol mass from counter 1 for prod- 220
uct type "Ethanol Counter 1"
Ethanol Mass 2 kg, ... Total of Ethanol mass from counter 2 for prod- 226
uct type "Ethanol Counter 1"
Ethanol Proof 60 °F Proof Used for product types "Ethanol/water" and 64

"Ethanol Proof"
Ethanol Volume 1 l, ... Summarized volume ethanol derived from 222

counter 1 for producttype "Ethanol counter 1"
Ethanol Volume 2 l, ... Summarized volume ethanol derived from 229

counter 2 for producttype "Ethanol counter 1"
Fermentation Speed %w/h used for product type "Bioethanol", alcohol con- 161
centration increase in %w/w per hour
Fermentation Speed 1/ %v/h Product type "Beer Ferment. Ri" calulates these 161/174/
2/3/4 results based on the "Original Extract" and the 175/176
actual extract during fermentation.
28 C48IB001EN-Y

Index
Flowstop "Flowstop": This measuring quantity indicates if 254

the product in the line stops (flowstop=on).
Davis 5 also uses this information in order to
ignore measurement values for statistics.
Generic AI 1 The 3 measuring quantities "Generic AI 1/2/3" 143

are used for indicating additional 4-20 mA
transmitters on mPDS 5 (in Davis 5). If you
want to monitor the pressure, you can configure
the mPDS so that a 4-20 mA pressure transmit-
ter is connected to a free analog input whose
value is displayed as "Generic AI 1" on the
mPDS 5. It would be possible to change the
name via a user function (e.g. "Pressure at buf-
fer tank"). Instead of a physical 4-20 mA trans-
mitter it is possible to transfer this value via
output data block of a PLC. A maximum num-
ber of 4 analog values can be transferred via
fieldbus.
Generic AI 2 -"- 208
Generic A I 3 -"- 209
Generic DI 1 The 2 measuring quanties "Generic DI 1/2" are 210

used for indicating additional digital signals on
the mPDS 5 (Davis 5). If for example you want
to see (record), when the filler door is open, you
can configure the mPDS 5 so that a digital door
contact is connected with a free digital input
whose state ("0"=closed; "1"=open") is dis-
played on the mPDS 5. It is possible to change
the name via user function (e.g. "filler door
open")
Generic DI 2 -"- 211
Hold Status of the "Hold" input to freeze concentra- 255

tion values during production stops. The mea-
suring quantities to be frozen can be
configured. This signal comes from a digital
input of the mPDS 5 (I/O board or transducer
board)
ICUMSA-Color ICUMSA Special color unit used for sugar solutions 245
Units (IU)
ICUMSA-Color ICUMSA Special color unit (turbity compensated) used 246

Turb.Comp Units (IU) for sugar solutions
Inline Pump Error Error code sent to mPDS 5 by Inline Pump 230
(details of applied code see Chapter 23.3.1.1)
Inline Pump 2 Error Error code sent to mPDS 5 by "Inline Pump 2" 236
(details of applied code see Chapter 23.3.1.1)
C48IB001EN-Y 29

Index
Kin.Visc. Ref. Temp cSt,.. Kinematic viscosity at reference temperature = 137

dynamic viscosity / density
Kin.Visc. Ref. T.-ASTM- cSt,.. Kinematic viscosity at reference temperature = 247

D341 dynamic viscosity / density caculated according
to standard ASTM-D341 (see Chapter 8.4.30)
Kinematic Viscosity cSt,... Kinematic viscosity = dynamic viscosity / den- 136

sity
L-Col Error - Error message from a color sensor L-Col 110
L-Col OPL mm Optical path length of L-Col 159
L-D FlowStop "L-D-Flowstop": This channel indicates if the 169

product in the line stops (flowstop=on) derived
from a Flow Monitor directly connected to a
sensor board of L-Dens 7000 or L-Com 5500.
Davis 5 also uses this information in order to
ignore measurement values for statistics.
Make sure that the sensor parameter "Use
Flowstop" is activated.
L-D Hold This channel indicates whether certain mea- 172

surement values are frozen (hold) or not. This
channel is linked to a Flow Monitor directly con-
nected to a sensor board of an L-Dens 7000 or
L-Com 5500. Make sure that the sensor param-
eter "Use Hold" is activated.
The measurement values to be frozen can be
configured in the channel settings menu of
each product type.
L-Rix -1 Conc. °Brix Sugar concentration derived from refractive 195

index and temperature of L-Rix sensor 1
L-Rix-1 Refr. Index Refractive index of L-Rix sensor 1 192
L-Rix-1 Temp. °C Temperature in °C of L-Rix sensor 1 194
L-Rix-1 Error Error code for L-Rix sensor 1 (details of applied 196
code see table 76)
L-Rix-2 Conc. °Brix Sugar concentration derived from refractive 181

code see table 76)

30 C48IB001EN-Y

Index
code see table 76)

code see table 76)
L-Rix Conc. Sugar °Brix, ... 243
L-Rix Error Error code for L-Rix (details of applied codes 241
see table 76)
L-Rix Refractive Idx nD 240
L-Rix Temperature °C, ... 242
L-Vis Error Error code for L-Vis (details of applied code see 249
table 74)
Mass of Extract kg, ... Used for product types "Beer Wort 1/2" 47
N2 MVE ppm, ppb Foreign gas (N2) concentration calculated by a 38

Carbo 2100 MVE
O2 MVE ppm, ppb Foreign gas (O2) concentration calculated by a 37

Carbo 2100 MVE
Orig. Extr. Wastewater °Plato, ... 2
Original Extract °Plato, ... 2
Original Extract 1 °Plato, ... Product type "Beer Ferment. Ri" gets these val- 29
Original Extract 2 ues from the product parameter "Original 107
Original Extract 3 Extract stored 1/2/3/4" or determines the Origi- 109
Original Extract 4 nal Extract 1 value automatically for single sen- 117
sor systems.
Original Gravity Used in the UK instead of Original Extract. Tis 12

value (OG) is calculated from original extract
(OE) acc. to following formula:
OG=OE.*(3,86098+OE.*0,01435427)
Oxygen AI ppm, ppb Oxygen concentration from oxygen transmitter 25

connected to an analog input
Oxy 1 error Error code from Oxy 510/5100 no. 1 231
C48IB001EN-Y 31

Index
Oxy 1/2/3/4 Rem. Cap % This is the remaining cap life read from the sen- 120,121,
life sor cap of Oxy 510/5100 #1/#2/#3/#4 122, 123
Oxy 1/2/3/4 Sensor cap Serial number of the sensor cap of Oxy 510/ 124, 125,
SN 5100 #1/#2/#3/#4 126, 127
Oxygen 1 ppm, mg/L, Oxygen from Oxy 510/5100 no. 1 212

ppb, g/L

ppb, g/L

ppb, g/L

ppb, g/L
Percentage of Blue % For wine 158
Percentage of Brown % For wine 156
Percentage of Red % For wine 157
Period s, ... Internal use 72
Period Density s, ... 180
Period Sound Vel. s, ... 181
pH AI pH-value derived from an optional 4-20 mA 140

transmitter at an analog input (AI).
pH Selected pH-value, used for the calculation of the COD 215

value. This is either the measured pH-value
("pH-AI) or a stored pH value (pH stored).
Pres.Gravity 20 °C This value (PG) is used in Great Britain instead 11

of density at 20°C.
Pressure AI bar,... Pressure derived from a 4-20 mA pressure 63

transmitter at an analog input
Pressure Carbo 1/2/3/4 bar,... Current pressure of a Carbo CO2 sensor 35/12/19/
26
Pressure Gas Carbo 1 bar,... Pressure in the measurement chamber at the 34

Pressure Gas Carbo 2 end of the measurement period 13
Pressure Gas Carbo 3 20
Pressure Gas Carbo 4 27
Pressure Line Carbo 1 bar,... Pressure measured in the line by a Carbo sen- 33
Pressure Line Carbo 2 sor with open valves 2
Pressure Line Carbo 3 4
Pressure Line Carbo 4 6
32 C48IB001EN-Y

Index
Pressure Selected bar,... Pressure selected is set to "Pressure-AI" and if 145

"Pressure-AI"  0 it set to "Press. Stored"
Pressure Switch DI Status of Seal Leakage of 2

L-Vis 520. Ex-proof L-Vis 520 can be equipped
with an optional pressure switch to detect fail-
ures of the primary mechanical seal. The pres-
sure switch output can be connected to the
mPDS 5 "Pressure Switch Input" to monitor
leakage.
Protein Protein content used for the calculation of car- 29

bohydrates in [g/12oz.] of beer product types.
Equals the product parameter "Protein"
Real Degree Ferm. USA %, ... = RDF (US). 19

The following formula is used:
RDF(US) =
100*[(OE-RE)/OE]*[1/(1-(0.005161*RE))]
Real Degree Ferment. %, ... = RDF 7

The following formula is used:
RDF = 100 * [(OE - RE)/OE]
Real Degree of Ferm. 1/ %, ... Product type "Beer Ferment. Ri" calulates these 7/163/
2/3/4 results based on the "Original Extract" and the 164/165
actual reduced extract during fermentation.
Real Ext./Alc. Ratio Ratio Extract / Alcohol 21
Real Extract °Plato, ... 3
Real Extract 1/2/3/4 °Plato, ... Product type "Beer Ferment.Ri" calulates these 3/78/79/
results based on the "Original Extract" and the 80
actual reduced extract during fermentation.
Refractive Index nD 240
Rel. Absorbance 1 % Relative absorbance at a wavelength of the first 114

L-Col measurement channel.
Rel. Absorbance 1 [%] = (1 - 0,1 ^ Absorbance
1) * 100
Rel. Absorbance 2 % Relative absorbance at a wavelength of the 115

second L-Col measurement channel
2) * 100
Rel. Absorbance 3 % Relative absorbance at a wavelength of the 116

third L-Col measurement channel.
3) * 100
C48IB001EN-Y 33

Index
Reset Input Product Types "Beer Wort 1","Beer Wort 2", 45

"Petroleum, Fuels 2 Visc", Beer1" : must be set
high ="1" in order to reset "Mass of extract",
"Volume", etc.
Status of data input, used for resetting different
totalized values.
Reset Input 1 Status of data input, used for resetting different 45

totalized values (e.g. Extract mass).
Reset Input 2 Status of data input, used for resetting different 225
totalized values (e.g. Extract mass).
Set Density kg/m³,... 94
Set-Actual Deviation kg/m³,... 95
Shade Shade (wine) 154
Skim Adjust Internal use only 78
Solids Non Fat % (SNF) Special result provided by the 2 milk 163
product types
Sound Number Internal use only 41
Sound Vel. Delayed m/s,... Sound velocity delayed, Prod. Types "Beer 3", 150
"Beer 3 AS"
Sound Vel. of H2O m/s,... Sound velocity of water. Available in product 153
Types: "Liquids 2-Comp. 2", "Beer 2", "Liquids
3-Comp. 1"
Sound Vel.CO2 Comp. m/s,... Sound velocity compensated for the influence 17
of dissolved CO 2
Sound Vel.Diff. to H2O m/s,... Difference between sound velocity measured 154
and sound velocity of water. Available in prod-
uct Types: "Liquids 2-Comp. 2", "Beer 2", "Liq-
uids 3-Comp. 1"
Sound Vel.Ref.Temp. m/s,... Sound velocity at reference temperature 74
Sound Velocity m/s,... 14
Spec.Grav.0/0 °C The density at a special temperature of a liquid 70

to be measured is divided by the density of
water at reference temperature. The tempera-
tures can vary depending on the liquid and the
application.
Spec.Grav.15/15.56°C -"- 86
Spec.Grav.15.56/ -"- 246

15.56°C
Spec.Grav.20/15.56°C -"- 83
34 C48IB001EN-Y

Index
Spec.Gravity 20°C -"- 10
Specific Gravity -"- 73
Standard Density kg/m³, ... 98
Start Input Product Types "Beer Wort 1", "Beer Wort 2", 46
"Petroleum, Fuels 2 Visc", "Beer 1": must be
high ="1" in order to start the totalization.
Sugar-AI °Brix Sugar concentration for the calculation of 244

ICUMSA Color and ICUMSA Color Turb.Comp.
Sugar Carbo °Brix Sugar concentration from Cobrix 2600 204
Tank 1 started Used with product type "Beer Fermentation Ri" 2

This channel is used to show the status of the
tanks equipped with Fermentation Monitor (L-
true (0) or
Rix). Tank 1 started equals the product parame-
false (1)
ter "Start tank 1" etc. (see Chapter 8.4.32 and
instruction manual of the Fermentation Monitor
for more details).
Tank 2 started true (0) or Used with product type "Beer Fermentation Ri" 4
false (1) This channel is used to show the status of the
for more details).
Rix). Tank 3started equals the product parame-
for more details).
for more details).
Temp Skim Milk °C,... Temperature skim milk (either derived from a 79
stored average value or from a second density
sensor installed in the skim milk line)
Temperature °C,... 8
C48IB001EN-Y 35

Index
Temperature Carbo 1 °C,... 36

Temperature Carbo 2 14
Temperature °F or Tem- °F 23
perature °F SPR
Temperature 2 °C,... Temperature of a second density sensor 147
Temperature Carbo °C,... 36
Temperature DPR °C,... 40
Temperature L-Vis °C,... 134
Temperature Oxy 1 °C,... Temp. from Oxy 510/5100 smart sensor no. 1 213
Temperature SPR °C,... 39
Total Mass kg Totalized mass used for product types "Beer 227
Wort 1/2", "Petroleum, Fuels 2 Visc", "Beer 1",
"Ethanol Counter", "Bioethanol".
Total mass 1 kg, ... Summarized total mass derived from counter 1 47
for "producttype ethanol counter 1"
Total mass 2 kg, ... Summarized total mass derived from counter 2 227
for "producttype ethanol counter 1"
Total volume 1 l, ... Summarized total volume derived from counter 221
1 for producttype "ethanol counter 1"
Total Solids % Special result provided by the 2 milk product 165

types. It is the sum of the fat concentration and
the solids non fat (SNF)
Total volume 2 l, ... Summarized total volume derived from counter 228
2 for producttype "ethanol counter 1"
Turbidity Turbidity derived from an optional turbidity 141

transmitter at an anolog input.
Viscosity Pa.s, Dynamic viscosity at reference temperature 133

mPa.s,...
Viscosity Ref.Temp. Pa.s, Dynamic viscosity at reference temperature 135

mPa.s,...
Volume l, ... 48
Volume Flow Rate AI m³/s, Volume flow derived from a volume flow signal 142
l/min,.. of 4-20 mA at an analog input
36 C48IB001EN-Y

Index
Volume Increment l, ... Increment of volume of the counter of product 44

type "Petroleum, Fuels 2 Visc". This corre-
sponds to the increase of volume since the lat-
est query of counter.
Volume Increment 1 l, ... Increment of volume of counter 1 of product 44

type "Ethanl counter 1". This corresponds to
increase of volume since latest query of counter
1.
Volume Increment 2 l, ... Increment of volume of counter 2 of product- 224

type "Ethanol counter 1". This corresponds to
increase of volume since latest query of counter
2
Water 60°F %v/v Water content for ethanol/water-mixtures (pro- 65

ducttype "Ethanol Proof).
Water H2O %w/w, ... Concentration of water in % w/w for ethanol / 68

water mixtures
6.1 The most important measuring value/CO2 maximum value). If so, it will be used for
compensation. If not, the product parameter "CO2
quantities concerning CO2 measure- stored" will be used.
ment The measuring quantity "CO2 for compensation" al-

ways shows with which CO2 value the density /
Anton Paar measurement systems, that include sound velocity is being compensated.
CO2 measurement, provide many different measur- B) First and foremost it is used for the supervision of
ing quantities. A CO2 measurement value can be the CO2 content of the final product.
transferred to an mPDS 5 by different ways:
As CO2 gets lost during production, the CO2 content
1. Anton Paar Carbo 2100/Inline/2100 MVE sen- in the line determined by the Anton Paar CO2 sen-
sors or Anton Paar Carbo 520 Optical/Cobrix sors does not correspond with the values in the bot-
2600/510 Smart Sensor tle or can.
2. 4-20 mA - signal at an analog input (Carbo IT or The CO2 value in the line is used for compensation
a product by a third party) (A). It is adjusted with laboratory results in a second
3. CO2 value transferred by a PLC via fieldbus step in order to correspont with the value in the bot-
tle.
4. CO2 value stored with the product in the mPDS
5 (product parameter CO2 stored) The value in the line is the "CO2 Carbo". It will be
copied to measuring quantity "CO2 Carbo Pack-
The CO2 measurement has 2 important tasks: age". This value will then be adjusted with the labo-
ratory reference results.
A) It is used for compensation of the influence of dis-
"CO2 Carbo Package" normally is 5-10 % lower
solved CO2 on density / sound velocity.
than "CO2 Carbo". "CO2 Carbo Pressure" is the val-
First check if there is a CO2 value (source 1 ... 3) ue in the bottle/can measured in pressure units (ab-
which is within the min/max values (CO2 minimum solute pressure).
C48IB001EN-Y 37
7 Daily Routine Operations
TIP: The measuring quantity "CO2-AI" is the CO2- 6.2 Priority of CO2 Sources
value taken from a 4-20 mA CO2-transmitter (e.g.
Carbo IT) or received by the PLC via fieldbus.
If there is more than one source configured, you
The configuration of an mPDS 5 can be seen in the need to know the priorities.
configurations sheets. The product parameters
"CO2 upper limit" and "CO2 lower limit" should cov- Up to version 5.20 the priority of the 3 different
er the complete range of the sensors and your prod- sources for CO2 values was:
ucts.
1. 4-20 mA transmitter connected to an analog
The stored value should only be used if a CO2 fail- input
ure is highly probable.
2. Carbo CO2 analyser from Anton Paar
e.g.
3. Stored average CO2 value (product parameter)
CO2 Carbo = 8.01 g/l
CO2 Carbo pressure = 3.8 bar As of version 5.30 it is:
CO2 Carbo package = 7.6 g/l
CO2 for compensation = 8.01 g/l 1. Carbo CO2 analyser from Anton Paar
CO2-AI = 0 2. 4-20 mA transmitter connected to an analog
(CO2 stored = 7.8 g/l) input
3. Stored average CO2 value (product parameter)
If a source is not configured or fails, the next lower
level source will be used.

7.1 Selecting a Product 7.2 Adjusting mPDS 5 to Laboratory
1. To select a product, tap the header line or tap
Reference Values
<Select Product> on the main screen and high-
light the respective product. Liquids measured under process conditions some-
times give slightly different results compared to
2. Tap <OK> to confirm the setting. samples analyzed with laboratory reference instru-
ments. Therefore it is recommended to calibrate and
if necessary adjust mPDS 5 to the laboratory values.
The interval depends on your application and re-
quirements.
TIP: We recommend to adjust only the final results
such as concentration, alcohol, .. The only excep-
tion is Beer 1, where the density 20 °C and Alcohol
20 °C %v/v is used. If you adjust the basic raw val-
ues (e.g. density, temperature or sound velocity) the
derived concentration values are affected as well.
Example: mPDS 5 uses the adjusted density value
to calculate the concentration of 2-component liq-
uids.
If the adjustment does not have the expected effect,
reset the adjustment and adjust only one value per
adjustment procedure.
Fig. 16: Selecting a product
It is recommended to perform the adjustment of
mPDS 5 only by using the <Laboratory adjustment>
function on the instrument. It is possible to directly
enter "Gain" and "Offset" values in the "Manual ad-
justment" menu (see Chapter 7.2.3), but this func-
38 C48IB001EN-Y
tion should be applied by very experienced users and compare the values with the saved values
only. on mPDS 5 ("calibration").
TIP: Note that the term ’calibration’ means compar- - If the deviation between the saved values
ing a measuring instrument with a more accurate and the laboratory reference values is negli-
laboratory reference instrument without changing gible, quit the "Laboratory adjustment"
anything. screen by tapping <HOME>. Repeat this cal-
Adjustment always means changing the reading by ibration procedure at any time according to
means of a software adjustment parameter in your calibration interval.
mPDS 5 ("Gain" or "Offset" see Chapter 7.2.3).
TIP: You decide which deviations are acceptable
7.2.1 Adjustment According to Laboratory and which are not. Example: The target concentra-
tion is 10.3 % the limits are: Lo=10.15 %, Hi=10.45;
Values LoLo=10.05; HiHi=10.55 %. For such a product we
would estimate that any deviation between 0 ... 0.05
The adjustment according to laboratory results is
% is acceptable and an adjustment is not neces-
carried out in three steps:
sary. Such a decision also depends on the accuracy
1. Step 1: Open the laboratory adjustment screen of your laboratory reference method.
by tapping <Laboratory adjustment> in the but-
- If the deviation between the saved values
tons area on the main screen. When using a
and the laboratory reference values is too
multiple line system you have to choose the line
high enter the laboratory reference values of
you want to adjust.
the quantity you want to adjust by tapping the
Take a representative sample from the produc-
"A" symbol in the corresponding line.
tion line as close to the process instrument as
After entering the laboratory reference value,
possible and simultaneously tap <Save values>
the calculated gain or offset will be displayed.
to save the current measurement values on
mPDS 5. The values in the Laboratory adjust-
ment screen are "frozen". The header changes
from "Current Value" to "Saved Value".
If you want to quit the adjustment screen tap
<HOME>.
Fig. 18: Laboratory adjustment - step 2

3. Step 3: Finish the adjustment and save the new
gain values by tapping <Finish adjustment> in
the buttons area. This can take a few seconds.
If you press <Save values> once again before fin-
Fig. 17: Laboratory adjustment - step 1 ishing the lab adjustment, a screen appears which
TIP: Only measurement values that are adjustable informs you that the old values will be overwritten.
are listed! Confirm the security query by tapping <Yes> to
overwrite, if that is what you wish to do.
2. Step 2: Analyze the sample in the laboratory
C48IB001EN-Y 39
0,999972 g/cm3 (density of water at 4°C).

- To convert SG20/20 to SG20/4 multiply the
SG20/20 by 0,998232 g/cm3 (the dividend of
SG20/20 divided by SG20/4).
- To convert SG20/4 to SG20/20 multiply the
SG20/4 by 1,001771 g/cm3 (the dividend of
SG20/4 divided by SG20/20).
6. From the adjusted "Density 20°C" and "Alcohol
20 °C %v/v" mPDS 5 calculates: "Alcohol %w/
w" , "Original Extract", "Real Extract" "Specific
Gravity" and "Present Gravity","Density 15°C"
and "Alcohol 15 °C % V/Vis°C v/v".
7. From the adjusted "Alcohol %w/w" , "Original
Extract", "Real Extract" "Specific Gravity" mPDS
Fig. 19: Security query 5 calculates: "OriginalGravity", "Apparent
Extract" , "Apparent Deg. Ferm.", "Real Deg
Ferm.", "Real Deg.Ferm.USA", "Calories kcal/
7.2.2 Tips for the adjustment of certain prod- 12oz"" "Real Ext./Eth. Ratio" and "Eth./Real Ext.
uct types Ratio".
TIP: Note that there are 4 levels in the ’adjustment’
7.2.2.1 Product Types "Beer 1" and "Beer 2" hierarchy of "Beer 1" and "Beer 2". If you adjust a
quantity in the highest level no other quantities are
Product types "Beer 1"/"Beer 2" equal the former affected. If values of a lower level are adjusted all
Beer Monitor 2 used in the mPDS 2000 and provide higher level values could be affected.
a wide range of measurement values with different
interconnections.
7.2.2.2 Product type "Beer 1 Custom"
4. The basic raw values of "Beer 1"/"Beer 2" are
density, sound velocity, temperature and in Also the product type "Beer 1 Custom" can be acti-
many cases CO2. These values are normally vated on demand. The formulas are exactly the
not adjusted. same, the calculation procedure has been adapted.
If you cannot measure alcohol and density at 20 °C
5. From these basic values mPDS 5 derives "Den- in the laboratory, this product type is appropriate as
sity 20 °C" and "Alcohol 20°C %v/v". These 2 both values are the basis for the adjustment of prod-
quantities should be adjusted according to uct types beer 1 and beer 2.
results from a PBA-B (Packaged Beverage Ana-
lyzer - Beer from Anton Paar ... Alcolyzer/DMA). Many concentration values are calculated simulta-
When these 2 most important values match the neously, hence they are adjusted simultaneously
laboratory results then all other derived quanti- without affecting each other. The following measur-
ties must be correct as well and no additional ing quantities are calculated from the raw values
adjustment is required. density, sound velocity, temperature and CO2 si-
multaneously:
TIP: The "density 20 °C" - values in the mPDS 5 are
CO2-compensated. Therefore they must be com- Alcohol %w/w, alcohol %v/v 20 °C, alcohol %v/v 15
pared with the CO2-compensated values of the lab- °C, original extract, real extract, density at 20 °C,
oratory. In the Alcolyzer Plus the "density degassed" density at 15 °C, specific gravity, present gravity.
value must be used while in the Alcolyzer M "Densi- The following quantities are derived from the adjust-
ty (CO2 Corr.") is used. These values are only valid ed measuring quantities in a second step:
for adjustment purposes if the laboratory system is
set to measure at 20°C. Any other value, i.e. SG 20/ App. Degree Ferment.
4, SG 20/20, alcohol %m/m, or similar will result in Real Degree Ferment.
an incorrect adjustment! Apparent Extract
Original Gravity
- To convert SG20/20 to D20 multiply the SG Real Degree Ferm. USA
by 0,998204 g/cm3 (density of water at Calories kcal/12oz
20°C). Real Ext./Alc. Ratio
- To convert SG20/4 to D20 multiply the SG by Alc./ Real Ext. Ratio
40 C48IB001EN-Y
7.2.2.3 Product type "Beverages Diets" After a 2-3 adjustments using several concen-
trate batches:
This product type is used for the measurement of Start calibrating the average value “Concentration
beverages with artificial sweeteners. Several refer- Diet” instead of the 2 values “Conc. Diet/Brix” and
ence methods are used in the laboratory depending “Conc. Diet/Color”. We recommend using Davis 5
on the product. The mPDS 5 displays an initial value for the calibration/adjustment procedure.
of "Concentration Diet" typically in the range of 0 ...
2 % (e.g. 0,25 %). If there is an average deviation to the laboratory ref-
erence values which is not acceptable, then adjust
Carry out a first laboratory adjustment using the re- “Concentration Diet”.
sults from the laboratory reference method. De-
pending on the reference method, one of the TIP: The color of cola products comes from cara-
following units will be used: "%" , "ml NAOH" or "g/l mel. Caramel is a polysaccharide produced by heat-
TA" ("TA" stands for titratable acids) . Select the unit ing of concentrated sucrose aqueous solutions. The
at the online window matching the laboratory (e.g. longer the heating lasts, the darker the color. During
an initial mPDS 5 value of 0,25 % is then converted this process water is liberated and the density de-
to "100%" or "11 ml TA" or etc). creases. The caramel concentrate is not stable. The
caramelization continues also at ambient tempera-
TIP: The initial value of "Concentration Diet" (and ture, causing a small change in density and color.
“Concentration Actual") of a Diet Cola beverage Using an additional color transmitter for diets ageing
should be between 0.25 and 0.3 % (°Brix). If the val- effects of the concentrate can be compensated and
ue for Diet Cola beverages is beyond this range, the accuracy is considerably increased.
check the CO2 measurement. If the CO2 measure-
ment is correct, use the zero point correction to get
the correct initial value (product parameter "Zero
7.2.2.5 Offset or gain adjustment - a few guidelines
Offset"). As of version 5.30 it is possible to use the offset in-
E.g. the initial Concentration Diet =0.15 % then set stead of the gain for laboratory adjustment and in
the product parameter "Zero Offset" to 0.13 % (0.15 Davis 5.
+ 0.13 = 0.28%). For minor adjustments (e.g. 1-2% of the basic value)
For further details see Chapter 8.4.11 both methods are equally successful. However, in
some cases it may be necessary to use the offset .
7.2.2.4 Product type "Beverages Diets/Col." If it happens that a measurement value is very low
For colored diet beverages such as diet cola an ad- and even drops below ’0’ (e.g. alcohol of alcohol
ditional color measurement (4-20 mA transmitter) free beer), an adjustment using the gain is not pos-
can be used to improve the accuracy of the mea- sible because the gain must not be negative.
surement values. The product type provides 3 diet In such a case change the channel settings and
results: check the box "Use Offset" for the specific quantity.
“Conc. Diet/Brix” …. Diet concentration derived from
density 7.2.2.6 Product type "Beverages Alc./Sugar"
“Conc. Diet/Color” …. Diet concentration derived The following values are calculated in one step and
from color adjustments of any of these values have no impact
“Concentration Diet” …. Average value from “Conc. on any other value in the same group:
Diet/Brix” and “Conc. Diet/Color” Alcohol in %v/v 20 °C
Alcohol in %w/w
After start-up: Calories kcal/12oz
Adjust the “Conc. Diet/Brix” and “Conc. Diet/Color” Density at 20°C
values at the same time to the reference values from Concentration Sugar
laboratory. See also Chapter 7.2.2.3 (calibration Spec. Gravity 20°C
and adjustment of Beverages Diets). The following measurement values are derived from
TIP: If the initial “Conc. Diet/Brix” for colored diet the above (adjusted) values:
cola products does not lie within 0.25 … 0.3 then Carbohydrates
use the “Zero Offset”. See Chapter 7.2.2.3 for more Calories in [kcal/kg]
details. There is no need to set a special product pa- Calories in [kcal/100 ml]
rameter for “Conc. Diet/Color”. Calories in [kJ/100 ml]
C48IB001EN-Y 41
7.2.3 Manual Adjustment

The manual adjustment of mPDS 5 is only recom-
mended for users who are familiar with calculating
the gain and offset value from reference laboratory
values according to the following equation:
concentration (adjusted) =
concentration (raw) * gain + offset
mPDS 5 uses the above equation for each adjust-

able quantity. Before making any adjustment or af-
ter resetting the adjustment all "Gain" factors are "1"
and all "Offsets" are "0". Hence the adjusted values
equal the raw values.
Fig. 21: Manual adjustment - entering the gain and offset
TIP: mPDS 5 uses only the adjusted values for the values
main screen, the analog interfaces and the PROFI- 4. Tap <Save adjustment> to save the settings and
BUS. <HOME> to go back to the main screen.
To enter the gain and offset values The manual adjustment can be aborted at any time
1. Tap <Menu> and select "Adjustments > Man- by tapping <Cancel> or <Home> in the buttons
ual Adjustment". area.
7.2.4 Reset Adjustment

If the concentration values after an adjustment are
completely wrong or at least far beyond the expect-
ed results, someone could have made a mistake
while entering the laboratory reference values (e.g.
decimal point in the wrong position, 112.3 instead of
11.23 etc.). In such cases it is recommended to re-
set the adjustment and start with a new laboratory or
manual adjustment.
When resetting the adjustment in the menu "Reset
Adjustment" all "Gain" values are set to "1" and all
"Offset" values are set to "0".
To reset the adjustment

Fig. 20: Manual adjustment - selection of the quantity to
be adjusted 1. Tap <Menu> and select "Adjustments > Reset
Adjustment".
2. Highlight the corresponding quantity and use
the vertical scrollbar, if necessary. Tap <Edit> in 2. Confirm the question "Are you sure you
the buttons area. want to reset the adjustment of
product ‘ABC´ at line ‘Line123‘?"
TIP: We recommend to adjust only the final derived
with <Yes>.
quantities e.g. concentration, ethanol, extract. Ad-
justing the basic quantities (e.g. density, tempera- 3. The following message appears: "The
ture, sound velocity) automatically changes the adjustment of product ‘ABC´ at line
derived ones. ‘Line123‘ was reset sucessfully."
3. Enter the new gain and/or offset values. 4. Tap <OK> and then <HOME> to go back to the
main screen.
42 C48IB001EN-Y
7.3 Adjustment/Calibration of mPDS 5 you get the following query on the screen:
"A calibration was started a short time ago! Do you
with Davis 5 want to overwrite the last stored values?"
If you tap <Yes> the last stored values are overwrit-
In addition to the adjustment functions described ten by the current values. If you tap <No> a new cal-
above it is possible to calibrate/adjust mPDS 5 via ibration is started and Davis 5 stores the current
Davis 5. You start the calibration either directly in measurement values with the current date.
Davis 5 or you tap the button <Start Davis 5 Calibra-
TIP: The user decides which procedure is carried
tion> on mPDS 5 main screen. It is also possible to
out - calibration or adjustment. Calibration means
configure a dedicated digital input to start a Davis 5
comparing the process values with reference values
calibration via an external button or via a PLC. Davis
without changing anything in mPDS 5. We recom-
5 stores the current mPDS 5 measurement values.
mend to carry out an adjustment only if several cal-
These values are used for calibration and adjust-
ibrations give a significant average deviation.
ment purposes. (See details in the instruction man-
As of version 5.30 either the offset or the gain are
ual for Davis 5)
changed during the laboratory adjustment at mPDS
After tapping the button <Start Davis 5 Calibration> 5 or via Davis 5. Use menu "Channel settings" to se-
you get a feedback from Davis 5 in a pop-up window lect which parameter must be changed.
after the values have been saved. You have to quit
TIP: Do not register the same mPDS 5 on more than
the dialog by tapping <OK> in order to get back to
one Davis 5 server. Otherwise the button <Start Da-
the main screen.
vis 5 Calibration> won‘t work correctly!
If you tap the button <Start Davis 5 Calibration>
twice within one hour with the same product, then
C48IB001EN-Y 43
8 Product settings
8 Product settings
8.1 Quick instructions: Adding, Editing
and Deleting Products
The maximum number of products is 999. From Ver-
sion 4.10 the highest product number to be entered
is 65535.
TIP: To add a new product, you can make a copy of
an existing product with similar settings. Then re-
name the copied product and change its settings to
your needs.
There is always one product preset when mPDS 5
is delivered. This is product "0" named "Out of oper-
ation". It is used when the line is shut down to switch
off sensors with moving parts (pumps, Carbo, ...)
Fig. 22: Product settings step 1
and bring mPDS 5 and the connected devices into a
standby/safe state. We recommend that you add 5. (Step 2) Define the product limits (LoLo, Lo, Hi,
one product for CIP (see Chapter 8.2.2 for further
HiHi) by tapping on the "A"-symbol. Use the two
details). From version 6.40 it is possible to create an
additional product which behaves exactly the same scrollbars to scroll vertically and horizontally.
as product '0'. Use any name and any of the avail- See Chapter 8.3, Tap <Next> to move on to the
able product numbers and assign product type rep- final step.
resented by a hyphen ("-")
1. Tap <Menu> and select "Product Settings" to
open the products menu.
2. Tap <Add product>.
3. Tap "Add new product" or "Copy existing prod-
uct". When tapping "Copy existing product" you
have to select a product to be copied into the
new one. Tap <Next> to move to the next
screen.
4. (Step 1) Define a new "Number", a unique
"Name" and the "Type" of the new product and
confirm the settings with <Next>. For details see
Chapter 8.2.
Fig. 23: Product settings step 2

6. (Step 3) Define the product parameters by tap-
ping on the "A" as symbol in the last step (See
Chapter 8.4). In the parameter settings dialog
you can enter filter settings (See Chapter 8.5).
- Tap <Filter settings>.
- In a first step define the spike filter (filter size,
amplitude and activation check box). Tap
<Next> to confirm the filter settings.
- In a second step define the weighted moving
average filter (activation check box, Filter
size, Reset if within LoLo <> HiHi). Tap <OK>
to confirm these settings.
44 C48IB001EN-Y
8 Product settings
2. Highlight a product name and tap <Delete prod-

uct>.
NOTICE
Do not activate a filter if you do not fully under- TIP: The current running product can’t be deleted.
stand the impact. Expecially when measurement
values are used for control purposes do not acti-
vate any filter. A PLC control program and the 8.2 Available Product Types
spike filter can be totally incompatible and such a
filter can have distastrous consequences on the The following list describes the main sensors and
production. functions of all product types. Most product types
accept signals from optional sensors and transmit-
ters (e.g. Carbo CO2 analyzer for beverages con-
taining CO2, oxygen sensors, pressure sensors,
etc.)
Product types replace the well-known application
programs of mPDS 2000/1100. All features previ-
ously included in a specific application program are
now part of a specific product type.
The following table 5 contains the main types and
compatible sensor type.
Table 5: Compatibility of sensors
Main type Compatible sensor type
DPRn DSRn, DPR, L-Dens 4X7,

Fig. 24: Product settings step 3 L-Dens 7000
7. Tap <OK> to finish the new product entry. SPRn DSRn, SPR, SPRn 2S
(SPRn TT), SPRn 2T, L-Sonic
A new product is created. After tapping on the but-
DSRn L-Com
ton <HOME> you are able to select the recently
added product. Carbo Carbo 2100, Carbo 2100 MVE,
Carbo Inline, Carbo 510, Carbo
To edit a product 520 Optical, Cobrix 2600
1. Tap <Menu> and select "Product Settings" to L-Vis 510 L-Vis 520 Ex
open the product list.
L-Rix L-Rix 510/520/5100/5200/...
2. Highlight a product and tap <Edit product>.
3. Change "Number" and/or "Name". The type of The mPDS 5 offers a selection of the types below.
an existing product can’t be changed. If you Product types are pre-selected before delivery to
have to do so delete the product and start with match the needs of different fields of applications.
<Add new product> from the very beginning. TIP: All product types for beverages that contain
Confirm the settings with <Next> CO2 can also be used with an optional Carbo CO2
4. Follow steps 5 to 7 described in "To add a prod- analyzer. If only a Carbo CO2 analyzer is used on a
uct" above. specific line then choose the product types starting
with "Carbo ...".
To delete a product Depending on the current configuration, a selection
1. Tap <Menu> and select "Product Settings" to of product types is available.
open the product list.
C48IB001EN-Y 45
8 Product settings
Table 6: Overview of available product types
Product
Description and reference to available functions (product
Product Type Type
parameters)
number
- out of operation 0
Beer 1 Beer monitor with DSRn/L-Com (alcohol, real - and original extract 1
of beer, 0 ... 10 %w/w alcohol, 0 ...12 %v/v 20 °C alcohol, 0 ... 30
°Plato original extract, - 3 ... 25 °C). From version 4.20 the mini-
mum alcohol is -1% (required for nonalcoholic beer). Negative
alcohol values are not used for subsequent Original Extract calcu-
lations.
See Chapter 8.4.4 and Chapter 7.2.2.1 (adjustment tips). This
product type allows you to connect a volume counter and start/
stop signals for totalizing mass and volume and averaging alcohol
and extract. See Chapter 8.2.1 for details. From version 6.30 there
is a new parameter "Use Extended Formulas" which should be
activated to improve the quality of the results especially for low
alcohol beers.
Beer 1 Custom Beer monitor with DSRn/L-Com (alcohol, real - and original extract 38
of beer, 0 ... 10 %w/w alcohol, 0 ... 30 °Plato original extract, - 3 ..
25 °C). From version 4.20 the minimum alcohol is -1% (required
for nonalcoholic beer).
This product type allows you to adjust alcohol, real and original
extract, density at ref. temperature, present gravity and original
gravity in one step.
See Chapter 8.4.4 and Chapter 7.2.2.1
Beer 2 Beer monitor with 2 separate sensors DPRn and SPRn (alcohol, 2
real - and original extract of beer, 0 ... 10 %w/w alcohol, 0 ... 30
°Plato original extract, - 3 .. 25 °C).
See Chapter 8.4.4 and Chapter 7.2.2.1
Beer 3 Original extract monitor with SPRn (original extract of beer, 0 ... 3
30°Plato, -3 ... 25°C).
Alcohol determination using a stored average density (Beer Moni-
tor Basic, 0 ... 20 °C, 0 ...12 %v/v alcohol)
See Chapter 8.4.4 and Chapter 8.4.28
Beer 3 AS Original extract monitor with SPRn (original extract of beer, 0 ... 40
30°Plato, -3 ... 25°C) with special filters for Asahi.
See Chapter 8.4.4 and Chapter 8.4.19.
Beer Ferment. Ri Beer fermentation for up to 4 L-Rix installed in 4 different tanks. 72

For details see Chapter 8.4.32.
Beer wort 1 Extract of beer wort with SPRn (cold wort, lauter tun, brewing ket- 4
tle, range depending on product parameter "Formula" see product
parameters). This product type otpionally calculates "Density",
"Mass of Extract", "Total Mass" and a weighted "Conc.Extract
Avg." for a range of 0...35°Plato and 50 ... 110 °C.
46 C48IB001EN-Y
8 Product settings
Product
Product Type Type
parameters)
number
Beer wort 2 Extract of beer wort with L-Dens (cold wort, lauter tun, brewing 5
kettle, 0 ... 35°Plato, 0 ... 105 °C). This product type optionally cal-
culates "Mass of Extract", "Total Mass" and a weighted
"Conc.Extract Avg."
See Chapter 8.2.1
Beverages Alc./Sugar Alcohol and extract concentration of beverages containing sugar 11

and alcohol using DSRn/L-Com (Alcopops, Shandy, "Radler"
0 ... 16 %w/w alcohol, 0 ...20 °Brix, -3 ... 25°C).
Beverages Diets Diet (artificial sweetener) concentration using L-Dens (0 ... 2 °Brix, 10
0 ... 25°C).
Beverages Diets/Col. Diet (artificial sweetener) concentration using L-Dens (0 ... 2 °Brix, 32
0 ... 25°C) and a color sensor
Beverages Diets/UV Diet (artificial sweetener) concentration using L-Dens (0 ... 2 °Brix, 62
0 ... 25 °C) and a UV absorption sensor. See Chapter 8.4.11 and
Chapter 8.2.4.
Beverages Inversion Sugar concentration of beverages using DSRn/L-Com, calculation 8

of Brix fresh and Brix actual (Inversion compensation, 0 ... 15
°Brix, 5 ... 20 °C). The factor between Concentration fresh and
Concentration Inv. is 1.051 (Concentration Inv.=Concentration
fresh*1.051)
See Chapter 8.4.4
Beverages Sugar Sugar concentration of beverages using L-Dens (0 ... 80 °Brix, 0 ... 6
100 °C).
See Chapter 8.4.4
Bioethanol Alcohol, extract and CO2 produced during fermentation with L- 37

Dens
See Chapter 8.4.23
Boron EDF Calculation of Boron concentration(Special program for EDF 33

derived from an mPDS 4000 program,
0 ... 10000 ppm)
See Chapter 8.4.16
Carbo Beer CO2 measurement for beer (<14°Plato) with a Carbo 510/520 27
Optical/2100/Inline or 2100 MVE (0 ... max. 20 g/l depending on
sensor)
Carbo Beverages CO2 measurement for sugared beverages (>8°Brix) with a Carbo 28
Sugar 510/520 Optical/2100/Inline or 2100 MVE (0 ... max. 20 g/l
depending on sensor)
C48IB001EN-Y 47
8 Product settings
Product
Product Type Type
parameters)
number
Carbo Diets CO2 measurement for Diets with a Carbo 510/520 Optical/2100/ 31
Inline or 2100 MVE (0 ... max. 20 g/l depending on sensor)
Carbo MID CO2 measurement for sugared beverages (3 - 8 °Brix) with a 35

Carbo 510/520 Optical/2100/Inline or 2100 MVE (0 ... max. 20 g/l
depending on sensor)
Carbo Mineral Water CO2 measurement for mineral water with a Carbo 510/2100/Inline 29
or 2100 MVE (0 ... max. 20 g/l depending on sensor)
Carbo Multisensor CO2 measurement for up to 4 # Carbo 520 smart sensors on one 73
line in the mPDS 5. Because the Carbo 520 measures the CO2
concentration directly it is not required to define the type of product
in the line.
Carbo Sparkling Wine CO2 measurement for sparkling wine with a Carbo 510/520 Opti- 30
cal/2100/Inline or 2100 MVE (0 ... max. 20 g/l depending on sen-
sor)
Carbo Strong Beer CO2 measurement for strong beer (>14°Plato) with a Carbo 510/ 34
520 Optical/2100/Inline or 2100 MVE (0 ... max. 20 g/l depending
on sensor)
Cider Measurement of alcohol and extract of ciders in the range 0 - 15 60

%v/v alcohol, 0 - 20 °Plato extract and 2 - 26°C using DSRn/L-
Com.
CIP DPR For CIP cleaning of a Carbo 510/520 Optical/2100/Inline/2100 44

MVE with an optional concentration polynomial for 2-comp. sys-
tems with L-Dens.
CIP SPR For CIP cleaning of a Carbo 510/520 Optical/2100/Inline/2100 45

MVE with an optional general concentration polynomial for 2-
comp. systems with SPRn.
See Chapter 8.4.3
CIP Carbo For CIP cleaning of a Carbo 510/520 Optical/2100/Inline/2100 46

MVE. The measuring chamber of this product type is open. The
impeller of the Carbo 2100/2100 MVE is on up to 90 °C.
Density Control Control of density using a digital output. Additional alarm output 16
available.
See Chapter 8.4.12
DMA HPM External cell DMA HPM. (See Chapter 8.4.13). There are 9 results 15
derived from density and temperature according to ASTM D1250-
8 (Density at reference temperatures 15/15,56 and 20 °C, API and
SG at the same temperatures).
48 C48IB001EN-Y
8 Product settings
Product
Product Type Type
parameters)
number
DMA HPM Wide Wide Range polynomial for an external cell DMA HPM 39
Range See Chapter 8.4.15. There are 9 results derived from density and
temperature according to ASTM D1250-8 (Density at reference
temperatures 15/15,56 and 20 °C, API and SG at the same tem-
peratures).
Ethanol Counter 1 Calculation of alcohol concentration in [%v/v] 20 °C and [%w/w]

using L-Dens. Volume counters can be connected to the mPDS 5.
Following measuring quantities can be derived from the volume
pulses: total volume, alcohol volume, total mass, alcohol mass,
average concentrations. 2 separate counters can be connected.
Results for counter 1 and counter 2 are available indepentently
from each other.
Further details see Chapter 8.4.27
Ethanol Proof Ethanol concentration in Proof of a water/ethanol solution using L- 14

Dens (0 ... 200 Proof, temperature range depends on entered
polynomial for density 20°C). From version 4.20 the measuring
range has been increased to 203 Proof.
See Chapter 8.4.10
Ethanol/Water Ethanol concentration of a water/ethanol solution using L-Dens. (0 13

... 40 °C, 0 ... 100 %w/w ethanol). The alcohol concentration calcu-
lation by weight or by volume follows the OIML R22 while the
Proof calculation is in accordance with the AOAC method.
Fruit Juice Sugar concentration of fruit juice using L-Dens (0 ... 80 °Brix, 0 ... 7
100 °C).
Gas Standard density and specific gravity of gases using L-Dens. 25

Liqueur>30%v/v Alco- Concentration of sugar and alcohol in liqueur using DSRn/L-Com. 51

hol Alcohol: 25-40%w/w or 31-51 %v/v 20 °C
Sugar: 10-25 °Brix or 100-260g/l
Temperature: 20-40 °C
see Chapter 8.4.26
Liqueur Ri-Dens 1" Concentration of sugar and alcohol in liqueur using L-Dens/ 73
L-Rix; Alcohol: 0-45%v/v 20 °C; Sugar: 0-25 °Brix ; Temperature:
10-30 °C
Liquids 2-Comp. 1 General concentration polynomial for two component liquids using 19
L-Dens. It is possible to configure a second L-Dens sensor to carry
out special calcuations with user functions. For example you can
calculate a concentration derived from the density difference of the
two sensors.
See Chapter 8.4.3, Chapter 8.4.9 and Chapter 8.4.24
Liquids 2-Comp. 2 General concentration polynomial for two component liquids using 21
SPRn.
See Chapter 8.4.3
C48IB001EN-Y 49
8 Product settings
Product
Product Type Type
parameters)
number
Liquids 3-Comp. 1 2 general concentration polynomials for three component liquids 22

using DSRn/L-Com.
See Chapter 8.4.1.

using SPRn and e.g. a pressure transmitter.
See Chapter 8.4.17
Liquids 3-Comp. 3 2 general concentration polynomials for three components liquids 24

using L-Dens and a conductivity transmitter.
See Chapter 8.4.18 and See Chapter 8.4.24

using L-Dens and L-Sonic. The input quantity for temperature is
taken from L-Sonic.
See Chapter 8.4.1
Liquids 3-Comp. 5 2 general concentration polynomials for three components liquids 59

using L-Dens and pressure transmitter. The main application for
this product type is oil in refrigerants.
Liquids Dref/Conc 2 polynomials for two component liquids using L-Dens. 1 polyno- 20
mial for density at reference temperature (Dref) and a second one
for calculating the concentration from Dref.
L-Rix Fructose Measurement of refractive index and sugar concentration using 56

the ICUMSA (SPS-3 specification and standard) for fructose (full
temperature and concentration range)
L-Rix Generic Generic measurement of refractive index and temperature using 64

L-Rix. The raw values “Temperature” and “Refractive Index” are
provided and all additional results can be generated using cus-
tomer functions. "Oxy 510/5100" and "Carbo ... " smart sensors
can be used optionally.
L-Rix Glucose Measurement of refractive index and sugar concentration using 55

the ICUMSA (SPS-3 specification and standard)) for glucose (full
temperature and concentration range)
L-Rix Invert Sugar Measurement of refractive index and sugar concentration using 57
the ICUMSA (SPS-3 specification and standard) for invert sugar
(full temperature and concentration range)
50 C48IB001EN-Y
8 Product settings
Product
Product Type Type
parameters)
number
L-Rix Multisensor Measurement of refractive index and sugar concentration using 68

ICUMSA (SPS-3 specification and standard) for fructose, glucose,
sucrose and invert sugar. The type of sugar can be selected for
each L-Rix independently. This product type provides a special
Anton Paar sugar formula for the sugar concentration of soft drinks
exclusively in combination with the high accuracy model L-Rix
520. A special CO2 and pressure compensation is applied to the
refractive index.
L-Rix Sucrose Measurement of refractive index and sugar concentration using 54

the ICUMSA (SPS-3 polynomials and tables specification) for
sucrose (full temperature and concentration range)
L-Rix Sugar Counter Measurement of refractive index and sugar concentration using 69
ICUMSA (SPS-3 specification and standard) for fructose, glucose,
sucrose and invert sugar. The type of sugar can be selected. In
addition, this product type allows you to accumulate total volume
and mass and mass of sugar if a counter signal is connected. This
product type provides a special Anton Paar sugar formula for the
sugar concentration of soft drinks exclusively in combination with
the high accuracy model L-Rix 520x. A special CO2 and pressure
compensation is applied to the refractive index.
L-Rix 520x Bever- This product type provides a special Anton Paar sugar formula for 70
ages the sugar concentration of soft drinks exclusively in combination
with the high accuracy model L-Rix 520x. A special CO2 and pres-
sure compensation is applied to the refractive index.
L-Vis Auto Viscosity Viscosity measurement with L-Vis for products with any viscosity 63
within the specification of the L-Vis. The viscosity range is auto-
matically changed. This product type can be used only for Newto-
nian liquids. For non-Newtonian liquids the visocsity depends on
the speed, so the mechanism for changing the speed will not work.
In addition to the dynamic viscosity the kinematic viscosity can be
measured via a sensor or a stored density value.
See Chapter 8.4.2, Chapter 8.4.21 and Chapter 8.2.6
L-Vis High viscosity Viscosity measurement with L-Vis for products with a high viscos- 43
ity. In addition to the dynamic viscosity the kinematic viscosity can
be measured via a sensor or a stored density value. See Data-
sheet of L-Vis measuring range for this product type.
See Chapter 8.4.2 und Chapter 8.4.21
L-Vis Low viscosity Viscosity measurement with L-Vis for products with a low viscosity. 41
In addition to the dynamic viscosity the kinematic viscosity can be
measured via a sensor or a stored density value. See Datasheet
of L-Vis measuring range for this product type.
C48IB001EN-Y 51
8 Product settings
Product
Product Type Type
parameters)
number
L-Vis Mid viscosity Viscosity measurement with L-Vis for products with a medium vis- 42
cosity. In addition to the dynamic viscosity the kinematic viscosity
can be measured via a sensor or a stored density value. See
Datasheet of L-Vis measuring range for this product type
Milk Milk fat determination using one density sensor and skim milk 17
adjustment function. This product type calculates density at 20 °C,
specific gravity at 20 °C, “solids non fat” (SNF), “corrected lactom-
eter reading” (CLR) and total solids (TS) additionally. (Default
range: 30 °C ...70 °C, other ranges possible) See Chapter 8.4.14
Milk 2 Milk fat determination using 2 density sensors: one for the stan- 67
dardized milk and a second one for the skim milk. “Milk 2” calcu-
lates the fat content from the continuously measured density
difference. It is also possible to use two 4-20 mA inputs for skim
milk density and skim milk temperature instead of directly connect-
ing a second L-Dens.
In addition this product type calculates density at 20 °C, specific
gravity at 20 °C, “solids non fat” (SNF), “Corrected Lactometer
Reading” (CLR) and total solids (TS).
See Chapter 8.2.5
Oxy Multisensor Stand alone Oxygen measurement with up to 4 Oxy 510/5100 sen- 52
sors per line.
Petroleum, Fuels Density at reference temperature for petroleum products using an 18

L-Dens (ASTM D 1250-80). Reference temperature 15 °C or 20
°C.
Chapter 8.4.7 and Chapter 8.4.24
Petroleum, Fuels 2 Density at reference temperature for petroleum products using an 58

L-Dens (ASTM D 1250-2008). There are some differences in the
calculation of the reference values e.g.:
- temperature is not rounded any more
- the new formulas accept the pressure as optional input value
Petroleum, Fuels 2, Density at reference temperature for petroleum products using an 61

Visc L-Dens (ASTM D 1250-2008). This product type equals "Petro-
leum, Fuels 2" with some additional features:
Optional L-Vis sensor for dynamic and kinematic viscosity
Volume counter input
Start - Stop input for totalization of volume and mass
Pressure switch input for leakage detection of L-Vis
see Chapter 8.2.3
52 C48IB001EN-Y
8 Product settings
Product
Product Type Type
parameters)
number
Saccharose Inversion Sugar concentration of saccharose syrup using DSRn/L-Com, cal- 9

culation of Brix fresh and Brix actual (Inversion compensation
standard range: 60 ... 75 °Brix , 60 ... 95 °C). The DEFAULT factor
is 1.051 (Concentration Inv.=Concentration fresh*1.051). It is pos-
sible to change this default factor using parameter "Factor Fresh-
Inv". See Chapter 8.3.
Setting the product parameter "Full range" to "1" would change the
formula: 10 -70 °C, 0 - 67 °Brix.Both formulas can only be used for
sirup without CO2 content!
Sulfuric Acid/Oleum Concentration of sulfuric acid /Oleum using DSRn/L-Com (90 ... 26
110 %w/w H2SO4, 20 ... 40 °C)
Sulfuric Acid/Oleum 2 Concentration of acid /Oleum using L-Dens and L-Sonic (90 ... 110 47
%w/w H2SO4, 20 ... 40 °C)
Wastewater 1 COD measurement with DSRn(or L-Com)/Conductivity Transmit- 49

ter in the wastewater of breweries
See Chapter 8.4.25
Wastewater 2 COD measurement with DPRn/SPRn/Conductivity Transmitter in 50

the wastewater of breweries
See Chapter 8.4.25
Wine Alcohol and extract concentration of wine using DSRn/L-Com (0 ... 12

16 %w/w alcohol, 0... 10 % w/w extract, -3 ... 25°C).
See Chapter 8.4.4
8.2.1 Product Types "Beer Wort 1", "Beer rate. For this purpose you need a special mPDS 5
configuration including counter input, start and reset
Wort 2" , "Beer 1" and "L-Rix Sugar Counter" inputs,..etc.
- Additional Information Connect a volume counter to the digital input which
was set up as counter. Set the weight of the counter
Product types "Beer Wort 1", "Beer Wort 2", "Beer 1"
as required (e.g. 1 pulse equals 50 l) and start the
and "L-Rix Sugar Counter" offer additional features
totalization by setting the digital "Start Input" to "1".
besides calculating the meassuring values e.g. "Al-
mPDS 5 starts summing and averaging the different
cohol", "Real Extract", "Concentration Ext". Using
results. Summing and averaging is only carried out
an optional volume counter (measurement values
as long as ’Start Input’ is "1".
"Volume" and "Volume Increment" in [l]) these prod-
uct types calculate several additional results: To reset the averaged and totalizied results set "Re-
set Input" to "1" or change product.
"Total Mass" in [kg], "Total Alcohol Mass" in [kg],
"Total Alcohol Volume" in [L], "Alcohol Avg" ... aver- The used digital inputs/counter input are listed in the
aged alcohol in %w/w, "Total Extract Mass" in [kg], configuration sheets.
"Alcohol 20 °C Avg" ... weighted averaged alcohol in
%v/v 20 °C, "Extract Avg" ... weighted averaged ex- NOTICE
tract in [%w/w], , "Conc. Sugar Avg." ... weighted av- It is necessary to configure a counter, a digital
erage sugar concentration in [°Brix], "Total Volume" start input and a digital stop input. The totaliza-
in [L] ... Average values are weighted using the flow tion does not begin with an inactive start input!
C48IB001EN-Y 53
8 Product settings
A similar screen to the following Fig. 25 will show The following table contains a summary of important
up: measurement channels of product types "Beer Wort
1", "Beer Wort 2", "Beer 1" and "L-Rix Sugar Count-
er" when a volume counter has been installed and
properly configured.
Fig. 25: "Beer Wort 2" combined with volume counter

Table 7: Measurement channels of "Beer Wort 1", "Beer Wort 2", "Beer 1" and "L-Rix Sugar
Counter"
Measurement value (channel) Description
Total Mass Totalized mass derived from the volume counter information and the
density. The value is updated every second. (general formula: mass
= volume * density). E.g. if 50 L of beer/ wort are running through
the flow meter with a density 1.01 g/cm³ (1010 kg/m³§), "Total Mass"
is increased by 50.5 kg.
Mass of Extract /Total Extract The mass of the extract / sugar contained in the beer / wort / whey is
Mass/Mass of Sugar derived from the total mass and the extract / sugar concentration in
[°Plato] (equals %w/w). The value is updated every second. E.g. if
50 kg of beer / wort are running through the flow meter and the con-
centration is 12 °Plato, 6 kg (50x0.12) of extract are added to "Mass
of Extract" / "Total Extract Mass" / "Mass of Sugar".
Total Alcohol Mass The mass of the alcohol contained in the beer is derived from the
total mass and the alcohol concentration in [%w/w]. The value is
updated every second. E.g. if 50 kg of beer are running through the
flow meter and the alcohol concentration is 5 %w/w, 2.5 kg
(50x0.05) of alcohol are added to "Total Alcohol Mass".
Volume / Total Volume This value is derived from the volume counter and represents the
totaliized volume of the beer / wort running through the flow meter.
The value is updeted every second. E.g. if 3 pulses are counted for
the last second and the weight of the counter pulses has been set to
50 L, "Volume" is increased by 150 L.
Total Alcohol Volume This value is derived from the volume counter and the alcohol con-
centration in %v/v 20 °C. It represents the totalized alcohol volume
of the beer running through the flow meter. The value is updated
every second. E.g. if 3 pulses are counted in the last second and the
weight of the counter pulses has been set to 50 L, "Volume" is
increased by 150 L and the Total Alcohol Volume is increased by
Volume*Alcohol in %v/v 20 °C. E.g. if the Alcohol concentration is 6
%v/v 20 °C, the "Total Alcohol Volume" is increased by 9 L
(150*0.06).
54 C48IB001EN-Y
8 Product settings
Table 7: Measurement channels of "Beer Wort 1", "Beer Wort 2", "Beer 1" and "L-Rix Sugar
Counter"
Measurement value (channel) Description
Density True density at measuring temperature
Concentration Ext. / Current extract / sugar concentration of the beer / wort / whey.
Real Extract / Concentration
Sugar
Conc.Ext.Avg. / Average extract concentration of the beer / wort /whey. This is a

Alcohol 20 °C Avg. / Conc. weighted average value using mass.
Sugar Avg.
Start Input This input is used to activate the totalizing function. If "Start Input" is
low (0), volume pulses at the counter input are ignored. All totalized
values are only changed as long as "Start Input" = 1
Reset Input This input is used to set all totalized values to "0".
Changing the product will also reset the values.
Measurement channels of "Beer Wort 1", "Beer

Wort 2", "Beer 1" and "L-Rix Sugar Counter" NOTICE
Do not select product ’0’ during CIP cleaning,
because you do not get any measurement val-
NOTICE
ues (such as temperature...) and Carbo sensors
It is necessary to set the weight of the volume
are not cleaned properly. They are switched off
pulses. Use the menu "Sensor and I/O manage-
by product ’0’ (impeller is stopped). In some con-
ment".
figurations, e.g. if a system uses only oxygen
sensors, it is recommended to switch all sensors
8.2.2 Product Types for CIP Cleaning off during CIP. In such cases you can either
choose product '0' or you create a new product
There are special product types for CIP cleaning of with product type '-' (from version 6.40) which
Beverage/Beer Systems with Carbo 510/520 Opti- equals product '0'.
cal/2100/Inline/2100 MVE: "CIP DPR" (for DPRn/L-
Dens and DSRn/L-Com), " CIP SPR" (for SPRn/L-
Sonic) and "CIP Carbo"(for Carbo standalone). Us-
8.2.3 Product Type "Petroleum, Fuels 2
ing product types "CIP DPR" and "CIP SPR" you Visc."
can enter parameters for concentration formulas for
acids and alkalies. This product type provides all features required for
the measurement of dynamic viscosity, kinematic
For systems without a Carbo CO2 sensor it is rec-
viscosity and density for petroleum and fuel prod-
ommended to create a product of product type "Liq-
ucts. In addition it is possible to connect a volume
uids 2-Comp.1" (DPRn/L-Dens or DSRn/L-Com) or
flow meter and to have the mPDS 5 totalize volume
"Liquids 2-Comp. 2" (SPRn/L-Sonic). Name the
and mass of a product stream.
product "CIP..." and select the product during CIP
cleaning.
Special features:
1. Digital input for an optional pressure switch
(Optional seal leakage detection)
Ex-proof L-Vis 520 can be equipped with an
optional pressure switch to detect failures of the
primary mechanical seal. The pressure switch
output can be connected to the mPDS Pressure
Switch input to monitor leakage.
2. Inputs for volume flow meter, start / stop signal,
reset signal (optional)
C48IB001EN-Y 55
8 Product settings
This product type includes a feature to totalize

the volume and the mass of the product flowing NOTICE
through the line. For special scenarios the method may be
adapted.
- Connect the passive volume signal to the
counter input. It must be pulses with a certain
“weight” (e.g. each pulse equals 50 L). 8.2.5 Product Type "Milk 2"
- Enter the weight of the counter signals in [L].
Go to menu “Setup > Sensor and I/O man- This product type requires two density sensors - one
agement > Counter” and press the <Edit> installed in the line for the final product (standard-
button. Enter e.g. weight = 50 if one pulse ized milk or cream) and another one installed in the
equals 50 L.. skim milk line.
- Connect the passive start/stop signal to DI
Start Input to activate or deactivate the total- The fat concentration is calculated from the continu-
ization function. As long as this signal is ously calculated density difference between the 2
‘high’ volume and total mass are accumu- products. There is no need for an extra skim milk ad-
lated. If this signal is low volume and total justment procedure.
mass are not accumulated.It is possible to
invert the signal if required (Menu: “Setup > There are 2 basic scenarios:
Sensor an I/O management > DI Start”). A) (Recommended) Use one L-Dens for standard-
- Connect the passive reset signal to DI Reset ized milk line) and a second L-Dens for skim milk
Input. When this signal gets "high" volume line).
and total mass are set to "0". It is possible to
invert the signal if required (Menu: "Setup > Logical sensors for one line:
Sensor and I/O management > DI Reset").
Name Description
TIP: Mass and volume are only totalized if the true
"density" is between 500 and 2000 kg /m³. DPRn Density sensor L-Dens for the
standardized milk
8.2.4 Product Types "Beverages Diets/Col" DPRn Skim Density sensor L-Dens for skim
and "Beverages Diets/UV" milk
B) Instead of an L-Dens for skim milk it is possible

These 2 product types provide 3 different concen-
to connect a 4-20 mA density signal to an mPDS 5
tration values for diets.
analog input and a 4-20 mA temperature signal to
Using "Beverages Diets/Col" you get the 3 results: another mPDS 5 analog input.
"Conc. Diet/Brix" (using density only)
This configuration with 2 analog signals is needed if
"Conc. Diet/Color" (using color only)"
the same skim milk is used for 2 final product lines -
"Concentration Diet" = ("Conc.Diet/Brix" + "Conc.
e.g. one for standardized whole milk and another for
Diet/Color)/2
cream.
Using "Beverages Diets/UV" you get the 3 results:
The mPDS 5 provides two lines - one for standard-
"Conc. Diet/Brix" (using density only)
ized milk and one for cream. The same 2 analog
Conc Diet/UV" (using UV absorption only)
current signals can be used for both lines.
"Conentration Diet" = ("Conc. Diet/Brix" + "Conc.
Diet/UV")/2 Logical sensors for one line:
The recommended procedure for the adjustment is
Name Description
the following:
- Carry out an initial adjustment of the 2 values DPRn Density sensor L-Dens for the
based on density and color (or density and standardized milk
UV)
Skim Density 4-20 mA analog input corre-
- The resulting average is automatically cor-
sponding to the density of skim
rect
milk
- Additional adjustment should be done only
for the "Concentration Diets" result.
56 C48IB001EN-Y
8 Product settings
ence temperature. The density at reference

Skim Tem- 4-20 mA analog input corre-
temperature is calculated using ASTM D1250-08.
perature sponding to the temperature of
There are 3 reference temperatures available: 15/
skim milk
15,56 and 20 °C.
E.g.: Use the 2 analog outputs of an mPDS 1100 C3) Using "Dynamic viscosity at reference tempera-
connected to an L-Dens sensor. One analog signal ture" and a measured density converted to a refer-
is used for the density e.g. 950 - 1000 kg/m³ corre- ence temperature. The density at reference
spond to 4-20 mA and 30 - 50 °C correspond to 4- temperature is calculated using an application spe-
20 mA. cific higher order polynomial. The coefficients of the
Refer to the configuration data sheet for the details polynomial can be entered. Contact Anton Paar if
of the actual mPDS 5 settings. you need support for the formula coefficients.
C4) Using the ASTM D341 to convert the kinematic
8.2.6 Calculation of Dynamic and Kinematic viscosity at process temperature to Kinematic vis-
cosity at reference temperature. Please refer to
Viscosities Using Product Types "L-Vis Low/ Chapter 8.4.30 for the details.
Mid/High/Auto Viscosity"or "Petroleum,
Fuels, 2 Visc" 8.3 Alarm Function (Alarm Limits and
The initial values determined by the L-Vis are "mea- Target)
suring temperature" and "dynamic viscosity at mea-
suring temperature". Because the viscosity changes Defining product-specific alarm limits is very import-
a lot with temperature in most cases a temperature ant to make sure that your production lies within
compensation to a reference temperature is re- specifications. If measurement values are out of
quired. In addition the kinematic viscosity is re- these limits, the background color of the graphical
quired. It is calculated using the following general and numerical fields will change:
formula:
- white background - the values are within the
kinematic viscosity = dynamic viscosity/density allowed range
Because density also changes with temperature a - yellow background - warning
temperature compensation of the density has to be - red background - alarm
carried out in many applications, making the matter Additionally, the symbol in the upper part of the sta-
even a bit more complex. tus area changes.
There are several combinations of the different re- It is possible to set up digital alarm outputs. When-
sults using different compensation methods de- ever a limit connected to such an output is exceeded
scribed below. the output goes to "high" status. Hence an alarm
A) "Kinematic viscosity at process temperature" lamp or beeper (beacon) connected to this digital
output would be activated. Whenever a digital alarm
This result is calculated using "kinematic viscosity" output is active the status button on the touch
and a "measured density" at process temperature or screen goes to "alarm/error".
a "density stored" value matching the product in the
line. For each measurement quantity 4 alarm limits are
available: HiHi, Hi and LoLo, Lo.
Please refer to Chapter 8.4.21 for the details
Defining limits
B) "Dynamic viscosity at reference temperature":
This result is calculated via the so called Arrhenius 1. Tap <Menu> and select "Product Settings".
function with parameter "Ea" and "Ref.Temp L-Vis".
2. Highlight the corresponding product and tap
Please refer to Chapter 8.4.21 for the details
<Edit product>.
C) "Kinematic viscosity at reference temperature"
3. Skip step 1 of 3 by tapping <Next>.
C1) Using "Dynamic viscosity at reference tempera-
4. Enter the limits of the quantities which are most
ture" and the stored density at reference tempera-
important for you. Enter warning limits Lo/Hi
ture ("Ref. Dens. Stored")
and/or alarm limits LoLo/HiHi and activate the
C2) Using "Dynamic viscosity at reference tempera- limit monitoring function by tapping on the check
ture" and a measured density converted to a refer- box.
C48IB001EN-Y 57
8 Product settings
(see Fig. 29)

Defining of target values
1. The last column in step 2 of 3 includes the target arrow up (value increasing)
values. The target values are not used in the
mPDS 5 but in Davis 5 they are part of the
graphical output fields.
Fig. 28: CO2 Carbo warning (Hi) limit exceeded
Fig. 26: Entering limits (LoLo, Lo, Hi, HiHi)
2
3
4
Fig. 29: CO2 Carbo upper alarm (HiHi) limit exceeded

1 HiHi (red) TIP: If you see arrows beside the name of a mea-
2 Hi (orange)
suring quantity the alarm has been activated. The
3 current measurement values
arrow up means that the value is increasing, the ar-
4 Lo (orange)
5 LoLo (red) row down means the value is decreasing.
Fig. 27: Explanation of LoLo, Lo, Hi and HiHi In addition to the limit monitoring function described
above it is possible to link one or more limits to ex-
The product-specific limits are indicated in the ternal devices via digital outputs or relays ("physical
graphs as lines/dotted lines. alarms").
E.g. it is possible to use DIO 3 of the I/O board in slot
3 as a warning output. Then DIO 3 is high when the
mPDS 5 will display a warning status symbol Lo/Hi limits of ethanol or original extract are exceed-
if the Lo or Hi limit is exceeded. Additionally the ed. It is possible to use DIO 4 of I/O board in slot 3
graph changes its background color to yellow. (see as an alarm output. Then DIO 4 is high when the
Fig. 28) HiHi/LoLo limits of ethanol or original extract are ex-
ceeded. Have a look at your configuration sheets for
mPDS 5 will display an alarm status symbol if further details.
the LoLo or the HiHi limit is exceeded. Additionally For details about "physical alarms" see Chapter
the graph changes its background color to red 19.1.
58 C48IB001EN-Y
8 Product settings
8.4 Available Product Parameters and the necessary settings have been made before de-
livery and you do not need to change the product
Related Functions parameters.
TIP: Do not change any parameter whose function
The functions of product parameters depend on the
you don’t fully understand.
selected product type. They are used to store formu-
Some parameters have to be entered in a specific
la coefficients, target values, limits, etc.
unit. The unit is then displayed beside the name of
The functions using the listed product parameters the parameter. If you want to enter a parameter in a
are described in the chapters listed in the table be- different unit then use the menu ’Unit Settings’ and
low. Some functions require additional knowledge change the ’Display unit’ to match your require-
not covered by this manual, however, in these cases ments
.
Table 8: Overview of available product parameters
Product Parameter Description see Fieldbus Index
AA Chapter 8.4.1 58
AB Chapter 8.4.1 59
AC Chapter 8.4.1 60
AD Chapter 8.4.1 61
AE Chapter 8.4.1 62
AF Chapter 8.4.1 63
AG Chapter 8.4.1 64
AH Chapter 8.4.1 65
AI Chapter 8.4.1 66
AJ Chapter 8.4.1 67
AK Chapter 8.4.1, Chapter 8.4.15 68

(Product type DMA HPM Wide Range)
AK Chapter 8.4.1 105
AL Chapter 8.4.1 106
AM Chapter 8.4.1 107
AN Chapter 8.4.1 124
AO Chapter 8.4.1 125
AP Chapter 8.4.1 126
AQ Chapter 8.4.1 127
AR Chapter 8.4.1 128
AS Chapter 8.4.1 129
Ash Content Ash content for the "Calories kcal/12oz" formula and 4
the carbohydrates in [g/12oz.]formula. In addition
there is channel with the same name to be used for
the online window or for any other output (Default:
0.11)
C48IB001EN-Y 59
8 Product settings
Average Filter Size Chapter 8.4.19 91
Average Filter Size Chapter 8.4.19 91
B Used for the caculation of kinematic viscosity accord- 2

ing to ASTM-D341 (Chapter 8.4.30)
Back Flushing Remote On Chapter 8.4.25 129
Back Flushing Remote Chapter 8.4.25 130

Time
BA Chapter 8.4.1 73
BB Chapter 8.4.1, Chapter 8.4.25 74
BC Chapter 8.4.1, Chapter 8.4.25 75
BD Chapter 8.4.1 76
BE Chapter 8.4.1, Chapter 8.4.25 77
BF Chapter 8.4.1 78
BG Chapter 8.4.1 79
BH Chapter 8.4.1, Chapter 8.4.25 80
BI Chapter 8.4.1, Chapter 8.4.25 81
BJ Chapter 8.4.1 82
BK Chapter 8.4.1 108
BL Chapter 8.4.1 109
BM Chapter 8.4.1 110
BN Chapter 8.4.1, Chapter 8.4.25 130
BO Chapter 8.4.1, Chapter 8.4.25 131
BP Chapter 8.4.1 132
BQ Chapter 8.4.1 133
BR Chapter 8.4.1 134
BS Chapter 8.4.1 135
CA;CA/C(5) Chapter 8.4.2, Chapter 8.4.14, Chapter 8.4.16 36
CB; CB/C(4) Chapter 8.4.2, Chapter 8.4.14, Chapter 8.4.16 37
CC; CC/C(3) Chapter 8.4.2, Chapter 8.4.16 38
CD Chapter 8.4.2 39
CE Chapter 8.4.2 40
CO2 High Chapter 8.4.4 2
CO2 Low Chapter 8.4.4 3
60 C48IB001EN-Y
8 Product settings
CO2 Stored Chapter 8.4.4 1
Conc. Sugar stored This parameter is used for the calculation of 6

ICUMSA-Color/ICUMSA Color Turb.Comp. if
no measured sugar concentration is available
Constant A Chapter 8.4.13 56
Constant B Chapter 8.4.13 57
Control Chapter 8.4.12 103
Count min Chapter 8.4.23 118
Cycle Time Chapter 8.4.12 48
Dead Zone Chapter 8.4.12 47
Delay Chapter 8.4.12 49
Dens. 20 Temp.Corr. Chapter 8.4.5 7
Density 20 °C Chapter 8.4.28 4
Density 1 Chapter 8.4.20 101
Density 2 Chapter 8.4.20 102
Density stored Chapter 8.4.21, Chapter 8.4.2 50
Ea Chapter 8.4.21 95
Eth. %v/v Temp.Corr. Chapter 8.4.5 8
Eth. %w/w Temp.Corr. Chapter 8.4.5 9
Extract Max Chapter 8.4.23 116
Extract Min Chapter 8.4.23 115
Factor Fresh-Inv Factor to convert Concentration Fresh to Concentra- 104

tion Inv for the product type "Sacharose Inversion"
(Default 1.051)
Formula Chapter 8.4.8 4
Full range Used by product type "Sacharose inversion" to 183

change the formula
H2O Correction Chapter 8.4.11 6
H2O-Density Chapter 8.4.9 71
K1 Chapter 8.4.12 53
KA Chapter 8.4.10, Chapter 8.4.3, Chapter 8.4.2, Chap- 10

ter 8.4.13
C48IB001EN-Y 61
8 Product settings
KB Chapter 8.4.10, Chapter 8.4.3, Chapter 8.4.2, Chap- 11

ter 8.4.13, Chapter 8.4.16
KC Chapter 8.4.10, Chapter 8.4.3, Chapter 8.4.2, Chap- 12

ter 8.4.13, Chapter 8.4.16
KD Chapter 8.4.10, Chapter 8.4.3, Chapter 8.4.2, Chap- 13

ter 8.4.13
KE Chapter 8.4.10, Chapter 8.4.3,Chapter 8.4.2, Chapter 14

8.4.13
KF Chapter 8.4.10,Chapter 8.4.3, Chapter 8.4.2, Chapter 15

8.4.13
KG Chapter 8.4.10,Chapter 8.4.3, Chapter 8.4.2, Chapter 16

8.4.13, Chapter 8.4.16
KH Chapter 8.4.10, Chapter 8.4.3,Chapter 8.4.2, Chapter 17

8.4.13
KI Chapter 8.4.10, Chapter 8.4.3, Chapter 8.4.2 18
KJ Chapter 8.4.10, Chapter 8.4.3, Chapter 8.4.2 19
KK Chapter 8.4.10, Chapter 8.4.3, Chapter 8.4.2 20
KL Chapter 8.4.10, Chapter 8.4.3, Chapter 8.4.2 21
KM Chapter 8.4.10, Chapter 8.4.3, Chapter 8.4.2 22
KN Chapter 8.4.10, Chapter 8.4.3, Chapter 8.4.2 23
KO Chapter 8.4.10, Chapter 8.4.3, Chapter 8.4.2 24
KP Chapter 8.4.10, Chapter 8.4.3, Chapter 8.4.2 25
KQ Chapter 8.4.10, Chapter 8.4.3, Chapter 8.4.2 26
KR Chapter 8.4.10, Chapter 8.4.3, Chapter 8.4.2 27
KS Chapter 8.4.10, Chapter 8.4.3, Chapter 8.4.2 28
KT Chapter 8.4.10, Chapter 8.4.3, Chapter 8.4.2 29
KU Chapter 8.4.10, Chapter 8.4.3, Chapter 8.4.2 30
Limit 1/C(10) Chapter 8.4.16 41
L-Rix-1 sugar type Type of sugar for L-Rix-1, Chapter 8.4.31 1
62 C48IB001EN-Y
8 Product settings
L-Vis Product Group " 0" ... Low, "1" ... Mid, "2" ... High viscosity (Default: 1
"2") Chapter 8.2.3
Measuring Time 127
Original Extract Chapter 8.4.23 119
Original Extract Min Chapter 8.4.32 1
Original Extract Max Chapter 8.4.32 2
Original Extract Stability Chapter 8.4.32 3
Original Extract Stability Chapter 8.4.32 4

Duration
Original Extract Detection Chapter 8.4.32 5

Time [m]
Original Extract Stored 1 Chapter 8.4.32 6
Offset Chapter 8.4.25
P-Factor Chapter 8.4.12 46
Period 1 Chapter 8.4.20 99
Period 2 Chapter 8.4.20 100
pH-Limit Chapter 8.4.25 125
pH-Stored Chapter 8.4.25 124
Press. High Chapter 8.4.6 70
Press. Low Chapter 8.4.6 69
Press. Stored Chapter 8.4.3, Chapter 8.4.2, Chapter 8.4.6 35
Pressure K0 Chapter 8.4.3, Chapter 8.4.2, 33
Pressure K1 Chapter 8.4.3, Chapter 8.4.2, 34
Product Group Chapter 8.4.7 88
Protein This parameter is needed for the calculation of carbo- 5

hydrates in [g/12oz.]. In addition there is channel with
the same name to be used for the online window or
for any other output.
(Default: 1.28)
Real Extract Correction Chapter 8.4.23 117

Factor
C48IB001EN-Y 63
8 Product settings
Ref. Conduct Chapter 8.4.18 84
Ref. Density Chapter 8.4.1, Chapter 8.4.2, Chapter 8.4.3, Chapter 32

8.4.10
Ref. Pressure Chapter 8.4.17 83
Ref. Pressure Chapter 8.4.29 136
Ref. Soundvel. Chapter 8.4.1, Chapter 8.4.3 72
Ref. Temperature; Chapter 8.4.1, Chapter 8.4.2, Chapter 8.4.3, Chapter 31

Ref.Temp./P8 8.4.10, Chapter 8.4.14, Chapter 8.4.16
Ref.Density stored Chapter 8.4.21, Chapter 8.4.2 98
Ref.Temp. L-Vis Chapter 8.4.21 96
Ref.Temperature Chapter 8.4.12 52
Set Density Chapter 8.4.12 50
Skim-Dens Chapter 8.4.14 86
Skim-Fat Chapter 8.4.14 85
Skim-Temp Chapter 8.4.14 87
Sound Vel. Delay Chapter 8.4.22 99
Spike Filter Amplitude Chapter 8.4.19 90
Spike Filter Size Chapter 8.4.19 89
Start Tank 1 Chapter 8.4.32 10

Refer to Fermentation Monitor Manual for more
Start Tank 2 details and SOP 11
Start Tank 3 12
Start Tank 4 13
Tolerance Chapter 8.4.12 51
Transd. DP0 Chapter 8.4.24 120
Transd. Ref. Press. Chapter 8.4.24 83
Turb. Comp. Factor This parameter is used for the calculation of the 5
ICUMSA-Color Turb. Comp.
Type of sugar Chapter 8.4.31 40
64 C48IB001EN-Y
8 Product settings
"Use Extended Formulas" Available in product type "Beer 1" 6

Activate this parameter for all beer products. Mainly
improves low alcohol beer, for regular beers there is a
very low difference between the formulas
Use Wide Range Formu- Chapter 8.4.8 5

las
Zero Offset Chapter 8.4.11 5
8.4.1 Product Parameters "AA", "AB", ..., dt Temperature - Ref.Temperature

"AS", "BA", "BB", ... , "BS", "Ref.Density", [°C]
"Ref.Soundvel.", "Ref.Temperature" ds Sound Velocity - Ref.Soundvel.
[m/s]
Product type: "Liquids 3-Comp 1", "Liquids 3-Comp
4 AA,...AS, Polynomial Coefficients
BA,... BS
This product type for concentration measurement of
3-component liquids uses 2 polynomials to calculate Ref.Tem- Optional reference values - from
2 concentrations. Coefficients and reference values perature, formula calculation sheet, can be
have to be entered. Ref.Den- ’0’.
sity,
Concentration 1 = Ref.Sound-
vel
AA + AB * ds + AC * dd + AD * dt +
AE * ds * ds + AF * dd * dd + AG * dt *dt +
AH * ds * dd + AI * ds * dt + AJ * dd * dt 8.4.2 Product Parameters "KA", "KB", ...,
AK*ds*dt2 + AL*dd* dt * dt2 + AM*dt3+ "KU", "Pressure K0", "Pressure K1", "Pres-
AN * dt* ds² + AO * dd * ds² + AP * ds³ + AQ * dt
* dd² + AR * ds * dd² + AS * dd³ sure Stored", "CA", ..., "CE", "Ref.Density",
"Ref.Temperature"
Concentration 2 =
Product type: "Liquids Dref/Conc" , "L-Vis Low Vis-
BA + BB * ds + BC * dd + BD * dt + cosity", "L-Vis Mid Viscosity", "L-Vis High Viscosity",
BE * ds * ds + BF * dd * dd + BG * dt *dt + density at reference temperature and concentration
BH * ds * dd + BI * ds * dt + BJ * dd * dt measurement of 2-component liquids
BK*ds*dt2 + BL*dd*dt2 + BM*dt3 +
The density at reference temperature ("Density
BN * dt * ds² + BO * dd * ds² + BP * ds³ + BQ * dt
Ref.Temp.) is calculated using the following 5th or-
* dd² + BR * ds * dd² + BS * dd³
der polynomial. In a second step "Density
Ref.Temp." can be converted to a concentration us-
dt Temperature - Ref.Temperature ing coefficients CA, ... , CE. Coefficients and refer-
[°C] ence values have to be entered.
dd Density - Ref.Density [g/cm3]
C48IB001EN-Y 65
8 Product settings
TIP: If a transducer with pressure coefficients is

Density Ref.Temp.= used, density is replaced by the temperature and
(KA + KB * dt + KC * dt2 + KD * dt3 + KE * dt4 + pressure compensated density ("Density T. Press.
KF * dt5) + Comp.").
(KG + KH * dt + KI * dt2 + KJ * dt3 + KK * dt4) * dd
+ 8.4.4 Product Parameters "CO2 Stored",
(KL + KM * dt + KN * dt2 + KO * dt3) *dd2 +
(KP + KQ * dt + KR * dt2) * dd3 + "CO2 High, CO2 Low."
(KS + KT * dt) * dd4 +
(KU) * dd5 + Product types: All product types for beverages con-
"Pressure K0" * dp + "Pressure K1" * dp * dt taining CO2
Whenever the used CO2 analyzer fails or the mea-
dt Temperature - Ref.Temperature [°C] sured CO2 value ("CO2 from AI", "CO2 Carbo") is
not within "CO2 Low" and "CO2 High"
dd Density - Ref.Density [g/cm3] mPDS 5 uses product parameter "CO2 Stored" for
dp Pressure - Press. Stored [bar] compensation.
Table 9: Product parameters for CO2

Concentration = CA + CB * cd + CC * cd2 + CD * cd3
+ CE * cd4 applications
CO2 Low e.g. 1

cd Density Ref.Temp.
CO2 High e.g. 10
8.4.3 Product Parameters "KA", "KB", ..., CO2 Stored e.g. 5.5 g/l (for beer) or 8 g/l
(typical softdrinks)
"KU", "Pressure K0", "Pressure K1", "Press.
Stored", " Ref.Density","Ref.Soundvel.",
"Ref.Temperature" 8.4.5 Product Parameters "Dens. 20 Temp.
Corr." , "Eth.%v/v Temp. Corr.","Eth. %w/w
Product type: "Liquids 2-Comp 1" and "Liquids 2- Temp.Corr."
Comp 2"
Density or sound velocity at reference temperature Product type: "Beverages Alc./Sugar"
("Density Ref.Temp.) or "Concentration" is calculat- Product type "Beverages Alc./Sugar" is used for a
ed using the following 5th order polynomial. Coeffi- variety of sugared beverages containing ethanol (al-
cients and reference values have to be entered. so called Alcopops, Shandies, FAB, ...). Some of
these products can contain unusual ingredients
Density Ref.Temp. (Concentration) =
causing higher deviations of the concentration re-
(KA + KB * dt + KC * dt2 + KD * dt3 + KE * dt4 + sults from laboratory values. The above-mentioned
KF * dt5) + product parameters allow a better adaptation to
(KG + KH * dt + KI * dt2 + KJ * dt3 + KK * dt4) * dd such exotic products. Contact Anton Paar in case
+ your products are not measured with the expected
(KL + KM * dt + KN * dt2 + KO * dt3) *dd2 + accuracy even after a proper laboratory adjustment.
(KP + KQ * dt + KR * dt2) * dd3 +
(KS + KT * dt) * dd4 +
(KU) * dd5 +
8.4.6 Product Parameters "Press. Stored",
"Pressure K0" * dp + "Pressure K1" * dp * dt "Press. High", "Press. Low"
dt Temperature - Ref.Temperature [°C] Product type: "Gas"
dd Density - Ref.Density or Soundvel. [g/ With the above parameters the mPDS5 decides
cm3] - Ref.Soundvel.[m/s] which pressure is used for the caculation of "Stan-
dard Density": If "Pressure Measured" does not lie
dp Pressure - Press. Stored [bar] within "Press.High" and "Press.Low" the formula for
"Standard Density" uses "Press. Stored" instead of
"Pressure Measured".
66 C48IB001EN-Y
8 Product settings
TIP: If a transducer with pressure coefficients is Table 11: Product parameter "Use Wide Range
used, density is replaced by the temperature and Formulas" set to 0
pressure compensated density ("Density T. Press.
Comp."). Formula Description
0 Extract of wort with SPR(n)/SPRn

8.4.7 Product Parameter "Product Group" 2S/L-Sonic at low temperatures
(cold wort), 8-16 °Plato and 5-20
Product type: "Petroleum, Fuels" and "Petroleum, °C.
Fuels 2"
1 Extract of wort with SPR(n), SPRn
For temperature compensation of petroleum prod-
2S or L-Sonic at the lauter tun, 2-
ucts, mPDS 5 uses the polynomial formula given by
25 °Plato and 66-76°C.
ASTM D1250 (equivalent to DIN 51757/1994).
Since the equation for density at 15 C cannot be 2 Extract of wort with SPR(n), SPRn
solved explicitly, an iterative approximation scheme 2S or L-Sonic at the brewing ket-
is used to obtain the solution. Parameters for 3 dif- tle, 0-32 °Plato and 90-105 °C.
ferent groups are used by this product type.
Extended Formula ranges when product parameter
Note: Product type "Petroleum, Fuels" uses the cal-
"Use Wide Range Formulas" is set to "1":
culation method according to ASTM D1250 from the
year 1980 and "Petroleum, Fuels 2" uses ASTM Table 12: Product parameter "Use Wide Range
D1250 from the year 2008 Formulas" set to 1
!
Table 10: Product parameter "product group"

Formula Description
"Product 0 Extract of wort with SPR(n), SPRn
Description
Group" 2S or L-Sonic at low temperatures
(cold wort), 0-32 °Plato and 0-30
0 Crude Oil (A)
°C.
1 Fuel, Benzine, Naphtha, Kero-
1 or 2 Extract of wort with SPR(n), SPRn
sene, Heating Oil (B)
2S or L-Sonic at the lauter tun and
2 Lubricating Oil (D) brewing kettle, 0-32 °Plato and 60-
106 °C.
8.4.8 Product Parameters "Formula" and

8.4.9 Product Parameter "H2O-Density"
"Use Wide Range Formulas"
Product types: "Liquids Dref/Conc" and "Liquids 2-
Product type: "Beer Wort 1" Comp 1"
The product type "Beer Wort 1" calculates the ex- This product parameter is used to calculate "Specif-
tract of wort (with SPR(n)/SPRn 2S/L-Sonic) and ic gravity" (SG T1/T2) using the formula:
uses different formulas depending on the tempera-
ture range. Standard Formula ranges when product Specific Gravity = Density Ref. Temp. / H2O-Densi-
parameter "Use Wide Range Formulas" is set to "0" ty
(default). Store the density of water at the temperature you
want to relate your "Specific Gravity" to in the select-
ed unit. A common reference temperature is 20 °C
(water density = 0.998204 g/cm³).
8.4.10 Product Parameters "KA", "KB", ...,

"KU", "Ref.Temperature", "Ref. Density"
Product type: "Ethanol Proof"
C48IB001EN-Y 67
8 Product settings
This product type needs a specific polynomial for 8.4.12 Product Parameters "K1","K2","K3,
"Density 20 °C". Typically mPDS 5 comes with a de-
fault configuration, where these parameters already "P-Factor", "Set Density", "Tolerance", "Dead
have been entered. Zone", "Delay", "Cycle time", "Ref.Tempera-
The program uses a 5th order polynomial to calcu-
late "Density 20 °C".
ture
When these product parameters have not been en-
Product type: "Density Control
tered, all derived measuring quantities are "0".
Table 13: Product parameter "Density Control"
Density 20 °C =
Parameter
KA + KB * dt + KC * dt2 + KD * dt3 + KE * dt4 + Description
Name
KF * dt5) +
(KG + KH * dt + KI * dt2 + KJ * dt3 + KK * dt4) * dd P-Factor P-factor for control (default:
+ 120000)
(KL + KM * dt + KN * dt2 + KO * dt3) *dd2 +
(KP + KQ * dt + KR * dt2) * dd3 + Dead Zone Zone for no control (default: 2e-
(KS + KT * dt) * dd4 + 5 g/cm³)
(KU) * dd5 Cycle Time Control cycle time in seconds
(default: 20 seconds)
dt Temperature - Ref.Temperature
[°C] Delay Delay for starting the control at
initial start up in minutes.
dd Density - Ref.Density [g/cm3] (default: 120 seconds)
KA ... KU Polynomial coefficients Set Density Set (Target) density at refer-
ence temperature (e.g.: 1.04998
g/cm³)
8.4.11 Product Parameter "H2O-Correc- The display variable "Set Den-
tion", "Zero Diet" sity" is set equal to this parame-
ter.
Product types: "Beverages Diets", "Beverages Di-
ets/Col." and "Beverages Diets/UV" Tolerance Allowed density tolerance from
target density before activating
Product parameter "H2O-Correction" is used to the alarm output.(default: 1e-4 g/
compensate fluctuating water quality for diet prod- cm³).
ucts. Connect a conductivity transmitter to mPDS 5
(analog input) and set product parameter H2O-Cor- Ref.Tem- Reference temperature for the
rection accordingly. perature temperature compensation for-
mula (default: 27 C):
Product parameter "Zero Diet" is used to get a rea- Density Ref. Temp = Density +
sonable initial "concentration actual" in the range K1*(Temperature - Ref.Tem-
0.25 ... 0.30 °Brix. perature) + K2*(Temperature -
Initial diet offset = Zero_diet + H2O-Correction * Ref.Temperature)² + K3*(Tem-
Conductivity perature - Ref.Temperature)³
"Initial diet offset" is added to the initial "concentra- K1 K1 … linear coefficient for tem-
tion actual". perature compensation of den-
sity. (default: 3.4971e-4)
"Concentration actual" is then copied to "Concentra-
tion Diet" ("Conc. Diet/Brix"). K2 K2 … quadratic coefficient for
In a last step "Concentration Diet" ("Conc. Diet/ temperature compensation of
Brix") is adjusted according to the laboratory result density. (default: 2.2847e-6)
e.g. in % Diet, or any other unit. K3 K3 … cubic coefficient for tem-
TIP: A good starting point for the parameter H2O- perature compensation of den-
Correction is "-0.1" if the conductivity is in [mS/cm]! sity. (default: 0)
68 C48IB001EN-Y
8 Product settings
Control function Special alarm function:

The program calculates the "Closing Time" using This product type uses a digital output as a special
the "Density Ref. Temp." at the beginning of the alarm output.
control cycle. If this "Density Ref. Temp." is greater
The alarm limits are derived from the following prod-
then the "Set Density", the digital output used for
uct parameters:
control is high for a certain time e.g. controlling the
adding of water. Lower limit = "Target Dens. - Tolerance
Upper limit = "Target Dens. + Tolerance
"Closing Time" is calculated in the following way:
If the density at reference temperature ("Density
"Closing Time" = abs [P * (TARG - DCOMP)] = abs
Ref.Temp.") exceeds one of the 2 limits the digital
[P * DEV.]
output used for the alarm function gets "high".
Pproduct parameter "P-Factor" Otherwise this output is "low". See configuration of
mPDS 5 for details.
TARGproduct parameter "Set Density"
DCOMP"Density Ref.Temp." = current density at
reference temperature 8.4.13 Product Parameters, "Constant A",
DEV.Last deviation between "Set Density" and cur-
"Constant B"
rent "Density
Product type: "DMA HPM"
Ref. Temp."
When using an external cell DMA HPM the density
• "Closing Time" is calculated at the beginning of is calculated via the following formula:
each control cycle.
Density[g/cm³] = "Constant A" * Period ² - "Constant
• If "Closing Time" is greater than the "Cycle time" B"
"Closing Time" is set to the "Cycle time".
The procedure to calculate "Constant A" and "Con-
• If the deviation between set and last density at stant B" is described in the manual attached to the
reference temperature is smaller than product external cells.
parameter "Dead Zone" then the control output
is low and "Closing Time" is set to "0".
8.4.14 Product Parameters "CA", "CB", "Ref.
• The digital output used for control is only closed
if the current "Density Ref. Dens." is greater
Temperature", "Skim-Dens", "Skim-Fat",
than the "Set density. "Skim-Temp"
EXAMPLE: (using default values) Product type: "Milk"
Skim Milk temperature compensation
Cycle time [s] 20
Product Parameters "CA", "CB" and "Ref. Tempera-
Current "Density Ref.Temp." 1.05005 g/cm³ ture" are required to convert the density of skim milk
to the temperature of cream/whole milk.
Set Density 1.04998 g/cm³
Default (recommended) values (valid in the range 0
P Factor 120000 °C ....70 °C):
"CA" = 4*10-4
"Closing Time" is calculated as follows:
"CB" = 5*10-6
"Closing Time" = abs [120000 * (1.04998 - 1.05005)]
= 8 seconds "Ref Temperature" =30
The digital output used for control is "high" for 8 sec- Skim milk adjustment
onds within the "Cycle Time". After 20 seconds
The calculation of the fat content of cream/whole
"Closing Time" is calculated once again.
milk is based on the density difference between
mPDS 5 sets the digital output used for control to skim milk and cream/whole milk. Since the density
"high" for of skim milk changes with seasons and depending
"Closing Time" +/- 1 seconds. There is an uncertain- on the supplier of the raw milk, it is necessary to car-
ty of about 1 second. The shorter the cycle time the ry out a skim milk adjustment on a regular basis.
greater the relative influence of this uncertainty. For this purpose skim milk instead of cream is
C48IB001EN-Y 69
8 Product settings
pumped through the density sensor for at least 1 Density =

minute. As long as skim milk is in the density sensor
AA + AB * dt + AC * dd + AD * dt2 + AE * dd2 +
the digital input (used as adjustment input) must be
set to "1" by a PLC. When this digital input goes from (AF + AG * dt + AH *dd + AI * dt2 + AJ * dd2) *dp2 +
"1" to "0" density and temperature are automatically
*AK *dp4
stored as "Skim-Dens" and "Skim-Temp". This fin-
ishes the skim milk adjustment procedure. During
this procedure "Concentration Fat" is set to "0". "AA", ..., polynomial coefficients
"AK"
The frequency of the skim milk adjustment must be
found out empirically. As long as the deviation to the dt Temperature [°C]
laboratory reference lies within acceptable limits no
dd Pressure ("Press. Stored" is
skim milk adjustment is necessary otherwise start
used as "pressure" if the mea-
an adjustment procedure.
sured "pressure" at the analog
In addition to the skim milk adjustment it is possible
input  0)
to perform a product-specific adjustment of the dis-
played "Concentration Fat". dp Period [s]
The residual fat content of the skim milk can be en-
tered as "Skim-Fat". Pressure unit depends on connected 4-20 mA sig-
nal and the settings in the menu "Service > Unit
Example: Settings"
Density of cream: 0.9970 g/cm³
Density of skim milk: 1.0241 g/cm³ ("Skim-Dens") 8.4.16 Product Parameters "Ref. Temp./P8",
Temperature (skim milk="Skim-Temp"; cream =
"Temp-C"): 45 °C
"KB", "KC", "KG", "CA/C(5)", "CB/C(4)", "CC/
"Offset" (of "Concentration Fat"): 0.12 C(3)"
"Skim-Fat": 0.24
Product type: "Boron EDF"
From the density difference: 1.0241 - 0.9970 =
0.0271 g/cm³ the application program calculates a This is a special product type directly derived from
fat content of 20%. Both the Offset (of "Concentra- an mPDS 4000 application program.
tion Fat") and the fat content of skim milk "Skim-Fat" In a first step the "Density Ref.Temp." is calculated
are added in a second step. using parameters "KA", "KB", ..... mPDS 5 uses the
mPDS 5 reads "Concentration Fat" = 20.36 % same polynomial as described in Chapter 8.4.3. The
following numbers are used as default ones match-
ing the original mPDS 4000 program:
TIP: If it is not feasible to carry out skim mild adjust-
ment, it is also possible to change the product pa- "KB(P9)" = 7.186*10-4
rameters Skim-Dens and Skim-Temp manually "KC(P10)" = 2.3*10-6
("product settings").
E. g.: Carry out a daily or a batch-wise lab analysis "KG" = 1
using a DMA 5000 M density meter and transfer the "Ref. Temp./P8" = 100
results to the mPDS 5 product settings.
"Concentration Boron" in [ppm] is derived from
"Density Ref.Temp." using the following formula:
8.4.15 Product Parameters "AA", "AB", ...,
"Concentration Boron" = CA + CB * cd + CC * cd2 +
"AK", "Press. Stored" CD * cd3 + CE * cd4
Product type: "DMA HPM Wide Range" The following numbers are used as default ones
matching the original
When using an external cell DMA HPM the density mPDS 4000 program:
can be calculated via a wide range polynomial using
this product type. The coefficients (AA through AK) "CA/C(5)" = -35535.953
for the wide range polynomial are derived from the "CB/C(4)" = -461198.34
measurement values (period, temperature, pres-
sure). See DMA HPM instruction manual chapter "CC/C(3)" = 519918.03
"wide range adjustment". cd = "Density Ref. Temp."
70 C48IB001EN-Y
8 Product settings
For compatibility reasons this product type also of- boards required).
fers special alarm functions. 4 Alarms (Alarm 1 Bo-
The alarm outputs behave according to the table be-
ron EDF, Alarm 2 Boron EDF, Alarm 3 Boron EDF
low:
and Alarm 4 Boron EDF) are generated and as-
signed to 4 relay outputs of mPDS 5 (Additional I/O
Table 14: Prodouct parameter "Boron EDF"
Low/open if "Concentration Boron" High/closed if "Concentration Boron"

Relay
is: is:
Alarm 1 Boron < Limit 1(C10); (default: 7700) > Limit 2 (C11); (default: 8200)
EDF
Alarm 2 Boron <(Limit 3(C12) - Limit3(C12)/100); > Limit 3(C12); (default: 8500)
EDF (default: 8415)
Alarm 3 Boron <(Limit 4(C13) - Limit4(C13)/100); > Limit 4 (C13); (default: 10000)
EDF (default: 9900)
Alarm 4 Boron >(Limit 5(C30)+Limit5(C30)/100); < Limit 5 (C30); (default: 6500)

EDF (default: 6565)
Default values of the alarm limits (parameters):

Concentration 2 =
Limit 1 (C10): 7700 ppm
Limit 2 (C11): 8200 ppm BA + BB * ds + BC * dd + BD * dt +
Limit 3 (C12): 8500 ppm BE * ds * ds + BF * dd * dd + BG * dt *dt +
Limit 4 (C13): 10000 ppm BH * ds * dd + BI * ds * dt + BJ * dd * dt +
BK*ds*dt2 + BL*dd*dt2 + BM*dt3 +
Limit 5 (C30): 6500 ppm
* dd² + BR * ds * dd² + BS * dd³
8.4.17 Product Parameters "Ref. Pressure",
"Ref.Temperature", "Ref.Soundvel.", "AA",... dt = Temperature - Ref.Tem-
perature [°C]
"AS", "BA",...,"BS"
dd = Pressure - Ref.Pressure
Product type: "Liquids 3-Comp. 2" [bar]
This product type for concentration measurement of ds = Sound Velocity -
3-component liquids uses 2 polynomials to calculate Ref.Soundvel. [m/s]
2 concentrations. In addition to sound velocity and
temperature from an L-Dens sensor a pressure sig- AA... AS, BA... BS Polynomial Coefficients
nal from a pressure transmitter connected to an an-
alog input is required.
8.4.18 Product Parameters "Ref. Conduct.",
Coefficients and reference values have to be en-
tered. "Ref.Temperature", "Ref.Density", "AA",...
"AS", "BA",...,"BS"
Concentration 1 =
Product type: "Liquids 3-Comp. 3"
AA + AB * ds + AC * dd + AD * dt +
AE * ds * ds + AF * dd * dd + AG * dt *dt + This product type for concentration measurement of
AH * ds * dd + AI * ds * dt + AJ * dd * dt + 3-component liquids uses 2 polynomials to calculate
AK * ds * dt2 + AL * dd * 2 + AM * dt3 + 2 concentrations. In addition to density and tem-
AN * dt* ds² + AO * dd * ds² + AP * ds³ + perature from a density sensor a conductivity signal
AQ * dt * dd² + AR * ds * dd² + AS * dd³ from a conductivity transmitter connected to an an-
alog input is required.
tered.
C48IB001EN-Y 71
8 Product settings
average filter. This behavior matches the behav-

Concentration 1 = ior of the filters available for all product types
AA + AB * ds + AC * dd + AD * dt + and measurement values.
AE * ds * ds + AF * dd * dd + AG * dt *dt + 2. When there is water or air in the line the aver-
AH * ds * dd + AI * ds * dt + AJ * dd * dt + AK * age filter is initialized.
ds * dt2 + AL * dd * 2 + AM * dt3 +
AN * dt* ds² + AO * dd * ds² + AP * ds³ + AQ * dt 3. When the spike filter is active (large original
* dd² + AR * ds * dd² + AS * dd extract fluctuations) the average filter is initial-
ized.
Concentration 2 =
BA + BB * ds + BC * dd + BD * dt +
8.4.20 Product Parameters "Density 1" ,
BE * ds * ds + BF * dd * dd + BG * dt *dt + "Density 2"
BH * ds * dd + BI * ds * dt + BJ * dd * dt +
BK*ds*dt2 + BL*dd*dt2 + BM*dt3 + Product type: "DMA HPM"
BN * dt * ds² + BO * dd * ds² + BP * ds³ + BQ * dt Adjustment:
* dd² + BR * ds * dd² + BS * dd³
mPDS 5 provides an automatic function for calculat-
ing the adjustment parameters "Constant A" and
ds Conductivity - Ref. Conduct. [mS] "Constant B".
dd Density - Ref.Density [g/cm3] Enter two different standards of known density in the
DMA HPM external measuring cell. Keep them at a
dt Temperature - Ref.Temperature
constant temperature and pressure using a thermo-
[°C]
stat.
AA... AS, Polynomial Coefficients The following formula is used to calculate the densi-
BA... BS ty from the period of oscillation of the measuring
TIP: If a transducer with pressure coefficients is cell:
used, density is replaced by the temperature and
  DA * P 2  DB
pressure compensated density ("Density T. Press.
Comp."). 1   2
DA 
P12  P22
8.4.19 Product Parameters "Spike Filter
P22 * 1  P12 *  2
Size", "Spike Filter Amplitude", "Average Fil- DB 
P12  P22
ter Size"
r …. Unknown density of the sample [g/cm³]
Product type: "Beer 3 AS" r1 …. Density of Standard 1 [g/cm³]
Product type "Beer 3 AS" matches product type 2 …. Density of Standard 2 [g/cm³]
"Beer 3" with regard to the calculation of the original P1 …. Period of oscillation, Standard 1 [s]
extract. It offers special customer-specific filters for P2 …. Period of oscillation, Standard 2 [s]
the original extract. P …. Period of oscillation, sample [s]
Table 15: Product parameters for "Beer 3 AS"

The constants DA (= "Constant A") and DB ("Con-
Spike Filter Size e.g. 10 (Allowed range: 0 stant B") are determined by measuring the period of
... 30) oscillation of the two samples with known density
("Density 1" and "Density 2") at the measuring tem-
Spike Filter Ampli- e.g. 1 (Allowed range: perature. "Constant A" and "Constant B" are only
tude in [°Plato] 0 ... 50 °Plato) valid for this temperature and pressure.
Average Filter Size e.g. 20 (Allowed range: 0 For further details please refer to the Instruction
... 99) Manual of DMA HPM.
Behavior of the 2 special filters: TIP:
1. The spike filter is executed before the rolling • Do not change the product as long as you are
measuring at the same temperature and pres-
72 C48IB001EN-Y
8 Product settings
sure. Otherwise the density and concentration 

results will not be correct.  P
= -------------------------------------------------------------------
-
T ref Ea  1- ---------- 1 
• The adjustment must be carried out separately exp RG  T – T -------
- ------
 P ref
for each temperature/pressure point. Use appro-
priate standards with known density at measur-
ing temperature and pressure. Adjustments for Tre Viscosity at reference temperature [Pa.s]
up to 999 different points can be saved. f
• If you want to measure in a wide pressure and/ ref Reference temperature [K] =
or temperature range carry out a wide range "Ref.Temp.L-Vis"
adjustment (see Chapter 8.4.15). P Viscosity at process temperature [Pa.s]
TP Process temperature [K]
8.4.21 Product Parameter "Ea", Ea Flow activation energy [kJ/mol]
"Ref.Temp.L-Vis", "Density RG Gas constant: 0.00831 [kJ / (mol*K)]
Stored","Ref.Density Stored", "Density
Selected", "Density Ref.Temp. Sel." Calculation of the parameter "Ea"
Product types: "L-Vis high visc.", "L-Vis medium

visc.", "L-Vis low visc.", "L-Vis Auto Viscosity"
1. Formula:
TIP: The term "viscosity" is used to refer to the dy-
namic viscosity. Otherwise the term "kinematic vis- ln  aT 
Ea = RG  -------------------
cosity" is used. 1- ----- 1
----- – -
T1 T2
The L-Vis Smart Sensor calculates the viscosity at
the measuring temperature for up to 3 different Ea Flow activation energy [kJ/mol]
ranges (low, medium and high viscosity). For some
applications the viscosity must be calculated for a aT Viscosity/temperature factor
reference temperature. The two parameters "Ea"
T1 Temperature 1 [K]
and "Ref.Temp.L-Vis" are used according to the Ar-
rhenius function. Kinematic viscosity and kinematic T2 Temperature 2 [K]
viscosity at the reference temperature are calculat-
ed using the measured or stored density values RG Gas constant: 0.00831 [kJ / (mol*K)]
("Density Stored" and "Ref.Density Stored"). If a
density sensor is connected and delivers useful 2. Measurement of the viscosity of the sample
density values, the stored density values are ig- at two different temperatures
nored. The density values which are used are
shown in "Density Selected" or "Density Temper T1 = 30 °C ........
Ref.Temp.sel."
ature 1 η1 = 325.02 mPa.s
Viscosity at reference temperature ("Viscosity
Ref.Temp."):
Temper T2 = 40 °C ........
TIP: Before the calculation of the following parame- ature 2 η 2 = 174.38 mPa.s
ters, we recommend performing a viscosity adjust-
ment.
3. Calculation of the viscosity/temperature fac-
tor
NOTICE
The values used in the following section are only
1  T1  325.02
examples to illustrate the calculation. aT = ----------------- = ---------------- = 1.86386
1  T2  174.38
Formula for calculating the viscosity at the reference
temperature ("Viscosity Ref.Temp.")
C48IB001EN-Y 73
8 Product settings
4.Calculation of the parameter Ea
NOTICE
To calculate the parameter Ea, the temperature
must be converted into °K.
(T[K] = T [°C] + 273.15)
aT = 1.86386
T1 = 30 + 273.15 = 303.15 K
T2 = 40 + 273.15 = 313.15 K
RG = 0.008314 kJ / (mol*K)
ln  aT  ln 1.86386 ꞏ kj
Ea = RG  ------------------ = 0.00834  --------------------------------- = 49 14 ---------
1 1
------ – ------ 1 1 mol
------------- – -------------
T1 T2 303.5 313.5
Kinematic viscosity at process temperature sound velocity can reduce fluctuations of derived
concentration values. Determine the optimal setting
TIP: To calculate the kinematic viscosity mPDS 5
empirically on site or use the setting from mPDS
requires a density value at the process temperature.
2000 V3.
Formula:

8.4.23 Product Parameters "Count Min",
 = --- "Extract Max", "Extract Min", "Original

Extract", "Real Extract Correction Factor"
 Kinematic viscosity [m²/s]
Product type: "Bioethanol"
 Dynamic viscosity [Pa.s]
With these parameters the initial value for the fer-
 Measurement value "Density" or parame-
menation of bioethanol is set and calculated for
ter "Density Stored" in [kg/m3]
each batch automatically.
Kinematic viscosity at reference temperature Choose the menu <Product Settings> and adapt the
product parameters to your requirements.
TIP: To calculate the kinematic viscosity at the ref-
erence temperature, mPDS 5 requires a density val-
ue at the reference temperature.
The kinematic viscosity at reference temperature is
calculated using the same formula as for the kine-
matic viscosity at process temperature, however,
the dynamic viscosity at reference temperature
(measurement value: "Viscosity Ref.Temp.") and
density at reference temperature (measurement
value "Density Ref.Temp." or parameter "Ref.Densi-
ty Stored") are used.
8.4.22 Product Parameter "Sound Vel.

Delay"
Product types: "Beer", "Beer AS" Fig. 30: Product parameters - bioethanol
This parameter defines the delay of sound velocity These parameters are explained by means of
versus temperature. The allowed range is 0.... 20 Fig. 30:
seconds (default ’0’). In some applications when
fast temperature changes cannot be avoided and • The measurement value "Original Extract" cor-
the freezing function is not used, a delay of the responds to the initial extract value. In the
74 C48IB001EN-Y
8 Product settings
example above it is 20 °Brix. If the product Remote Time", "Offset", "BB", "BC", "BE",
parameter "Original Extract" is 0, it will be set by
the program automatically. "BH", "BI", "BN", "BO"
• The measurement range set for the value of the Product type "Wastewater 1" and "Wastewater 2"
"Original Extract" is between 18 °Brix "Extract
Min" and 22 °Brix "Extract Max" in the example. In addition to the calculation of product specific
measurement values like COD and Concentration
• The program rounds the apparent extract value Caustic, this product type has a flushing function. A
to 0.01 °Brix. special crossflow filter filters the wastewater from
coarse particles before flowing through the sensors.
The "Count Min" defines that, as soon as 2 (= Although this filter gets cleaned automatically due to
Count Min) values are identical within this its construction, harsh process conditions or loads
range, this value is used as the new "Original of solids may lead to filter blockage. The flushing
Extract" (=initial value) automatically. function allows an automatic cleaning of the filter by
backflushing with water under high pressure.
If no limits "Extract Max" and "Extract Min" are
entered or the values of the apparent extract are The flushing function can be controlled in 2 different
beyond the limits, the "Original Extract" value is ways
not calcluated automatically. You have to set the
1. Remote control: If the parameter "Backflushing
product parameter "Original Extract" appropri-
Remote On" is set to "on", the flushing output
ately.
switches as follows: if the digital input ("Back-
• The "Real Extract Correction Factor" can be flushing DI") used for the flushing changes from
used to adjust the difference between the appar- "0" to "1", the backflushing will be switched on
ent extract and the real extract. for "Backflushing Remote Time" seconds.
2. Locally: If the parameter "Backflushing Remote
On" is set to "off" and the parameter "Backflush-
8.4.24 Product Parameters "Transd. DP0", ing Local On" is set to "on", the flushing output is
controlled locally by "Measuring Time" and
"Transd. DP1", Transd. DP2", "Transd. DP3", "Back Flushing Local Time". During "Back
"Transd. Ref. Press" Flushing Local Time" seconds the backflushing
output is set to "on" and during "Measuring
Product types: "Gas", "Petroleum, Fuels", "Petro- Time" the backflushing output is set to "off". The
leum, Fuels 2" "Liquids 3-Comp 3", "Liquids 2- 2 times alternate continuously.
Comp 1" , "Liquids 3-Comp 5",
If a pressure compensation is needed for a sensor, Default Value
Max. Value
Min. Value
it must be ordered separately. You will get a sepa-

rate datasheet with the parameters for pressure
Name
compensation.
Unit
In addition to these parameters a pressure sensor

must be connected to an analog input. pH-stored 0 14 7
TIP: These product parameters for pressure com- pH-Limit 0 14 3.5
pensation of the sensors must be entered with each
product. All mentioned product types use the tem- Measuring Time s 0 1x107 50,000
perature AND pressure compensated density for all
Back Flushing s 0 10,000 120
further calculations.
Local Time
8.4.25 Product Parameter "pH-Stored", "pH- Back Flushing s 0 10,000 120

Remote Time
Limit", "Back Flushing Local On", "Measuring
Time", "Back Flushing Local Time", "Back The parameters "Offset", "BB", "BC", "BE", "BH",
"BI", "BN", "BO" are coefficients of an internal calcu-
Flushing Remote On ", "Back Flushing lation formula the following default values:
Offset = -1.639671E+03
BB = -5.081238E+03
C48IB001EN-Y 75
8 Product settings
BC = 1.000163E+00 Monday. It is also possible to have one daily counter

BE = 1.035435E+03 and the other counter continues permanently.
BH = -1.513794E-01
Mind that the counter values get lost with a product
BI = 1.237641E+02
change or a power breakdown. Therefore it is nec-
BN = -2.939532E+01
essary that no-one changes a product without au-
BO = 4.930190E-03
thority (user rights). If necessary use a UPS.
The internal calculation formulas can be adapted via
The totalized quantities have self-explanatory name
these coefficients.
with index 1 or 2 according to the counter. Each
counter has a reset input which resets the totalized
8.4.26 Product Type "Liqueur>30%v/v-Alco- quantities.
hol"
8.4.28 Product type "Beer 3"
TIP: This product type can only be used if there is
always a product with high alcohol- and sugar con- In addition to the calculation of the original extract
tent in the line. this product type allows you to determine the alcohol
The chemical and physical behavior of liqueurs concentration using a known density 20°C of your
shows ambiguous raw values concerning alcohol beer. Therefore it is necessary to make a product
and sugar. This product type even indicates a high specific adjustment of the displayed value "Density
value of alcohol and sugar if only water is in the line. 20 °C". If this value currently is not displayed, select
Therefore misinterpretations are possible leading to it for one numerical output window and carry out a
errors in the production. This means that the PLC laboratory adjustment.
connected either by fieldbus or by 4-20 mA must The initial value is derived from the product param-
know if the values really originate from liqueur. eter "density 20 °C" (default : value : 1.003 g/cm³).
The user also must be aware of this danger. After "Density 20 °C" has been adjusted the alcohol
value should be calibrated and adjusted as well.
When the density 20 °C of the beer changes it has
8.4.27 Product type "Ethanol Counter 1" to be re-adjusted in order to achieve accurate alco-
hol values.
With this product type a complete double ethanol
counter can be built up.
- Density sensor (mostly intrinsically safe or 8.4.29 Product Parameters "Ref. Pressure",
explosion-proof) "Ref.Temperature", "Ref.Density", "AA",...
- one or two volume counters
- digital signals to reset the totalized quantities
"AS", "BA",...,"BS"
(alternatively a PLC and a fieldbus can be
Product type: "Liquids 3-Comp. 5"
used).
This product type for concentration measurement of
First, ethanol concentration values are calculated in
3-component liquids uses 2 polynomials to calculate
volume percent and mass percent from density and
2 concentrations. In addition to density and tem-
temperature. The counter inputs are adapted to the
perature from a density sensor a pressure signal
volume flow counter. You have to define the mass of
from a pressure transmitter connected to an analog
each pulse at the mPDS 5 counter input.
input is required.
A typical value would be 1 pulse corresponds to 50
l volume.
tered.
If a second counter is used, it also has to be set. The
mPDS 5 can receive pulses from 2 independent vol- Concentration 1 =
ume counters (recommended). The same signal
can also be connected to both counter inputs. Then AA + AB * ds + AC * dd + AD * dt +
one set of totalized quantities can be used for the AE * ds * ds + AF * dd * dd + AG * dt *dt +
daily total and the other one for the weekly total. AH * ds * dd + AI * ds * dt + AJ * dd * dt + AK *
ds * dt2 + AL * dd * 2 + AM * dt3 +
Both counters start simultaneously, the daily count- AN * dt* ds² + AO * dd * ds² + AP * ds³ + AQ * dt
er is to be reset once per day, the weekly counter is * dd² + AR * ds * dd² + AS * dd³
to be reset together with the daily counter, e.g. on
76 C48IB001EN-Y
8 Product settings
Concentration 2 = Tref Reference temperature [K]

BA + BB * ds + BC * dd + BD * dt + Tp Process temperature [K]
BE * ds * ds + BF * dd * dd + BG * dt *dt +
BH * ds * dd + BI * ds * dt + BJ * dd * dt +  Tref Kinematic viscosity at reference tem-
BK*ds*dt2 + BL*dd*dt2 + BM*dt3 + perature [m²/s]
* dd² + BR * ds * dd² + BS * dd³ p Kinematic viscosity at process tem-
perature [m²/s]
ds Pressure - Ref. Pressure [bar]
dd
8.4.31 "Type of Sugar", "L-Rix-1/2/3/4 Sugar
Density - Ref.Density [g/cm3]
Type"
dt Temperature - Ref.Temperature [°C]
A) Product types: "Fruit Juice" and "Beverages Sug-
AA.. AS, Polynomial Coefficients ar"
BA... BS
The parameter "Type of sugar" is used by the above
Note: If the calculated concentration drops below ’0’ product types to define which formula is used for the
it is set to ’0’ and an error message is generated. calculation of "L-Rix Conc. Sugar":
TIP: If a transducer with pressure coefficients is
0 Sucrose
used, density is replaced by the temperature and
pressure compensated density ("Density T. Press. 1 Glucose
Comp.").
2 Fructose
8.4.30 Kinematic Viscosity at Reference 3 Inv. Sugar

Temperature using ASTM D341 These product types use 4 different formulas from
ICUMSA (International Commission for Uniform
The calculation covered by the standard ASTM Methods of Sugar Analysis).
D341 converts viscosity at different temperatures.
The scope of the standard extends to the kinematic This product parameter is not needed for the 4 ded-
viscosity of a petroleum oil or liquid hydrocarbon at icated product types L-Rix Sucrose, L-Rix Glucose,
any temperature within a limited range, provided .... because the type of sugar is defined by the prod-
that the kinematic viscosities at two temperatures uct type itself.
are known. B) Product types: "L-Rix Multisensor", "L-Rix Sugar
For practical purposes, this method generally uses Counter" and "L-Rix 520x Beverages"
the mathematical equations mentioned in the annex
of the standard and includes a double logarithmic These product types use these parameters to define
dependency between temperature and viscosity the formula for the calculation of "Concentration
with additional parameters and appropriate tem- Sugar":
peratures.
In order to be able to use this model, it is necessary 0 Sucrose
to know the product in advance and to determine the
parameter B, as well as being sure that the product 1 Glucose
does not change during the process. Doing so the 2 Fructose
Kinematic viscosity at reference temperature is cal-
culated according to: 3 Inv. Sugar
 Tref = 4 not used
(EXP(EXP((LN(LN(  p+0,7))+B*(LN(Tk))))))-0,7
5 Anton Paar sugar formula exclusively for
and the L-Rix 520x
Tp
T k = ---------
T ref
C48IB001EN-Y 77
8 Product settings
8.4.32 Parameters "Original Extract - Min/ "Original define the allowed range for
Max/Stability/Stability Duration/Detection Extract Min" the Original Extract only for
and "Original the automaic method.
Time/Stored 1/2/3/4, Start Tank 1/2/3/4" Extract Max"
The product type "Beer Fermentation Ri" can be Original Extract Original Extract to be entered
used in combination with Stored manually - deactivates the
4 L-Rix installed in 4 fermentation tanks. The formu- 1/2/3/4 automatic method for this line
las for alcohol, apparent extract density, real ex-
tract, etc. need a "starting point" (Original Extract 1/ TIP:
2/3/4) and use the change of the refractive index The product type uses the same control parameters
causing a reduction of the extract value. for each of the 4 sensors (tanks).
The product parameters of this product type offer When the tanks are emptied set product parameters
two methods for the determination of the Original "Start tank 1/2/3/4) to false ("0") which sets the con-
Extract 1/2/3/4 values: centration values of the related tank to "0".
A) Manual method: The operator can enter an Orig-
inal Extract for each L-Rix sensor via product pa- NOTICE
rameters "Original Extract stored 1/2/3/4". The This application needs the Original Extract at the
values of these parameters are copied to the corre- beginning of the batch and calculates the Appar-
sponding measurement channels Original Extract 1/ ent Extract Density/Alcohol etc. values from the
2/3/4 and used for consecutive calculations. This decreasing "Concentration Ext" value. If the
method has the higher priority and must be used if Concentration Ext. value is higher than the cur-
more than one L-Rix is connected. These product rent Original Extract of the tank, all calculated
parameters can automatically be set via PLC and values are set to "out of range" (mPDS 5) or
fieldbus as well. "Invalid" (Davis 5). This may happen for a short
B) Automatic method: When the product parame- time at the beginning of each batch e.g. if the
ters "Original Extract stored 1/2/3/4" are '0' the auto- wort in the tank is not perfectly mixed.
matic method is activated. The starting point
("Original Extract") is determined automatically after
selecting a product of this type and setting the prod- 8.5 Filter Settings
uct parameter "Start tank 1(2/3/4") to true (=1). For
a certain period after activating the automatic deter- Typically mPDS 5 is delivered with deactivated fil-
mination via product parameter the mPDS 5 moni- ters. If one or more measurement values are fluctu-
tors the "Concentration Ext.". As soon as this value ating too much, it is possible to activate a filter for
is stable for a certain time within certain limits it uses each measurement value independently.
this value as Original Extract provided the value is The "weighted moving average filter" smooths the
higher than the previous one. related quantity. The "spike filter" removes sudden
spikes which might occur on certain quantities, e.g.
"Original define the allowed range for during start-up if a valve is suddenly closed or
Extract Min" the Original Extract only for opened.
and "Original the automaic method.
Extract Max" NOTICE
Only activate a filter if necessary. Especially
"Original defines the range the "Con-
when measurement values are used for control
Extract Stabil- centration Ext." must lie within
purposes do not activate any filter. A PLC control
ity" in °Plato for "Original Extract Stability
program and the spike filter can be totally incom-
Duration" time.
patible and such a filter can have negative con-
Original Extract defines the time the "Concen- sequences on the production!
Stability Dura- tration Ext." must be stable.
tion in [s]... General features of both filters
Original Extract defines the time for the auto- • The first 20 seconds after a product change are
Detection Time matic determination of Origi- ignored. If the "hold" signal is on, the filters are
in [m] nal Extract (after selecting the inactive. The measurement values during "hold
product) on" are not used for the filter functions. As soon
78 C48IB001EN-Y
8 Product settings
as "hold" is off, the values before the "hold" sta- sponding graph.
tus are taken for calculation.
TIP: Do not set the "Amplitude" to very small num-
• If the filter settings of an active product are bers equal to or below the normal fluctuations, oth-
changed, the filter will be initialized, however, erwise the values will appear to be completely
the first 20 seconds will also be considered. frozen. Do not activate the spike filter if you are not
sure about its function.
Set up of spike filter
1. Tap <Menu> and select Product Settings.

2. Highlight the corresponding product and tap
<Edit product>.
3. Skip the first 2 steps by tapping <Next> twice.
4. In step 3 of 3 you can define the product param-
eters and enter the filter settings by tapping <Fil-
ter settings> in the buttons area.
5. First of all enter spike filter settings, Filter Size
and Amplitude and check the box of the corre-
sponding measurement value (see Fig. 31). The
Filter Size defines the number of the latest (his-
torical) values which will be compared with the
current value (e.g. 10 historical values are Fig. 32: Spike filter inactive for alcohol 20° C [% v/v]
equivalent to 10 seconds) The Amplitude is the
maximum change compared to the latest values
in "%" before the spike filter becomes active.
The allowed range for Filter and Amplitude is 1
and 100.
Fig. 33: Alcohol in [%w/w] with active spike filter

Setup of weighted moving average filter
1. Tap <Next> to define the weighted moving aver-

age filter. "Weighted" means that older values
Fig. 31: Activating the spike filter for the Concentration contribute less to the average value than newer
Diet
ones. The weighting factor is automatically
Fig. 32 and Fig. 33 show the behavior for "Filter determined.
Size"= 10 and "Amplitude"=5%. The spike filter
2. Select the quantity you want to smooth and
compares the current value with the last 10 values.
enter a "Filter Size". Activate this filter by tap-
If the current original extract value deviates by more
ping on the check box. If the "Active"-box is
than 5 % from one of the 10 historical values, the
checked the filter is active (see Fig. 34). "Filter
last but one value overwrites the current one. So a
Size" must lie in the range 2 ... 600.
short spike will be cut out completely. Normal fluctu-
ations of below 5 % will be displayed in the corre-
C48IB001EN-Y 79
8 Product settings
Fig. 35: No moving average filter

Fig. 34: Activating a moving average filter for the Con-
centration Diet
If "Filter Size" is set to "120" like in Fig. 34 the filter
averages the values of the last 120 seconds. In-
stead of the raw unfiltered value mPDS 5 calculates
and displays the weighted average original values.
Fluctuations are considerably reduced.
TIP: The moving average filter increases the reac-
tion time e.g. of alarm functions related to these val-
ues. Enter the lowest "Filter Size" which smoothes
the results sufficiently.
If you activate the moving average filter for a mea-
surement value and if you check the box in the col-
umn "Reset if within LoLo<>HiHi" then mPDS 5
behaves as follows: If the current unfiltered mea-
surement value is within the alarm limits LoLo<>
HiHi and the filtered value is outside these limits Fig. 36: Same measurement values - moving average fil-
then the actual value is displayed and the filter is ini- ter active
tialized. This feature is required in combination with
3. Tap <OK> to finish the filter settings and tap
larger filter sizes in order to reach the target value
<OK> a second time to finish the product set-
faster (e.g. at start up of "Beverages Diets").
tings.
NOTICE
From version 5.00 on it is possible to modify
default settings of spike filter and/or average fil-
ter values. For detailed information see Chapter
19.5.3.
80 C48IB001EN-Y
9 Recording Measurement Data

9.1 Configuration 9.2 Exporting Data
Data recording is enabled by default. Settings can 1. Connect a USB flash drive and tap
be configured via
Data Memory > Measurement Data Export
to open the list of available batches. Choose

one batch for export.The "Start Time" specifies
the time when the product has been selected on
the mPDS 5.
2. Tap <Next> to open the export data dialog
(Fig. 38)
Fig. 37: Data Recording
Setup > Line configuration

Data Recording : enables or disables data recording
Data Recording Rate: Corresponds to the write in-
terval which also defines the maximum recording
time. A maximum of 30,000 data points can be re-
corded. The following settings are possible: Fig. 38: Measurement Data Export - Step 1
3. Choose your USB flash drive for "Storage Loca-
Data Recording Rate Max. Recording Time tion" and tap <OK> to carry out the data export.
1second 8 hours 4. An "Information"-window appears "The file has
been generated successfully". Tap <OK> to fin-
2 seconds 17 hours ish the data export. (Fig. 39)
5 seconds 1 day 20 hours
10 seconds 3 days 16 hours
First all data are stored in the internal flash drive. No

USB flash drive is necessary for this recording.
There is a limitation of 30,000 data points for a
batch. If the maximum of data points is exceeded,
the oldest 1000 data points are deleted. At least the
data of the last 17 batches are stored (including the
current one). If there are more than 17 batches, the
oldest one is deleted.
Fig. 39: Measurement Data Export - Step 2
C48IB001EN-Y 81
The data will be exported as a text file. Values are It is possible to export batches of deleted products,
separated by tab stops and the used data format is because the product definition is also stored when
the one configured for the device (Setup > Control data recording is started.
Panel > Regional Settings). The currently active
unit settings are used. (Fig. 40)
Fig. 40: Exported file format
9.3 Importing Data in Excel

• Start Excel
• Use the "Open File" dialog and select the previ-
ously exported text file
• The Text Import Wizard appears. Do the follow-
ing settings:
• Define the tab as column delimiter
82 C48IB001EN-Y
10 Control Panel Settings
Finally, your Excel-file will be generated:

Finally, it is required to define the "." as decimal sep-
arator by clicking the "Advanced..." button. This is
only required if the data format on your device is dif-
ferent to the one of your PC.

The following settings are normally done when 10.2 Regional Settings (Language, ...)
mPDS 5 is installed or put into operation.
1. Tap <Menu> and select "Setup > Control Panel
> Regional Settings".
10.1 Date and Time
2. Enter the "Language", "Data Format" (for num-
1. Tap <Menu> and select Setup > Control Panel bers, date and time format, etc.), and the "Key-
> Date and Time. board Layout".
2. Enter the current date and time and tap <OK>. 3. Tap <OK> to confirm the settings.
The instrument displays "Are you sure you want
TIP: You are not allowed to change date or time as change the regional settings? The instrument
long as a product is running on one of the available will be rebooted to complete this action".
lines. Select product ’0’ "Out of operation" on each
line and repeat the procedure. 4. Tap <OK> to install the new settings.
NOTICE
The instrument reboots. Execute this command
only during line shut down.
C48IB001EN-Y 83
10.3 Network
You can connect mPDS 5 to your local network for
2 reasons:
• To call up the integrated web server. The web
server shows the system information (serial
numbers and firmware versions).
• To use DAVIS 5 for configuration and data
acquisition.
Fig. 42: Network settings step 2
5. Enter the primary and secondary DNS and the

DNS Domain and tap <OK>.
TIP: If you connect the PC directly to mPDS 5 using

a special Ethernet cable with crossed transmit and
receive lines, deactivate DHCP and set a suitable IP
address and subnetmask. E.g. PC: IP ad-
dress=169.254.23.10 Subnet Mask=255.255.0.0 ->
Fig. 41: Network settings step 1 mPDS 5: IP address=169.254.23.11 Subnet
You will get the information to be entered in the fol- Mask=255.255.0.0.
lowing fields from your IT department. Enter the IP address into your browser (e.g. IE Ex-
plorer) to call up the web server.
1. Connect mPDS 5 to PC via Ethernet cable. The field "DNS Domain" is empty by default.
> Network".
10.4 Instrument Name and Location
3. If your network server has DHCP functionality,
activate "Obtain an IP address automatically If you want to connect more than one mPDS 5 to
(DHCP)", then tap <Next> and <OK>. your network you have to enter a name and the lo-
4. If your network server has no DHCP functional- cation.
ity, deactivate "Obtain an IP address automati- 1. Tap <Menu> and select "Setup > Control Panel
cally (DHCP)" and enter the correct "IP > Instrument Name and Location".
Address", "Subnet Mask", "Default Gateway",
and tap <Next>. 2. Enter "Instrument Name" and "Instrument Loca-
tion" and tap <OK>.
10.5 Display Brightness

1. Tap <Menu> and select Setup > Control Panel
> Display Brightness if you want to change the
brightness of your display.
2. You can activate or deactivate the "Automatic
brightness adjustment" or define the "Bright-
ness" in [%]. We recommend to select 50 % at
minimum.
3. Tap <OK> to confirm the new settings.
84 C48IB001EN-Y
11 User Management
10.6 Davis 5 Interaction Settings

There are two additional functions for mPDS 5 con-
nected with a PC running Davis 5:
- A symbol can be shown in the header that Click on <menu> and choose "Setup > Control
gives information whether Davis 5 is query- Panel > Davis 5 Interaction Settings".
ing data or not.
- An additional button can be shown to start a

calibration in Davis 5. If you press this but-
ton, Davis 5 saves the current values of the
mPDS 5. You get a message if this proce-
dure has been successful or not.
Fig. 43: Davis 5 Interaction Settings
11 User Management
4 user accounts are the default factory setting. The in the upper right corner of the main screen. The
preset passwords are identical to the user names symbol of this button changes with the user group of
(e.g. user = Manager ... password = manager). the currently logged on user.
Tap <Menu> and select "Setup > User Manage- TIP: Change the passwords of all preset user ac-
ment" to add, edit or delete a user. counts or delete them after you have created your
Change the currently logged on user via the button own accounts with new passwords!
11.1 User Groups, Auto Logon and Password Rules

There are four user groups which have different levels of user rights:
Table 16: Table User groups
Symbol User Group
No User logged on
If the user logs off and there is no auto logon user (see below), the mPDS 5 displays the
main screen and all menus are locked. It is only possible to change lines, to view the
message list or to tap on the user group indicator in the upper right corner to log on.
Guest
If you log on as "guest you have the following rights:
change lines, view the message list, tap on the user group indicator in the upper right
corner to log on. Additionally, you can change the display and the layout, and view the
instrument information.
C48IB001EN-Y 85
11 User Management
Table 16: Table User groups
Operator
This user has the same rights as the "guest" and can adjust and change products.
Manager
This user group has the rights of the "operator" user group and is allowed to additionally
add, edit or delete products.
Administrator
This user group has the rights of the "manager" user group and is allowed to access
menu entries at a high security level:
Create and change all user accounts, change the general setup of the instrument, acti-
vate/deactivate the audit trail function and backup or restore the instrument settings.
We recommend that there is only one user with administrator rights on each mPDS 5.
Auto logon function following points, though:

You can assign the auto logon function to one user 1. If an administrator creates another user, this
(see Chapter 11.1). If you switch on mPDS 5 the user‘s password is unsafe. If this user logs on
auto logon user is logged on. All instrument func- for the first time, he is asked in a message to
tions according to user rights of the auto logon user key in a new password known only by him.
are freely accessible.
2. The new password must be different from the
TIP: Note that the auto logon user is activated with- old one, which is also checked.
out checking the password after power failures and
3. Password must not start or end with a space.
if any other user logs off. When mPDS 5 is used in
sensitive applications do not use the auto logon
function to have maximum protection.
If the "audit trail" function is activated, the auto logon
11.2 Creating, Editing and Deleting
for all users is deactivated and the auto logon func- User Accounts
tion is no longer available (see Chapter 12).
You need administrator rights to create, edit or de-
Password rules lete user accounts.
Giving a password is not mandatory. If you do not TIP:
set a password, users can log on by selecting their
user name from the user list only. • A user with a deactivated account cannot log on
until he/she is activated again.
Both the password and the user name have to con-
tain at least six characters if "Audit Trail" is activat- • A user without administrator rights can only
ed. Characters from the ASCII table which are change his/her own password.
letters, numbers and most special characters are al- Related topics: Logging On/Off: Chapter 5.2.2.
lowed. The password is case sensitive, for example
"Anton Paar" or "anton paar" makes a difference in Creating or editing a user account
the logon.
1. Tap <Menu> and select "Setup > User Man-
If password rules are disregarded on creating or ad- agement".
ministrating users and passwords, a message de-
scribing the error appears on the screen. Mind the
86 C48IB001EN-Y
11 User Management
Fig. 44: User Management Fig. 45: Editing of the User Management
2. Tap <New> to create a new user account or 5. If you want to set or change the password, tap
highlight a user name on the user list and tap <Set Password>, enter the following dialog and
<Edit> to edit a user account. tap <OK>. If you want to change the password
of another user in your function as "Administra-
3. The Edit User dialog opens. tor", you have to enter the old password and the
4. Perform the following settings: new password twice.
- Activate/deactivate the user account with the 6. Tap <OK>.

check box.
- Enter a "User Name". Deleting a user account
- Select the "User Group". The "Administrator" can delete the accounts of any
- Activate/deactivate the "Auto log on" using user with minor rights. Logged-on users cannot be
the second check box. To activate this func- deleted.
tion you have to enter your password once
again. 1. Tap <Menu> and select "Setup > User Man-
agement".
2. Highlight a user name on the user list and tap
<Delete>.
Related topics: see Chapter 5.2.2
C48IB001EN-Y 87
12 Audit Trail
12 Audit Trail
The Audit trail function logs all operator actions that Only users with safe user names and pass-
directly or indirectly lead to changes in measuring words are allowed to activate the "Audit Trail"
results. function (6 characters minimum length) When
activating the "Audit Trail" function, all users
Each Audit Trail entry contains the following ele-
whose user name and password are not
ments:
regarded as safe are deactivated. All default
• Number, date and time of entry user passwords are not safe (see Chapter 11.1
"Password rules").
• User name
• A description of the action To view or export the audit trail
The Audit Trail function adds an entry in the follow- 1. Tap <Menu> and select "Data Memory > Audit
ing cases: Trail" to open the audit trail list.
• Product selection 2. Highlight a list item and tap <Details> to see
more detailed information.
• Adjustments and reset of adjustments
3. To perform an export to an MS Excel or text file,
• Activation or deactivation of the spike filter and
tap <Export> and follow the instructions on the
averaging filter for measurement values
screen. The exported Excel file is write-pro-
• Activation or deactivation of the audit trail func- tected to prevent any changes. All exported
tion entries are deleted from mPDS 5.
• All types of firmware updates
To delete the audit trail entries
If you are working under QM regulations like GLP/
Audit trail entries cannot be deleted, they are auto-
GMP or 21 CFR part 11, we recommend you acti-
matically deleted from mPDS 5 memory after they
vate the audit trail, export the audit trail data in reg-
have been exported to an external flash drive.
ular intervals and store the data in a safe place.
TIP: Note that the maximum number of audit trail
Activating/Deactivating the Audit Trail entries is limited to 1000. After 750 entries mPDS 5
generates a warning message, after 900 entries
1. Tap <Menu> and select "Setup > Audit Trail"
mPDS 5 generates an alarm message and when the
to open the Audit Trail Settings dialog.
list reaches 1000 entries the audit trail function is
2. Activate/deactivate the audit trail using the deactivated!
check box "Audit Trail active" and tap <OK>.
88 C48IB001EN-Y
13 User Functions
13 User Functions
By means of user functions you can carry out addi-
tional calculations based on the measurement val-
13.2 3D Polynomials
ues provided by a product type. User functions are
part of a specific product type. If you need the same Output quantity =
user function for several product types you must en-
ter it for each product type. AA + AB * x1 + AC * x2 + AD * x3 +
AE * x12 + AF * x22 + AG * x32 +
You can enter 10 user functions for each product AH * x1 * x2 + AI * x1 * x3 + AJ * x2 * x3 +
type. AK * x1 * x32 + AL * x2 * x32+ AM * x33 +
The result (output quantity) of a user function can be AN * x3 * x1² + AO * x2* x1² + AP * x1³ +
used as input quantity for a second one (cascaded AQ * x3 *x2² + AR * dx1 * x2² + AS * x2³
functions).
Output quantities of user functions are treated the Output This is the new measuring quantity
same way as the standard measurement values of quantity assigned to a specific base quantity
a product type (display, analog output, fieldbus, ad- and unit
justment, alarms...). x1 Input quantity 1 - Ref.Input 1
There are 3 types of user functions as described be-
x2 Input quantity 2 - Ref.Input 2
low.
x3 Input quantity 3 - Ref.Input 3
13.1 2D Polynomials AA ... Polynomial coefficients

AS
Output quantity = Input quantity 1, 2 and 3 can be any measuring

quantities of the specific product type. "Ref.Input 1",
AA + AB * x1 + AC * x12 + AD * x13 + AE * x14 + "Ref. Input 2" and "Ref. Input 3" are additional prod-
AF * x15) + uct parameters.
(AG + AH * x1 + AI * x12 + AJ * x13 + AK * x14)
*x1 +
(AL + AM * x1 + AN * x12 + AO * x13) *x22 + 13.3 User Formulas
(AP + AQ * x1 + AR * x12) * x23 +
(AS + AT * x1) * x24 + A user formula is any term consisting of up to 3 input
(AU) * x25 quantities taken from a product type, constants and
operators () + - / * ^.
Output This is the new measuring quantity
The following functions can be used as well: log(),
quantity assigned to a specific base quan-
ln(), sqrt(), sin(), cos(), tan(), asin (), acos (), atan()
tity and unit
Define up to three input quantities e.g. a=density,
x1 Input quantity 1 - Ref.Input 1 b=temperature and c=pressure and calculate a new
x2 Input quantity 2 - Ref.Input 2 measuring quantity "x" e.g. "x=a*(1+0.1*b)-0.01*c"
The term may contain up to 50 characters - cascad-
AA ... AU Polynomial coefficients
ed formulas are possible.
Input quantity 1 and 2 can be any measuring quan- TIP: If you need a special name of a quantity or a
tities of the specific product type. "Ref.Input 1" and special unit, use this type of user function!
"Ref. Input 2" are additional product parameters.
C48IB001EN-Y 89
13 User Functions
13.4 Creating a User Function The fieldbus index must be unique within one prod-
uct type. You need the fieldbus index to change re-
lated parameters, alarm limits, etc.
The following section describes an examlple for cre-
ating a user function. The procedure is similar for all
types of user functions and it is self explanatory.
TIP: A user function cannot be deleted if used in a
second function. User functions of the product type
of the current product cannot be changed.
Select menu
"Setup > Product Type Settings > Product type
selection > User Functions"
and then the product type, you want to use.
Proceed to the first step:
Fig. 48: Third step to create a 3D polynomial

In the third step you have to enter input quantities.
Fig. 46: First step to create a 3D polynomial

Define:
- Name (this is the name of the output quan-
tity) Fig. 49: Fourth step to create a 3D polynomial
- Function type
- Physical quantity In the fourth step you have to enter coefficients and
- Unit of the physical quantity reference values or the formula.
Fig. 47: Second step to create a 3D polynomial Fig. 50: Fifth step to create a 3D polynomial
90 C48IB001EN-Y
13 User Functions
Each user function allows you to define a range for

the output value.
This range can be used for 2 purposes:
1. It is always useful to know the validity range of a
formula. You can of course enter additional
information in the "comment" field as well.
2. In some scenarios the output value should be
limited to a certain range. E.g. Quite often nega-
tive values should be avoided because a con-
centration can't get negative. In such a case
activate "range control" and enter as "Output
Range Low Limit" = 0 and a suitable number
into the field "Output Range High Limit".
Fig. 52: Dialog window for export of user function
13.5 Export and Import of User Func- You tap on <OK> and the window telling you "Export
tions of user functions successfully completed". Another
<OK> concludes your operation.
From Version 4.20 on it is possible to either export NOTICE
or import user functions by a USB flash drive.
User functions may be protected. Protected user
functions cannot be exported.
13.5.1 Export User Function
For this function you tap on <menu> and select 13.5.2 Import User Function
"Service > Update > Export User Function" For this function you tap on <menu> and select
All your product types will be listed on the screen. "Service > Update > Import User Function"
You tap on the one needed and tick the function by
tapping the box in the first column (see Fig. 51). In- Insert your USB flash drive and enter the name of
sert your USB flash drive. the file you want to import (Fig. 53). Tap on <Next>
and confirm the details of this user function with
<OK>.
Fig. 51: Export a user function

Tap on <Next> and a dialog window appears where Fig. 53: Import user function
you enter the description and select the storage lo-
cation of the user function to be exported. NOTICE
Protected user functions can only be imported
into one mPDS 5 with a certain serial number.
C48IB001EN-Y 91
14 Backup and Restore Instrument Settings
14 Backup and Restore Instrument Settings

You can make a backup of all instrument settings on To restore Instrument Settings
the internal memory or on a USB flash drive. We
1. Tap <Menu> and select "Service > Restore
recommend to carry out a backup after major
Instrument Settings" to open the user dialog.
changes in mPDS 5 (new products added, etc.)
2. You can either restore the backup files from the
To backup Instrument Settings
internal memory or from an external USB flash
1. Tap <Menu> and select "Service > Backup drive.
Instruments Settings" to open the user dialog.
2. You can either store the backup files on the
internal memory or on an external USB flash
drive.
Fig. 55: Restore Instrument Settings
TIP: The backup file includes all settings of Ether-

net, PROFIBUS, L-Dens, .... If you have to transfer
Fig. 54: Backup of Instrument Settings the backup file to one or more mPDS 5, you will
have to adapt the fieldbus settings. The fieldbus ad-
dress must be unique in the corresponding net. The
same applies to the IP Address settings of the LAN
interface!
92 C48IB001EN-Y
15 Service Functions
mPDS 5 provides a number of service functions to After selecting the update file, which must be
support the service technician during trouble shoot- stored on the root directory of the USB flash
ing. In addition, it is possible to carry out firmware/ drive, mPDS 5 checks whether the selected
operating system updates via USB flash drive. update file contains a newer version than
currently installed. The following query
appears:
15.1 Update "Tap <no> to interrupt the procedure and
transfer the stored measurement values to a
NOTICE flash drive if you need them. Stored values will
Before an update change to product "0" as the be deleted during the update.
mPDS 5 re-starts and is innactive for several Tap <yes> to update mPDS 5. The mPDS 5 re-
minutes. That means that the mPDS 5 and the starts during the update.
connected sensors are in a stand-by mode.
Present version: ...
Insert a USB flash drive with an update file (*.aup) Update to version: ...
into the USB plug on the rear. As soon as the system firmware is updated, a
1. Before updating, first backup your instrument message is displayed. Tap <ok> to quit the
settings ("Service > Backup Instrument Set- screen.
tings") onto the same or any other USB flash TIP: The modules are automatically updated with
drive. the "System Update". Any module added after the
2. Tap <Menu> and select "Service > Update" to Update or any module not available at the Update
open the user dialog. won‘t be affected (e.g. Carbo 510 or Inline Pump 5).
For modules connected later and therefore are not
3. You can make an update of one of the following
up to date, a warning message is generated. Then
components:
an additional "Module Firmware Update" will be nec-
- System Update essary. Therefore it is recommended to connect all
- Module Firmware Update modules for the "System Update".
- Install language pack
If modules with incompatible versions are connect-
- Logging Configuration
ed, no product change can be carried out any more.
- Export User Function
- Import User Function
4. In most cases only the "System Update" has to 5. After updating the system it is recommended to
be updated via *.aup file. check for module firmware updates. Each plug-
in board of mPDS 5 and each smart sensor has
its own microcontroller running its specific firm-
ware. The firmware of the boards/smart sensors
can be updated through this menu.
Select "Service > Update > Module Firmware
Update".
The latest module firmware versions are part of
the *.aup files automatically copied to the inter-
nal memory.
Choose "Drive": Internal and tap <Next>. The
table could look like shown in Fig. 57. Boards
equipped with the latest firmware are also dis-
played.
TIP: If the firmware for the user interface is updated
and a new version of the modul firmware provided,
Fig. 56: System Update" a message will appear in the messagelist indicating
the old versions at the start.
C48IB001EN-Y 93
"Live Raw Data" window is used for trouble-

shooting and checking the basic function of all
in- and outputs of the different boards. The fol-
lowing raw values are available:
- raw currents of analog inputs
- status of the digital inputs
- raw values of an Anton Paar sensors: period,
density, temperature, ...
2. Follow the instructions on mPDS 5.
Fig. 57: "Module Firmware Update" screen

On the screen in Fig. 57 three boards are installed,
two of these with the latest firmware. An older firm-
ware version is stored on the I/O board. To install
the new version tap <Update> and the green tick will
appear. Tap <Update> on the right bottom and fol-
low the instructions.
TIP: As of user interface firmware version 3.00 the
mPDS 5 supports Anton Paar smart sensors (Carbo
510, Inline Pump 5,...). The module firmware of
those smart sensors is updated via CAN Bus and
Fig. 58: Live Raw Data - device selection
this menu option as well.
6. Languages can be updated independently from
user interface firmware releases. If you get a
new language package *.alp copy the file to a
USB flash drive and select "Service > Update >
Install Language Pack" to install the new lan-
guage files.
7. In some cases trouble shooting is required to
increase the amount of internally logged data.
Use "Service > Update > Logging Configura-
tion" to change this setting (also see Chapter
15.7).
TIP: Only change this setting in close cooperation
with an Anton Paar service engineer. You need suit-
able files to use this function.
Fig. 59: Live Raw Data - DSRn raw values
15.2 Live Raw Data TIP: AP sensors such as the DPRn/SPRn/DSRn ...
give an additional status information ("XXX -state",
1. Tap <Menu> and select "Service > Live Raw e.g. "AP MWA PTE1 state"), which is very important
Data" to open a window to select the device, to check:
whose raw values you want to visualize. The
94 C48IB001EN-Y
Table 17: State of Anton Paar sensors Table 18: Description of shortcuts in the expert
window
Transd.1
Meaning Shortcut Meaning
- State
0 Sensor running OK. The raw values AR1 Amplitude ratio 1 of SPRn 2T/2S
are valid and represent the current sensor
ones received from the sensor.
AR2 Amplitude ratio 2 of SPRn 2S
1 Sensor drop out. Until version 4.10 sensor
you get the last raw values before
Transd.1 - Status of the sensor 1 (see
the drop out. They do not represent
State table 17)
the current values from the sensor!
From version 4.20 all values are Coating Coating of SPRn 2S
"0".
NAMUR Sta- see Chapter 23.3
2 Wrong sensor type, connected sen- tus
sor does not match the expected
one. Some or all raw values do not
represent the current values from 15.3 Diagnosis
the sensor
4 Invalid values (calculated from raw 1. Tap <Menu> and select "Service > Diagnosis"
measurement value which are not to open a window to select the Sensor Name.
in within the permitted range. Possi- e.g. L-Com, Alarm1, etc.
ble causes: air/water mixture in a 2. Highlight a list item and tap <Details> to see
density sensor. more details of the selected sensor.
Density: 0 ... 3g/cm3
Sound Velocity: 0 ... 3000m/s 3. There are several buttons: <Connectors>,
Temperature: - 100 .... 400 °C <Input Quantities>, <Output Quantities> and
<Parameters>.
8 CRC error detected in the data
coming from the sensor. Some or
all raw values are not valid (see
table 66)!
Table of used shortcuts:
Table 18: Description of shortcuts in the expert

window
Shortcut Meaning
DI 1-8 Digital inputs 1 ... 8
DI 9-16 Digital inputs 9 ...16
DO 1-8 Digital outputs 1 ... 8

Fig. 60: Details - Connectors of DSRn Sensor
DO 9-16 Digital outputs 9 ...16
Detailed description of diagnosis windows see
AI 1 Analog input 1 Chapter 23.
Counter 1 Counter input 1 (uses DIO 1)
Transd. 1 Sensor 1 input

15.4 System Information
PerS Period of sound velocity sensor 1. Tap <Menu> and select "Service > System
Information" to open a window looking like the
PerD Period of density sensor following:
C48IB001EN-Y 95
15.6.1 Carbo 510

The diaphragms of the Carbo 510 need to be re-
placed every 6-12 months depending on the pro-
cess conditions and the measurement interval. In
this menu it is possible to enter the name of the ser-
vice technician, to define next service after a certain
number of cycles and you can enter a general note.
15.6.2 Oxy 5100 - Clear History Function

The historical data of sensor operation and cleaning
cycles are used to estimate the remaining cap life in
days.
Fig. 61: System information window Irregular production and cleaning schedule during
commissioning of new process plants decrease the
accuracy of the remaining cap life estimate [days]. It
is recommended to clear the history data after com-
pleting commissioning.
Go to the menu "Service > Sensor Service" and se-
lect "Oxy" klick <Service> and <Clear history>.
15.6.3 Oxy 510/5100 - Sensor Cap Adjust-

ment
The mPDS 5 provides some dedicated functions for
the Oxy 510/5100 sensors.
The standard adjustment parameters - offset and
gain - are available for each measurement value.
These parameters are stored in the mPDS 5 and do
Fig. 62: System information 2 (scroll down)
not change adjustment constants of the sensor
In case of any technical problems (if you need sup- itself. The functions described in the following
port from Anton Paar) tap <Save Logfile> to store section change the Oxy 510/5100 Sensor Cap itself.
detailed logging information on a USB flash drive.
Insert a USB flash drive, enter a file name and tap Due to thermal or chemical stress, high temperature
<OK>. After the file has been exported, press <OK> during CIP, aggressive chemicals in CIP liquids etc.
to return to the system information screen. the oxygen values may show a slight change during
the life time of a sensor cap. For the highest
accuracy, it is possible to adjust the displayed
15.5 Service Log oxygen value with reference gases. The Oxy 510/
5100 sensor consists of 2 main parts with
This menu is only visible to service technicians. Fur- electronics:
ther details are described in the service manual.
1. Sensor cap (including a memory chip for adjust-
ment constants)
15.6 Sensor Service 2. Sensor electronics
This menu is only visible to administrators or service 3. Interface board with CAN open interface for the
technicians and in certain configurations. Further
details please refer to the service manual as well.
96 C48IB001EN-Y
connection to the mPDS 5. 3. Connect the nitrogen bottle with a min. purity for
the wide range and the trace range cap:
NOTICE 99.999% (nitrogen 5.0), min. purity for the ultra
The sensor cap must be dry for adjustment with trace range cap: 99.9999% (nitrogen 6.0) to the
standard gases. Entering the correct ambient adjustment container as shown in Fig. 64
pressure influences the quality of the adjustment
tremendously (a deviation of 50 mbar leads to a
deviation of 5% of the measurement result).
15.6.3.1 Rescan Sensor Cap

1
In the menu "Service > Sensor Service" select "Oxy"
and press <Service> and <Rescan Sensor Cap> in
order to read the current sensor cap parameters 2
after exchanging the sensor cap of the Oxy 510/ 3
5100. The sensor cap includes a memory chip
which stores the specific parameters of the sensor
1 Connection for nitrogen/oxygen mixture
cap. These parameters must be transferred to the 2 Connection for nitrogen
sensor via this menu item. 3 Valve
NOTICE Fig. 64: Oxy 510 mounted on the cap adjustment con-
If you do not carry out <Rescan sensor cap> tainer
after exchanging the sensor cap, the displayed 4. Open the valve of the nitrogen bottle and the
oxygen values could be completely wrong! nitrogen connection valve on the adjustment
container. Let nitrogen flow through the con-
15.6.3.2 Sensor Cap Adjustment Zero Point tainer (flow rate 3 l/min).
5. Wait for at least 3 minutes to reach temperature
Use the Cap Adjustment Kit from Anton Paar and
equilibrium and to remove all residual oxygen in
pure nitrogen gas for the zero point adjustment.
the container.
6. Log on as "administrator".
7. In the menu "Service > Sensor Service" select
"Oxy" and press <Cap Adjustment>. Press
<Adjust Zero Point> and enter the atmospheric
pressure in [mbar] for your geographic location.
A typical value is 976 mbar (allowed range 300
... 1100 mbar).
Fig. 63: Sensor cap adjustment container of the Sensor

Cap Adjustment Kit
NOTICE
Before you carry out any cap adjustment, make
sure that your sensor has loaded the adjustment
constants of the mounted sensor cap via <Res-
can sensor cap>.
1. Make sure the production line is empty and

unpressurized.
2. Remove the Oxy 510/5100 sensor from the
main line and mount it on the adjustment con- Fig. 65: Cap adjustment Zero Point
tainer. 8. Press <Finish Adjustment>. The message
C48IB001EN-Y 97
"Adjusting …" appears for 20 seconds. As soon

as the message "Adjustment completed"
appears, you can press <ok> to exit this menu.
9. If "Adjustment failed" appears, restart the sensor
by briefly switching the power off and on before
repeating the procedure from the very beginning
10.After zero point adjustment, the Oxy 510/5100
uses the user-defined adjustment constants.
11. Close the valve of the nitrogen bottle and the
nitrogen valve of the adjustment container.
Remove the Oxy 510/5100 from the adjustment
container and mount it in the line.
15.6.3.3 Sensor Cap Adjustment Oxygen Point Fig. 66: Cap adjustment Oxygen Point
This adjustment can be carried out in addition to the
zero point adjustment (see 16.2.2.1 above) to fur- NOTICE
ther increase the accuracy over a wider range. The oxygen concentration must be entered in [%
oxygen] NOT in [% air saturation].
Use the Cap Adjustment Kit from Anton Paar
(Fig. 63) and a reference gas mixture nitrogen/oxy-
gen typically 200 ppm O2 for the ultra trace range 8. Press <Finish Adjustment>. The message
cap, 1% O2 for the trance range cap, 21% O2 for the "Adjusting …" appears for 20 seconds. As soon
wide range cap. as the message "Adjustment completed"
appears, you can press <ok> to exit this menu.
Before you carry out any cap adjustment, make sure
that your sensor has loaded the adjustment con- 9. If "Adjustment failed" appears, restart the sensor
stants of the mounted sensor cap via the function by briefly switching the power off and on before
<Rescan sensor cap>. repeating the procedure from the very begin-
ning.
1. Make sure the production line is empty and
unpressurized. 10.After <Oxygen point adjustment> the Oxy 510/
5100 sensor uses the user-defined set of adjust-
2. Remove the Oxy 510/5100 from the main line ment constants.
and mount it on the adjustment container.
11. Close the valve of the nitrogen/oxygen bottle
3. Connect the bottle with the nitrogen/oxygen mix- and the nitrogen/oxygen valve of the adjustment
ture to the adjustment container as shown in container and remove the Oxy 510/5100 from
Fig. 4. the adjustment container and mount it on the
4. Open the valve of the nitrogen/oxygen bottle line.
and let gas mixture flow through the container
(flow rate 3 L/min). 15.6.3.4 Cap Adjustment Set
5. Wait for at least 3 minutes to reach temperature Each sensor cap is delivered with 2 sets of adjust-
equilibrium and to remove all residual gases in ment constants stored directly on the memory chip
the container. in the sensor cap. At delivery time both sets are
6. Log on as "administrator". identical. By default the Oxy 510/5100 uses the first
set of adjustment constants (Cap adjustment set =
7. Select menu "Service > Sensor Service>Oxy" "0").
and press <Cap adjustment>. Press <Adjust
Oxygen Point> and enter the atmospheric pres- During the re-adjustment at the zero point or at an
sure in [mbar] for your geographic location. A oxygen point, new constants are determined. Every
typical value is 978 mbar (allowed range 300 ... re-adjustment changes the second set of adjust-
1100 mbar). Enter the oxygen concentration in ment constants. The modified constants are stored
% in addition to the air pressure in [mbar]. on the memory chip. In the course of the first re-ad-
justment the Oxy 510/5100 automatically switches
to the user-defined adjustment constants (Cap ad-
justment set = "1").
98 C48IB001EN-Y
15.9 Adjustment/Calibration of an
If you want to go back to the factory adjustment con-
stants, select menu "Service > Sensor Ser-
L-Col 6100 Sensor
vice>Oxy" and press <Cap adjustment>. Press
The L-Col 6100 Sensor is factory adjusted before
<Change Adjustment Set > to swap from the first ad-
delivery. So the zero points should be correct. How-
justment set (=factory set=0) to the second adjust-
ever it is recommended to check the zero points im-
ment set (User defined adjustment set=1) or vice
mediately after or during putting the system into
versa.
operation.
The currently selected adjustment set is shown in
Note that the procedure below has to be applied to
this screen.
an L-Col 6100 sensors equipped with 3 different
wavelengths. Typically only one or two LEDs (wave-
NOTICE lengths) are built-in. However adjust the available
The factory adjustment constants can't be absorbance values.
changed. The user-defined adjustment con-
stants are changed by every zero point and
every oxygen point adjustment. Every adjust-
ment changes the "Cap adjustment set" to "1". Adjustment procedure:
The zero points of the L-Col 6100 sensor need to be
adjusted regularly. The recommended period for re-
15.6.4 Sensor Service for L-Dens 7000/L- adjustment is 3 months.
Sonic/L-Com
NOTICE
If a sensor board of these sensors needs to be re- Adjustment of the L-Col 6100 sensor can result
placed, the parameters accessible via this menu in deviations from the previous measuring value
have to be entered after the replacement. as the instrument is newly reset to a reference
value (typically water).
15.7 Logging Configuration If necessary disconnect the sensor from the empty,
cold and unpressurized production line and clean
The mPDS 5 records the most important incidences.
the surface of the glass. Mount the senor into the
However, you might need a record of additional in-
production line again.
cidences, e.g. for trouble shooting.
1. Make sure that clean, bubble free water is in the
As these recordings need more resources of the
line. If possible increase the pressure to several
mPDS 5, the change of such a configuration can
bars.
only be carried out in cooperation with Anton Paar.
The configuration file is available from your Anton 2. Assign the available absorbance measurement
Paar distribution partner. The setting of the mPDS 5 channels to the mPDS 5 display.
on delivery must not be changed, unless on request e.g.
of an authorized Anton Paar Service engineer or
distribution partner.
15.8 Unlock Service

There are some menu functions that are exclusively
available for Anton Paar Service technicians. If for
some reason it should be necessary to use one of
these service functions, contact Anton Paar for fur-
ther details.
The menu "Unlock service" is necessary to define a
customer-specific unlock password.
Fig. 67: Online screen with typical layout
C48IB001EN-Y 99
Normally the displayed absorbance values (for wa-

ter) should be "0" or at least very close to "0". In the
above example screen the displayed values are:
Absorbance 1: 0.084 AU
3. Go to menu "Setup < Sensor and I/O manage-
ment". Select the "L-Col 6100" sensor and press
Edit>. The following screen comes up. E.g. :
Fig. 70: Online screen after zero point adjustment
NOTICE
Make sure that the new offsets are calculated as
the sum of the old offset plus the new deviations!
E.G.
- Old "Zero Offset Absorbance 1" …
0.084 AU
- New deviation … for Absorbance 1 with
water… 0.010 AU
- The new "Zero Offset Absorbance 1":
Fig. 68: Typical L-Col parameters
0.084 AU+0.010 AU= 0.094 AU
4. There is one offset for each measurement Calibration procedure (functional check):
value. To correct the very small deviations in our
above example enter the following values: After the L-Col 6100 sensor has been adjusted at
Zero Offset Absorbance 1 [AU] = -0.084 the zero point it is possible to calibrate the sensor at
Zero Offset Absorbance 2 [AU] = -0.045 a common working point. Use the so called "Check-
Zero Offset Absorbance 3 [AU] = -0.023 ing unit" which is delivered with each L-Col 6100
sensor in black protection box.
Fig. 71: Checking unit

This unit lets about 1 % of the light travel to the de-
tector. So each absorbance value is about 2. The
exact absorbance values you should get are en-
graved into the checking unit:
1. Make sure that clean, bubble free water is in the
line. If possible increase the pressure to several
bars - this reduces the danger of bubbles.
Fig. 69: L-Col parameters after a first adjustment at the 2. Assign the available absorbance measurement
zero point
channels to the mPDS 5 display.
5. The online screen after the adjustment could be 3. Remove the cover of the slot (see figures below)
like this: and insert the checking unit into the opening.
Mind the 2 pins in the checking unit which are
required for the exact positioning of the unit.
100 C48IB001EN-Y
16 Upkeep and Cleaning
Fasten the unit with the knurled screw. 5. Compare the actual values with the values
engraved on the checking unit. If there is a devi-
ation of more than ±2% of the measuring value
try the following remedies:
- Repeat the adjustment with water - check for
bubbles
- Clean the surface of the glasses
- Check for scratches on the surface of the
glasses
- Make sure there is no other light source inter-
fering with the measurement
1 2
Repeat the calibration proced
6. ure. If there is still an unacceptable deviation
1 Slot for checking unit contact the service department in charge for fur-
2 Sensor with checking unit ther advice or replacement of the sensor.
Fig. 72: Checking unit 7. After finishing the calibration procedure, remove
4. The screen may look like this the checking unit from the senor and close the
hole with the cover attached to the sensor head.
Make sure to put the checking unit into the pro-
tection box for future use.
Fig. 73: Online screen with checking unit
16 Upkeep and Cleaning

16.1 Software Administration • Clean the mPDS 5 avoiding chemicals that
could corrode or damage the device or the seals
(e.g. warm water).
The mPDS 5 firmware can be updated via USB in-
terface. • If a high-pressure washer or steam is used, do
not aim at the seams, gaskets, front panel etc.
NOTICE
The mPDS 5 does not need to be updated. We
recommend an update only after written demand 16.3 Wetted Parts
by your Anton Paar representative.
The mPDS 5 does not contain any wetted parts.
16.2 Cleaning
• Clean the mPDS 5 to prevent contamination or
buildup of deposits.
C48IB001EN-Y 101
17 Maintenance and Repair
16.4 Storing and Transporting the 16.5 Packing the Instrument for
Instrument Returns
• Only use the original packaging for the storage • Clean the instrument before packaging.
and transportation.
• Return the instrument in the original packaging.
• Do not store outdoors and avoid direct sunlight.
Store the instrument in a dry, clean place.
Remove transportation protection not until
installation. Consider national regulations
regarding the weight and lifting the instrument.
• The storage temperature is between
-20 and 60 °C.
17 Maintenance and Repair

17.1 Maintenance Performed by an 17.3 Repair Performed by an Autho-
Authorized Anton Paar Service Engi- rized Anton Paar Representative
neer In case your instrument needs repair, contact your
local Anton Paar representative, who will take care
The evaluation unit mPDS 5 does not require peri- of the necessary steps. If your instrument needs to
odical maintenance which shall be performed by an be returned, request an RMA (Return Material Au-
authorized Anton Paar Service Engineer. thorization Number). It must not be sent without the
RMA and the filled “Safety Declaration for Instru-
ment Repairs”. Please make sure it is cleaned be-
17.2 Maintenance Performed by an fore return.
Authorized Anton Paar Service Engi- TIP: Find the contact data of your local Anton Paar
neer representative on the Anton Paar website (http://
www.anton-paar.com) under “Contact”.
The evaluation unit mPDS 5 does not require a pe-
riodical maintenance which shall be performed by
an authorized Anton Paar Service Engineer 1.
A missing maintenance may mean that under cer-
tain conditions your warranty is no longer valid. 2
1 Please contact your Anton Paar representative to get an offer.

2 For detailed information please see the general terms of delivery (GTD) on the Anton Paar website (http://
www.anton-paar.com).
102 C48IB001EN-Y
18 Installation
Part 2 - Installation/Technical Data
18 Installation
18.1 Mounting mPDS 5
NOTICE
• Commissioning and service must be carried
out by qualified and authorized personnel
only.
• Read this section carefully before mounting
the instrument. Incorrect handling could dam-
age the instrument.
• The front side of the instrument is IP 54. All
other parts of mPDS 5 must be protected by
an additional housing or cabinet.
mPDS 5 has to be mounted in one of the following Fig. 74: Dimensions of mPDS 5 (front view)
(IP 54 or higher):
• a control panel (switchboard),
• a switch cabinet,
• a housing supplied by Anton Paar.
NOTICE
The dimensions of the housing must be equal or
bigger than the standard stainless steel housing
available from Anton Paar (Mat. Nr. 86824)
(W x H x D = 490 x 320 x 400 mm = 19.3 x 12.6
x 15.8 inch) to avoid overheating.
The distance between the mPDS 5 housing and
the protection housing or the cabinet must be
min. 14 mm.
[mm]
Fig. 75: Dimensions of mPDS 5 (side view)
C48IB001EN-Y 103
18 Installation
bracket screws one or two turns clockwise until

the gap between front mask and panel is com-
pletely closed.
NOTICE
If mPDS 5 is transported when it is already built
into a housing, it must be mechanically sup-
ported to avoid damage during transport!
Make sure that the transport protection is
removed before mPDS 5 is switched on because
of the danger of overheating.
18.2 Configuration Sheets

Chapter 18.3contains general information on the
electrical wiring of inputs and outputs. Since mPDS
[mm] 5 is a flexible modular system, each mPDS 5 comes
with configuration sheets, specifying the individual
configuration. If these sheets are missing you can
Fig. 76: Dimensions of mPDS 5 (top view)
look up details in the diagnosis window directly in
How to mount mPDS 5: mPDS 5.
1. Make sure that the housing used has a panel

cutout which is 249 x 189 mm
(9.80 x 7.44 inch).
2. Remove the two brackets from mPDS 5. Insert
mPDS 5 into the panel cutout from the front.
3. Insert the pins of the brackets into the apertures
of both sides of the housing.
Fig. 77: Side view of mounted mPDS 5

4. Slip the mPDS 5 into the opening and hold it in
place until both brackets are fixed.
5. Turn the screw at the rear of one bracket slightly
clockwise until the brackets touch the panel.
The axis of the brackets must be in horizontal
position.
6. Now fasten the instrument by turning the
Fig. 78: Configuration sheet for wiring
104 C48IB001EN-Y
18 Installation
18.3 Electrical Wiring of Inputs and Used Symbols:
Outputs Functional ground

contact:
WARNING
• The instructions given in this chapter must be WARNING
strictly followed. Installation and service must
be carried out by authorized and qualified • The cables for the connection of the transmit-
personnel only. ters and actuators have to meet all local regu-
• All in- and outputs (inlcuding relay ouputs) lations and the local environmental conditions
connected to mPDS 5 have to accord with with special attention to mechanical stress.
PELV (protective extra-low voltage) of EN • Only shielded cables with double insulation
61140 or SELV specification of EN 60950, i.e. are allowed. The shield has to be grounded
maximum voltage Umax must not exceed 24 V on one side only.
+ 20% = 28.8 V and a maximum current Imax
= 0.7 A. • All signals connected to the instrument must
be insulated from hazardous live voltage:
insulation voltage  3000 V r.m.s., 50/60 Hz.
The described instruments are designed and tested
according to the required standards (see • Establish a proper stress relief for all con-
appendix B). nected cables.
Nevertheless it is recommended to follow the stan- • The technical data of the inputs and outputs
dard guidelines for electrical installations in plants. are listed in Chapter 22.
In particular, separate signal/data cables from pow-
er cables. This eliminates possible interferences • After changing the hardware configuration
between components. See relevant literature for (connected devices) disconnect power for 1
more details. minute and restart mPDS 5.
• If inputs and outputs are connected to the
same board, choose the proper type of wir-
ing. It is recommended to supply the board
externally (DIO+/DIO GND) and use passive
input signals.
• It is strongly recommended to use only poten-
tial free contacts for driving any digital input
or output (e.g. Hold or Flowstop signals). Oth-
erwise earthloops my cause major interfer-
ences or even damages to the
mPDS 5.
TIP: To insert or remove cables you have to use a

small screw driver to press onto the orange part of
terminals. This releases the locking mechanism.
Cable specifications for the plug-in terminals
(FMC 1.5/12/ST-3.5)
Cable specifications for plug-in terminals (FMC 1,5/
12-ST-3,5)
C48IB001EN-Y 105
18 Installation
Connection data NOTICE

Conductor diameter fixed min 0.2 mm2 • All changes to the wiring should be done
while mPDS 5 is switched off.
Conductor diameter fixed max 1.5 mm2
• If this is not immediately possible, it is abso-
Conductor diameter flexible min 0.2 mm2 luteley necessary that you switch mPDS 5 off
and on later after finishing the wiring for at
Conductor diameter flexible max 1.5 mm2 least 1 minute.
Conductor diameter flexible with 0.2 mm2 • After any change to the CAN network (Carbo
wire end ferrule, no plastic ferrule 510/Inline Pump 5,...) it is necessary to dis-
min connect mPDS 5 from the supply voltage for
at least 1 minute.
Conductor diameter flexible with 1.5 mm2
wire end ferrule, no plastic ferrule • If there is a defective device in the CAN net-
max work or if you remove a defective device from
the CAN network the correct functioning of
Conductor diameter flexible with 0.2 mm2 the network cannot be assured. Setup the
wire end ferrule, with plastic ferrule CAN network after removing the defective
min device and disconnect mPDS from the power
supply for at least 1 minute.
Conductor diameter flexible with 0.75 mm2
wire end ferrule, with plastic ferrule • Make sure that all devices in the CAN net-
max work use unique addresses. There is no colli-
sion detection implemented, double
Conductor diameter AWG/kcmil min 24 addresses cause unpredictable faults to all
Conductor diameter AWG/kcmil 16 devices in the network.
max
Stripping length: 10 mm
4 1 2 3
Fig. 79: Connect or disconnect cables
1 I/O board: 12 digital inputs/outputs, 3 analog inputs, 4

analog outputs and 2 relays
2 Transducer board: 2 inputs for the old generation of
DPR/DPRn/SPR/SPRn/DSRn sensors, 12 digital
inputs/outputs and 2 analog inputs
3 CPU board: DC 24 V power supply, LAN (Interface for
Davis 5), 2x USB, CAN interface for Anton Paar smart
sensors
4 PROFIBUS board: conn. to a PLC via PROFIBUS
Fig. 80: Rear view of mPDS 5 with CPU, Transducer, I/O,
PROFIBUS boards
106 C48IB001EN-Y
18 Installation
General Information: dangerous area.

• The power supply connection must be perma-
1. Each mPDS 5 is equipped with at least one
nent. When connecting the supply cable,
board. Each board provides one or more inputs
observe your national regulations and take local
and outputs.
ambient conditions into consideration. Use a
2. Each mPDS 5 comes with configuration strain relief suitable for the cable diameter.
sheets specifying which input and output is
• Use a double-isolated power supply cable.
used for which purpose.
• Connect the functional ground terminal marked
3. The following chapters explain the basic wiring
with the
and functions of all digital and analog inputs and
symbol:
outputs.
18.3.1 24 V DC Power Supply (CPU board)
WARNING on the rear of mPDS 5 to the housing it is

mounted in (Ground terminal of switch cabinet).
• All in- and outputs (inlcuding relay outputs)
connected to mPDS 5 have to accord with mPDS 5 CPU board
+ DC 24 V +
PELV (protective extra-low voltage) of EN
61140 or SELV specification of EN 60950, i.e. 4 A, F
maximum voltage Umax must not exceed 24 V Filter
+ 20% = 28.8 V.
• In addition to the maximum voltage the
proper isolation of the connected electrical
circuits is crucial. - -
• Even very short voltage drops of milliseconds
cause a restart of the mPDS 5 due to the
Fig. 81: Circuited diagram of power supply
required fast low voltage detection.
TIP: The 4 A fuse is welded onto the CPU board and
The power supply must lie in the range DC 24 V - cannot be replaced by the user.
15% +20 %. The maximum power consumption of
mPDS 5 is 60 W. 18.3.2 USB Interface (CPU board)
NOTICE This interface is used to connect flash drives or a
Do not connect mPDS 5 to the power supply USB keyboard.
immediately after unpacking. Wait for a few
• Flash drives store backup files or update pack-
hours until mPDS 5 has adapted to the ambient
ages. You can export measurement values to
temperature, then activate.
the USB flash drive.
• The screw terminals for the power supply are • Connect a USB keyboard to enter alphanumeric
located on CPU board always in Slot 1. characters especially useful for the product set-
tings.
• DC 24 V+ positive terminal
• DC 24 V- negative terminal 18.3.3 Ethernet (LAN) Interface (CPU board)
• If operation of mPDS 5 could lead to dangerous
situations, install an emergency switch. The The Ethernet (LAN) interface is used by Davis 5.
switch must be less than 1 m away from the
C48IB001EN-Y 107
18 Installation
18.3.4 CAN Interface for Carbo 510, Carbo

520, Cobrix 2600, Inline Pump 5, L-Dens/L- m PDS 5
Sonic/L-Com ... (CPU board) CANout CANin
The external CAN interface is used for smart sen-

120 
sors from Anton Paar (Carbo 510, Carbo 520 Opti-
120 
cal, Cobrix 2600, Inline Pump 5, L-Dens/L-Sonic/L-
Com..). CANin CANout CANin CANout CANin CANout
Theoretically up to 10 CAN smart sensors can be Sm art Sensor Sm art Sensor Sm art Sensor
connected to this interface. If you use a CAN plug
according to CiA DR 303-1, wire the plug as de-
scribed in this standard or directly at the terminals
on the plug. For detailed pinning see Fig. 83: CAN network with several smart sensors
Chapter 22.
A CAN network must be terminated on both ends
using a 120  resistor to avoid reflections and to
maintain error-free communication.
For more details see the instruction manuals of the
smart sensors.
The above mentioned standard plug contains a ter-
minating resistor. This resistor can be activated with
a switch.
1 m PDS 5
CPU board
1
Sm art H 9 5
Sensor
120 
(Carbo 510, 120 
Inline Pump 5) L
GND 6
1 Fig. 84: CAN connector
1 PIN numbers
Fig. 82: Connection of a single smart sensor
NOTICE
The D-SUB plug in Fig. 82 is shown from the
back. Be careful with the PIN numbers on the
120
plug.
CAN IN CAN OUT
Fig. 85: Wiring diagram of the CAN connector

In Fig. 85 you see the optional CAN connector. If
mPDS 5 is installed at the end of the CAN network
put the switch to the position "on" to activate the ter-
minating resistor. In this position all CAN OUT termi-
nals are separated from mPDS 5.
TIP: It is strongly recommended to update all CAN
108 C48IB001EN-Y
18 Installation
devices to the latest firmware version. After install- treated like a sensor. By default the Inline Pump is
ing a CAN device use mPDS 5 to update the smart configured and activated in each product type. Only
sensor firmware. when you select product "0", the Inline Pump is
switched off.
Tap <Menu> and select "Service > Update > Mod-
ul Firmware Update".
NOTICE
All connected CAN devices must have unique CAN For a maximum of 10 minutes, the Inline Pump 5
addresses. may run dry without damage. To prevent it from
damage, you must activate the dry running pro-
The predefined CAN addresses of the smart tection of the Inline Pump 5: ’Dry Check Active’
sensors are: set to ’1’ and
Table 19: Preselected CAN addresses for smart you must deactivate the automatic start: ’Auto-
sensors start’ set to ’0’.
The fixed settings for the Inline Pump 520 are:
Dry run detection = 1 (on)
CAN address
predefined Autostart = 0 (off)
Smart sensor
Alternatively if connected to a PLC, the PLC can

send start/stop signals to activate/deactivate the In-
1. Inline Pump 5/520 10 line Pump.
2. Inline Pump 5/520 11
To change the settings of the Inline Pump, go to the
1. Carbo 510 20 menu "Setup > Sensor and I/O Management", high-
2. Carbo 510 21 light "Inline Pump" and tap <Edit> in the buttons ar-
ea.
1. L-Vis 510/520 Ex 30
2. L-Vis 510/520 Ex 31
Stopping the Smart Sensors
1. Carbo 520 Optical, Cobrix 2600 40 Typically, Smart Sensors are stopped by selecting
2. Carbo 520 Optical, Cobrix 2600 41 certain products (product types), e.g. "product 0 out
1. Oxy 510/5100 50 of operation" stops all connected Smart Sensors
2. Oxy 510/5100 51 and Transducers. In some cases it makes sense to
stop Smart Sensors via an external signal. There
1. L-Rix 510/520/5100/5200 60 are 2 possible signals:
2. L-Rix 510/520/5100/5200 61
1. All smarts sensors can be stopped by a digital
1. L-Dens 7400/7500 70 input connected to a digital output from a PLC.
2. L-Dens 7400/7500 71 For the Inline Pump 5 it is possible to delay the
stop input in a range of 0 up to 1000 minutes.
1. L-Sonic 80 That means that the digital input must be active
2. L-Sonic 81 for the specified time before the Inline Pump 5
will be stopped.
TIP The "decade" of the CAN address cannot be
changed (e.g. L-Sonic sensors always use the 8 as 2. In addition, Carbo 510, Carbo 520 Optical and
decade: 80, 81, ....) only the "unit position" can be Cobrix 2600, all older Carbo types, the Inline
changed via the switch on the board inside the elec- Pump 5 and the latest generation of L-Dens
tronics housing. If only one sensor of each type is 7400/7500 and L-Com 5500 can be stopped by
connected to an mPDS 5, in most cases the default a PLC via fieldbus interface. For this purpose, it
setting (Switch in "0" position) is correct. is necessary to define a "Carbo Stop" trans-
ducer respectively an "Inline Pumpe 5 Strop"
mPDS 5 Version 4.0 supports up to 2 lines and transducer. This special transducer stops all
therefore a maximum number of 2 addresses per Carbo transducers (respectively the Inline Pump
smart sensor are needed. 5) of the current line and can be controlled by
When the Inline Pump is installed into the CAN net- the PLC.
work, the mPDS 5 controls the Inline Pump, which is
C48IB001EN-Y 109
18 Installation
18.3.5 Transducer Inputs for DPR/DPRn/ active transmitter
SPR/SPRn/DSRn (Transd. board) MPDS 5: Transducer board,

I/O board
AI1 AUX
These inputs are used for all types of Anton Paar
sensors such as DPR/DPRn/SPR/SPRn/DSRn with
PTE 2/3/5 electronics.
RL Filter
"Transd.1 +"positive terminal
"Transd.1 -"negative terminal
"Transd.2 +"positive terminal AI1 IN
"Transd.2 -"negative terminal

The above Anton Paar sensors are supplied via
Fig. 87: Circuit diagram for 0/4-20 mA analog input 1,
these interfaces and provide a number of raw mea-
passive transmitter
surement values such as temperature and period.
The latest generation of electronics (PTE5) provides
additional sensor constants to calculate density, 18.3.7 0/4-20 mA Analog Outputs (I/O
sound velocity, etc.
board)
TIP: Use a shielded twin-core cable to connect the
sensor. The shield is grounded only at the sensor Example:
side. Any length of cable is possible, provided that AO1+ Analog output 1, positive terminal
the line resistance does not exceed 100 . AO1- Analog output 1, negative terminal
TIP: All analog outputs are active 4-20 mA standard
18.3.6 0/4-20 mA Analog Inputs (Transd. current outputs. Connect the outputs to passive 4-
board and I/O board) 20 mA analog inputs.
Example: MPDS 5: I/O board

“AI1 AUX+” Auxiliary voltage for analog input 1.
"AI1 IN" Input terminal (positive signal)
AO1+
"AI1 GND" Ground terminal (negative signal)
TIP:
• System inputs to connect an active or passive RL
transmitter with a standard 0/4 to 20 mA signal
(e.g.: pressure transmitter, oxygen transmit-
ter,...).
AO1-
• Use terminal "IN" and "GND" to connect active
transmitters.
• Use terminal "AUX+" and "IN" to connect pas-
sive transmitters. Fig. 88: Circuit diagram for analog output 1
MPDS 5: Transducer board

I/O board 18.3.8 Digital Outputs (Transd. and I/O
AI1 IN
board)
mPDS 5 provides combined digital inputs and out-
Filter puts. The actual function of the interfaces is set up
before delivery and documented in the configuration
sheets. You find all details of the configuration in the
diagnosis window as well. Typically DIO1 of I/O
AI1GND board in slot 3 is used as a warning output and DIO2
of the I/O board in slot 3 is used as an alarm output.
Fig. 86: Circuit diagram for 0/4-20 mA analog input 1, TIP: Contact your Anton Paar representative if you
110 C48IB001EN-Y
18 Installation
want to change these settings.
The following illustration applies to all 12 digital out-

puts, although only illustrated for output 1:
WARNING
mPDS 5: Transducer or
The external power supply for the digital outputs + DC 24 V I/O board
must be DC 24 V complying with PELV (accord- DIO+
ing to EN 61140). It must be an energy-limited DIO1
electrical circuit: DIO2
- external fuse breaks overcurrent 6.9 A …
after not more than 120 s …
- reliable current limitation at 5.2 A …
- Maximum current of all outputs together
with internal power supply: 25 mA!
Digital outputs (Transducers board or …

I/O board): DIO GND
-
"DIO+" Positive terminal of all digital outputs.
"DIO1" Digital output 1
Fig. 89: Digital output circuit diagram illustrated for output
"DIO2" Digital output 2.
1(standard relation)
"DIO4" Digital output 4. mPDS 5: Transducer or
"DIO5" Digital output 5. I/O board
+ DC 24 V
"DIO6" Digital output 6. DIO+
DIO1
DIO2
…
…
…
"DIO GND" Ground terminal of all digital outputs.
TIP:
…
• The digital outputs are isolated transistor "push-
DIO GND
pull" outputs. -
• The digital output signal can be connected to a
digital input of a PLC or can be used to operate Fig. 90: Digital output circuit diagram illustrated for output
a signal lamp, relay or similar components. 1(inverse relation)
• For operation of the digital outputs an external
power supply is recommended.
• All digital outputs have one common 18.3.9 Digital Outputs on LED board (Cobrix
ground("DIO GND") and a common power 5500/5600)
supply terminal ("DIO +").
• Connect the output circuit between DIOx and The LED board is exclusively used for the Cobrix
the "DIO+" terminals for an inverted I/O 5500/5600 to control the multicolor alarm lamp. The
relation. wiring diagram is part of the Cobrix manuals.
• It is strongly recommended to use only potential
free contacts for driving any digital outputs.
Otherwise earthloops my cause major
interferences or even damages to the mPDS 5.
C48IB001EN-Y 111
18 Installation
18.3.10 Relay Outputs (I/O board) It is necessary to configure the error categories af-
fecting the error relay (see Chapter 19.7 External
Error Status for the details).
WARNING
TIP: For details of the configuration see configura-
Only energy-limited circuits may be switched via tion sheets or diagnosis function directly on mPDS
the relays. Maximum switching voltage 30 V, 5.
maximum switching and steady current 0.7 A.
For failures provide:
- external fuse breaks overcurrent 6.9 A 18.3.11 Digital Inputs/Counter Inputs (Trans-
after not more than 120 s (e.g. Schurter ducer and I/O Board)
FST 3.15 A)
- reliable current limitation at 5.2 A mPDS 5 provides combined inputs and outputs.
See attached configuration sheets to find out which
interfaces are used as outputs and which as inputs
in your specific application
Table 20: Relay output terminals
.
1: "Relay 1" Normally open (NO)

2: "Relay 1" Common (C) WARNING
3: "Relay 2" Normally open (NO)
4: "Relay 2" Common (C) The external power supply required for the digital
inputs/counter inputs must be 24 V DC comply-
ing with PELV according to EN 61140. It must be
TIP: The contact between NO and C is closed de-
an energy-limited electrical circuit:
pending on the monitored measurement value and
- external fuse breaks overcurrent 6.9 A
the mode of operation.
after not more than 120 s (e.g. Schurter
FST 3.15 A)
- reliable current limitation at 5.2 A!
mPDS 5: I/O board
+ DC 24 V Relay 1
Digital inputs:
NO "DIO+" Positive terminal of all digital inputs.
C "DIO1" Digital input 1
Relay 1 "DIO2" Digital input 2.
"DIO3" Digital input 3.
-
Fig. 91: Relay output 1 circuit diagram
"DIO GND" Ground terminal of all digital inputs.
18.3.10.1 Error Relay
TIP:
It is possible to use one relay as the error relay. By
default the error relay closes when mPDS 5 is • Digital inputs detect the status of the connected
switched on and the application is running without signal (high or low). These inputs are isolated
any major problem. from mPDS 5.
• A voltage signal must be connected to the input
Whenever an error occurs (status symbol = Alarm/ (DI 1...12) and the ground terminal "DIO GND"
error), the error relay opens. ("0"=low: < 5 V; "1"=high > 15 V).
The logic of the error relay can be inverted if re-
quired in the menu "Sensor and I/O Settings".
112 C48IB001EN-Y
18 Installation
• It is strongly recommended to use a passive mPDS 5: Transducer board or

switch (potential free contact) between DIO+ I/O board
and the required input. Otherwise earthloops
DIO +
my cause major interferences or even damages Hold passive
to the mPDS 5. DIO 1
DIO 2
"Hold" - function: ...
Typically, one of the digital inputs of the transducer ...
board is used to hold ("freeze") the concentration ...
values (look to the Configuration sheet to see which
DI is used for the hold function). This means that as
long as the hold-input is high most results are ’fro-
zen’ to the values when the hold-input changed from
’0’ to ’1’. Fig. 94: Digital Input/Hold input circuit diagram [DIO 1]
for a passive switch
This feature typically is used for beverage applica-
tions during e.g. ’filler stopped’ conditions. When the "Flow Stop" - Function
hold-input goes to ’0’ the concentration values are For applications with the PC software Davis 5 an ad-
updated again after a certain delay time. The delay ditional digital input "flow stop" is set up . If this input
time can be changed only via Davis 5 (for more in- shows "1", the measurement values will be marked
formation see Chapter 19.3). in Davis 5 so that they are not used for statistical cal-
culations. If the production is stopped (i.e. no flow in
mPDS 5: Transducer board
+ DC 24 V I/O board the main pipe), this input must be set to "1". A flow
DIO+
monitor is available by Anton Paar for this purpose.
T 3.15 A (max)
DIO1
DIO2 NOTICE
…
…
The L-Dens 7000 and L-Com 5500 allow you to
… connect a Flow Monitor directly to the sensor
board. The "Flowstop" information is then trans-
ferred via CANOpen bus to the mPDS 5. Acti-
vate the 2 parameters "Use Flowstop" and "Use
…
Hold" in the parameters settings of the sensor.
DIO GND
- The corresponding channels are named "L-D
Flowstop" and "L-D Hold" ("L-D" stands for L-
Dens). In addition it is recommended to hide the
Fig. 92: Digital Input/Hold input circuit diagram (DIO1)
for active signals with extra supply of DIO+ / DIO 2 channels "Hold" and "Flowstop" via channel
GND settings of the virtual product type "(global").
Keep in mind that there is only one electrical sig-
mPDS 5: Transducer board nal which reflects the flow state linked to two dif-
I/O board ferent features:
T 3.15A (max) - Hold feature (freeze measurement values)
DC 24 V
+
DIO 1 - Flowstop feature (mark measurement val-
ues as invalid for statistical purposes in
Davis 5)
Hold active Product selection inputs

You can connect a passive BCD product switch with
- DIO GND 2 decimals (99 products) or in the binary format (255
products) to mPDS 5 inputs . For this purpose
mPDS 5 must be properly set up before delivery.
Fig. 93: Digital Input/Hold input circuit diagram (DIO1) for
The inputs used for the product switch are specified
active signals without extra supply of DIO+ / DIO
GND
in the attached configuration sheets or you can look
up the pinning in the diagnosis window directly in
mPDS 5. Instead of passive switches you can use
active signals from a PLC between "DIO GND" and
the input ("DIO1"..."DIO12").
C48IB001EN-Y 113
18 Installation
+ DC 24 V
Bit 7(MSB) 6 1 0 (LSB)
mPDS 5: Transducer board mPDS 5: Transducer board
or I/O board T 3.15 A (max) I/O board
DIO+
… DIO+
DIO5
DIO6
DIO1
… DIO2
… …
… …
DIO11 …
DIO12
…
DIO GND
…
DIO GND
Fig. 95: Passive BCD product switch at "DIO5" ... -
"DIO12"
TIP: Passive switches use "DIO+" as the common Fig. 96: Counter input circuit diagram (DIO2)
terminal, "DIO GND" is not used. With mPDS 2000
V3 it was the opposite. With mPDS 5, active signals "Start Davis 5 Calibration" - Function:
from a PLC must be connected to "DIO GND" and One of the digital inputs can be used to start a Davis
the required input ("DIO1" ... "DIO12"). 5 calibration via an external button or via the PLC.
Refer to the configurations sheets for the details.
Example: Product 27 in the BCD format
"Sensor Stop" Inputs:
tens digit "2" unit digit "7"
It is possible to stop certain sensors via a digital in-
0010 0111 put (or via PLC and fieldbus).
Counter inputs: In certain applications it is not possible to select

All DIO interfaces can also count slow binary sig- product '0' to stop all sensors, which is the preferred
nals. See configuration sheets to find out which DIO method. In such cases it is necessary to stop certain
is used as counter input. sensors (Oxy 510/5100, Carbo 510, L-Dens/L-Com
with ISP, etc. ) via an additional digital input in order
TIP: to prevent them from running dry. Refer to the con-
• These inputs count slow binary signals figuration sheets or look up the individual configura-
(< 300 Hz, minimum pulse length 0.5 ms). tion of your mPDS 5. Keep in mind that the ISP
(integrated sample pump) of the L-Dens 7400/7500
• All inputs have a common ground terminal. or L-Com 5500 can only be stopped simultaneously
• The input signal must be connected between with the density/sound velocity sensor. ISP and the
e.g. "DIO1"," DIO2",... and the "ground" termi- sensor itself are treated as one unit.
nals "DIO GND" ("0"=low: < 5 V; "1"=high: = 15
V). 18.3.12 PROFIBUS DP Interface
• It is possible to use a passive switch between (PROFIBUS Board Version 1)
"DIO+" and the required input.
Use a standard PROFIBUS cable to connect mPDS
5 PROFIBUS board to the PLC.Typically a shielded
2 core cable is used.Transfer rate 9.6 kbps to 12
Mbps.
TIP: The following components are recommended
for the connection to the PROFIBUS:
PROFIBUS DP 90° connector 12Mbit (cat.no.
18689).
114 C48IB001EN-Y
18 Installation
Fig. 97: PROFIBUS connector
Table 21: Operating modes of the PROFIBUS board
LED (green) Description
On mPDS 5 PROFIBUS board is exchanging data with the connected PLC (Data-
Exchange-Mode)
Off mPDS 5 PROFIBUS board does not exchange data with the connected PLC (no
Data-Exchange-Mode). Baud-Search is active. Most likely no or faulty connection
to PLC, A/B wires interchanged? PLC switched off?
blinking (1.4 Hz) mPDS 5 PROFIBUS board does not exchange data with the connected PLC (no
Data-Exchange-Mode). Baud-Search was successful.
Possible reasons: wrong PROFIBUS address or PROFIBUS connection inter-
rupted.
blinking (ca. 10 Hz) mPDS 5 PROFIBUS board does not exchange data with the connected PLC (no
Data-Exchange-Mode). Baud-Search was successful.
Possible reasons: Input or output data block sizes do not match.
18.3.13 PROFIBUS DP Interface (PROFI-

BUS board
Version 2, Mat.No. 97350)
If you have an mPDS 5 PROFIBUS board Version 2
there is no LED in the front panel. Connect the PRO-
FIBUS board using a standard cable to the PLC.
Typically, a shielded two-wire cable is used.
Transfer speed: 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps. For further de-
tails, e.g. pin assignment, see the technical data
(Chapter 22.5). Fig. 98: RJ 45 Industrial Plug
TIP: Recommended connections for PROFIBUS,

see Fig. 97. 18.3.15 EtherNet/IP Interface
(EtherNet/IP Board, Mat.No. 97353)
18.3.14 PROFINET IO Interface
Connect the EtherNet/IP board with the PLC by a
(PROFINET IO Board, Mat.No. 97352) standard Ethernet cable (twisted pair). See techni-
cal data in Chapter 22.6.
Connect the PROFINET IO board with the PLC by a
standard Ethernet cable. For details on the Ethernet TIP: Recommended connections for EtherNet/IP
connection see Chapter 22.6. see plug in Fig. 98 (Mat.No. 96694)
TIP: Recommended connections for PROFINET IO

see plug in Fig. 98 (Mat.No. 96694). 18.3.16 Modbus TCP Interface
(Modbus TCP Board, Mat.No. 97354)
Connect the Modbus TCP board with the PLC by a
C48IB001EN-Y 115
18 Installation
standard Ethernet cable (twisted pair). See techni-

cal data in Chapter 22.6.
TIP: Recommended connections for Modbus TCP
see plug in Fig. 98 (Mat.No. 96694).
Carbo Wire
18.3.17 DeviceNet Interface Number
(DeviceNet Board, Mat.No. 97349) 36
Connect the DeviceNet board to the PLC using a ca-

ble which meets the CAN specifications. See tech-
nical data in Chapter 22.7 for more details about the
DeviceNet connection. The DeviceNet interface
must be provided with an external DC 24 V power 35 (Valves)
supply (V+ and V-).
5
3
You can use CAN cable Mat.No. 94268.

Plug configuration:
1 V-
2 CAN L
3 Shield
4 CAN H
5 V+
18.3.18 Installing a Carbo 2100/Inline/2100

MVE Fig. 99: Typical wiring of a Carbo Inline/2100/2100 MVE
The Carbo 2100/Inline and 2100 MVE CO2 sensors

are controlled via 2 digital outputs. Pressure and 18.3.19 Installation of an Inline Pump 5
temperature are read out via 2 analog inputs. mPDS
5 calculates the CO2 concentration from the gas Inline Pump 5 has to be installed in the CAN network
pressure and temperature. Additionally a digital in- as described in Chapter 18.3.4. mPDS 5 takes over
put is used to stop the Carbo (e.g. if it runs dry). control of Inline Pump 5. If you select product ’0’ In-
line Pump 5 is switched off, for all other products In-
In the configuration sheets it is specified which ana- line Pump 5 is running. Inline Pump 5 is treated like
log inputs and which digital outputs are used for a a sensor and must be configured for each product
specific Carbo. type.
A typical configuration is shown in Fig. 99. Some parameters of the pump can be modified via
mPDS 5 and you get error and status messages via
CAN bus.
TIP: The Inline Pump 5 is always delivered with ’Au-
tostart=1’. This means that the pump is running as
soon as it is supplied. This setting is required for ap-
plications without mPDS 5.
The parameter "Autostart" must be set to "0", as the
pump would run automatically in case of failure of
the CAN connection even without a product in the
line.
TIP: The Inline Pump 5 can also be stopped via a
116 C48IB001EN-Y
18 Installation
digital input of the mPDS 5. On using a fieldbus the

pump can be stopped via a bit in the output data
block by the fieldbus.
Such settings can be carried out before delivery or
by an authorized engineer after delivery.
18.3.20 Installing an L-Col 6100 Sensor

The L-Col 6100 Sensor requires the so called UV/
Vis board. This board has one RS485 Interface for
one L-Col 6100 Sensor. Only one UV/Vis board and
one L-Col 6100 can be connected to an mPDS 5.
Wire color (# Pin

Fig. 100: Wiring mPDS 5 and a sensor with the sensor
assignment
connection cable
DC 24 V Red (#1) The sensor comes with a connection cable and the
sensor side is equipped with a pre-wired industrial
GND Brown (#3) plug. Introduce the other end into the mPDS 5 hous-
RS485 A Yellow (#5) ing or switch cabinet, cut the cable according to your
needs and wire the D-Sub plug according to the
RS485 B Green (#9) above table and Fig. 100.
C48IB001EN-Y 117
19 Configuration
19 Configuration
The detailed configuration is listed in the configura- The folIowing picture shows the alarm configuration
tion sheets, that are attached to each mPDS 5 sup- of the product type "Beverages Diets".
plied by Anton Paar. Factory configurations are
mainly universal. For fine tuning according to your
requirements it is necessary to change some details
on site. Most likely some sensors have to be activat-
ed or deactivated according to your needs e.g. to
eliminate misleading error messages from non-ex-
isting sensors.
19.1 Alarm configuration

mPDS 5 offers a 2-step alarm function:
1) The basic alarm function changes the back-
ground color of the output fields. In addition you see
arrows beside the quantity names. See Chapter 8.3
for details on the basic alarm function.
Fig. 101: Selecting the physical alarm output
2) In addition it is possible to set up an additional Typically 2 alarms have been configured before de-
alarm function which uses digital or relay outputs livery. For the following example we describe the
("physical alarm"). settings of the ’Warning Output’. Highlight the first
In most configurations Lo/Hi alarm limits of the main line and tap <Edit> .
measuring quantities are assigned to a physical
warning output. LoLo/HiHi limits are assigned to a
physical alarm output.
TIP: It is not possible to recognize at the digital out-
put which quantity is out of specification. The alarm
output gets "high" as soon as one of the assigned
limits has been exceeded.
Tap <Menu> and select
"Setup > Product Type Settings > product type
selection > Alarm Configuration".
The alarm configuration depends on the product
type and the product line. Therefore, you have to se-
lect the line and the product type you want to
change.
You get a list of all current alarms. In addition you Fig. 102: Step1 - Master Data
see which digital ouput is used by the alarms. This
menu allows you to modify existing alarms or add Enter a name and select the alarm output to be
new alarms according to your requirements. used. Tap <Next> to proceed.
TIP: Changes to alarms become active after a

product changeover.
118 C48IB001EN-Y
19 Configuration
Fig. 103: Step 2 - Time settings Fig. 104: Step 3 - Alarm conditions
Each physical alarm can be set up with several pa- This window is used to define the limits you want to
rameters: monitor. If you don’t check at least one limit for a line
this line is deleted automatically. You can add new
Delay Time: This time defines how long the alarm
quantities at the end of the list.
conditions must be maintained until the alarm output
gets ’High’. If you enter e.g. '10', the alarm limit must
be exceeded for at least 10 seconds to get an alarm
at the digital alarm output. Output fields in the main
19.2 Configuration of analog outputs
window, however, show alarm conditions lasting
Tap <Menu> and select
only for a second by changing the background color.
Reset Time: If you use an active alarm e.g. for stop-
selection > Analog Output Configuration"
ping a filler, then it is necessary to reset(=deacti-
vate) such an alarm for a certain time. For each The configuration of analog outputs depends on the
active alarm you get a message window field with a product type and the line. Therefore you have to se-
'Reset' button. If you tap on this button the physical lect the line (if more than one line is installed) and
alarm is deactivated for a period defined by 'Reset product type before you proceed.
Time'. The remaining reset time is indicated in this
message list. As soon as all monitored measure-
ment values lie between "Lo" and "Hi" the physical
alarm function is activated again.
Reset Time after Product Changeover: This time
defines how long the physical alarm is deactivated
after a product changeover. After a product change-
over it may take some seconds/minutes to reach the
target concentrations (e.g. due to residual water
from rinsing the line). In order to avoid immediate
alarms, this parameter can be set according to your
needs. As soon as all monitored measurement val-
ues lie between "Lo" and "Hi" the physical alarm
function is activated again.
Fig. 105: Overview of available logical outputs

You see a list of available "logical" analog outputs
with currently assigned quantities/units and scaling.
TIP: Changes are active after the next product
changeover. The analog output settings are set for
each product type independently. If you use several
product types make sure that the same quantities
C48IB001EN-Y 119
19 Configuration
are assigned to the same outputs with identical scal- The Sensor and I/O Management is line-specific.
ing. If the same analog output is used for different Therefore you have to select the line (if more than
quantities with different scalings make sure that the one line is installed) before you proceed.
PLC is able to handle these different settings.
With this menu you can set all editable parameters
Highlight e.g. the first line (AO 1) and tap <Edit>. of all physical sensors and you activate or deacti-
vate sensors.
Physical alarms, digital outputs for special purpos-
es, transmitters at analog inputs, etc. can be config-
ured.
TIP: On delivery mPDS 5 is often configured for a
larger number of (optional) sensors. Only activate
those sensors you really have installed.
Table 22: List of possible sensors
Sensor Notice
Alarm trans-
mitter
Analog input
Fig. 106: Configuration of AO1 for "Concentration Diet"
Analog out-
You can select the measuring quantity for this output
put and enter the scaling. In addition, it is possible -
for certain applications - to assign the target value to Carbo 510 CAN Smart Sensor
the analog output. Use the field "Content" and select
"Target Value". Carbo 520 CAN Smart Sensor. The Cobrix
Optical / 2600 equals an Carbo 520 Opti-
Example: 2 analog outputs - one used for the mea- Cobrix 2600 cal with an additional "channel"
sured value and the other one used for the target for sugar concentration in °Brix.
value - can be connected to the analog inputs of a
controller to meet the requirements of certain appli- Carbo 2100/ Connected by digital in-/outputs
cations. Design a control system without an addi- Inline/2100 and analog inputs
tional PLC. MVE
TIP: The accuracy of the analog interface is limited Counter

(mPDS 5: 0,1%), therefore enter a realistic and input
small range. It is not possible to set the format of the
mPDS 5 analog ouptut to 0-20 mA. But it is easily Digital input
possible to change the scaling to match a 0-20 mA Digital output
input. E.g. a 4-20 mA output scaled 0...100 corre-
sponds to a 0-20 mA input scaled -25 .... 100! DMA PTE 2 Electronics
DMA HPM PTE 3 Electronics

19.3 Sensor and I/O Management DMA HPM PTE 5 Electronics
PTE5
NOTICE DPR PTE 2 Electronics
The new Anton Paar Process Instruments
(Carbo 510, L-Dens 4X7 etc.) are called "Sen- DPRn/L- PTE 3 Electronics
sors". Whereas, for older instruments the term Dens
"Transducer" is used. Please mind that the terms
DPRn/L- PTE 5 Electronics
"transducer" and "sensor" identify the same.
Dens PTE5
Tap <Menu> and select "Setup > Sensor and I/O DSRn PTE 3 Electronics
Management".
DSRn PTE5 PTE 5 Electronics
120 C48IB001EN-Y
19 Configuration
Table 22: List of possible sensors
Error relay
Flowstop to mark measurement values in

Davis 5 as invalid for statistics
"Hold" input to freeze measurement values

optionally
Inline Pump CAN Smart Sensor
L-Dens L-Dens 7000
L-Rix CAN Smart Sensor
L-Vis 510 / CAN Smart Sensor

520 Ex
Fig. 107: Physical sensors (DSRn, Counter, transmitters
Oxy 510/ CAN Smart Sensor at analog interfaces etc.)
5100 TIP: Changes take effect immediately.
Product By digital inputs Highlight a line and tap <Edit>. All editable parame-
switch BCD ters of this sensor appear on the screen. If a sensor
has no editable parameters it is only possible to ac-
Product By digital inputs
tivate or deactivate it. E.g. a DSRn sensor with
switch binary
PTE5 has no editable parameter therefore the but-
Relay output ton <Edit> has a grey background and cannot be
used. Typically one smart sensor can be used for
SPR PTE 2 Electronics each line, except for the following Product Types:
SPRn PTE 3 Electronics "Oxy 510/5100 Multisensor":
SPRn PTE5 PTE 5 Electronics Stand-alone oxygen measurement with up to
8# Oxy 510/5100 sensors in total:
SPRn 2S PTE 3 Electronics
PTE3 1-Line Configuration: 4# Oxy 510/5100 for Line 1
2-Line Configuration: 4# Oxy 510/5100 for Line 1
SPRn 2S PTE 5 Electronics and
PTE5 4# Oxy 510/5100 for Line 2
SPRn 2T PTE 3 Electronics
SPRn 2T PTE 5 Electronics Product types for beverages: (E.g. "Beverages

PTE5 Sugar", "Beverages Diets", ...)
Oxygen measurement with up to 4# Oxy 510/5100
L-Sonic CAN Sensor
sensors in total:
L-Com CAN Sensor 1-Line Configuration: 2# Oxy 510/5100 for Line 1
L-Col Sensor to be connected to UV/ 2-Line Configuration: 2# Oxy 510/5100 for Line 1
Vis board only. Communication and
via internal CAN bus. There are 2# Oxy 510/5100 for Line 2
several versions of this sensor
available with 1 … 3 different
wavelengths "Carbo Multisensor"
Stand-alone CO2 measurement with up to
4# Carbo 520 sensors in total:
1-Line Configuration: 4# Carbo 520 for Line 1
2-Line Configuration: 2# Carbo 520 for Line 1 and
2# Carbo 520 for Line 2
C48IB001EN-Y 121
19 Configuration
"L-Rix Multisensor"
Stand-alone refractive index measurement with up
to 4# L-Rix sensors in total:
1-Line Configuration: 4# L-Rix for Line 1
2-Line Configuration: 2# L-Rix for Line 1 and
2# L-Rix for Line 2
"Beer Ferment. Ri"

Beer fermentation with up to 4# L-Rix sensors in to-
tal (installed in 4 different tanks):
1-Line Configuration: 4# L-Rix for Line 1
2-Line Configuration: 2# L-Rix for Line 1 and
2# L-Rix for Line 2
Fig. 109: Settings for the Hold Input: Changing the
Examples: reverse logic
a) Transmitter at an analog Input

CO2 , color, conductivity, pressure transmitter, etc.
Fig. 110: Additional settings for "Hold"

The behaviour of the "Hold" function can be
changed using 2 additional parameters.
Fig. 108: Settings for an analog input
Go to menu "Setup - Line Configuration" :
The scaling of the analog input matching the select-
ed quantity and unit must be entered. In addition you You can set the "Freeze-off-delay" . If you set it to
can select the format: e.g. 30 seconds the measurement values are frozen
for another 30 seconds after hold was going 'off'
Format=0 ... "0-20 mA"
The setting "Ignore Hold=on at product change
Format=1 ... "4-20 mA" over" is used to ignore a hold signal which was ac-
tive during product changes.
b) Hold Input
If this option is checked the hold signal must go 'off'
The "Hold" input is used to freeze measurement val- at least once in order to activate the "hold" function.
ues.
Freezing measurement values from the start doesn't
During production stops the digital input used as make sense because due to process conditions
"Hold" input must get "High" to freeze the concentra- there hardly ever are correct and stable measure-
tion values. In some cases only an inverse "Hold" ment values from the first second.
signal is available which is "low" during production
stops and "high" during normal production. In these In beverage applications there typically is water in
cases check the box as in Fig. 109. the line from the last flushing of the line after CIP
which has an impact on the measurement values.
122 C48IB001EN-Y
19 Configuration
c) Carbo 510 Smart Sensor
Fig. 113: "All Brand" adjustment values
Fig. 111: Editable parameters of Carbo 510 smart sensor Example: when replacing an old transducer/sensor
it is possible to adapt the raw values of the new
transducer/sensor to the raw values of the old sen-
sor. This method should only be applied by very ex-
perienced users, because the transducer
adjustment can be completely changed with un-
wanted impact on the final concentration results.
There is a special filter for PTE 3/5 transducers:
To avoid CRC errors typically caused by poor elec-
trical installations at customer’s, there is a new filter
for compensation called “Error Delay Time”. It is set
to “5” by default (Allowed range 0 … 30 sec). This
new parameter is available for all PTE3 and PTE5
transducers such as SPRn, “DSRn” or “DPRn”. If
this parameter is set to “0”, the new filter is inactive.
Graz, 25.09.2017
Fig. 112: Editable parameters of Carbo 510 smart sensor

TIP: Unlike older Carbo Sensors (Carbo 2100/In- Factory Adjustment Protocol
line/2100 MVE) Carbo 510 requires a "rinsing time" Type:
Material:
L-Dens 7500 HAS
Hastelloy C276
and not a "cycle time". Cycle time is calculated from Serial Number: 82364816
measuring time + rinsing time.

Valid range:
Temperature: 0 to 30 °C
d) DPRn (PTE3 electronics) sensor Measurement of water and air

No Temp. L-Dens L-Dens Ref.
If you connect e.g. a DPRn sensor with PTE 3 elec- # °C

period
us
density
kg/m^3
density
kg/m^3
tronics you have to enter the sensor constants via 1 30,08 1494,972 995,62 995,62
2 24,90 1494,246 997,07 997,07
this menu. You need the data sheet of your sensor. 3 19,71 1493,463 998,26 998,26
All transducer constants of the DPRn, which are list-

4 14,49 1492,610 999,18 999,17
5 9,28 1491,688 999,76 999,76
ed in the mPDS 5 must be entered. 6

air
4,13
25,53
1490,692
1229,730
999,97
1,14
999,97
1,14
TIP: Note that constant 'DM' (resp. 'SM' as well) are Sensor Constants
not required when using mPDS 5. Density Constants Temperature Constants
DA = 1,391158E-03 Temp_CH0
There is a possibility of entering global (all brand) DB = 2,087949E+03 CH0_R0 = 1000,122
adjustment constants for density/sound velocity and

DA1 = -2,7060E-04 CH0_A = 3,91184E-03
DA2 = -9,9313E-08 CH0_B = -5,77325E-07
temperature: Density Gain/Offset, Sound Velocity DB1 = 0,0000E+00 Temp_CH1

CH1_R0 = 999,670
Gain/Offset, Temperature Gain/Offset. CH1_A

CH1_B
= 3,90750E-03
= -5,13518E-07
Fig. 114: Example of an L-Dens data sheet
C48IB001EN-Y 123
19 Configuration
e) Alarm transmitter • PTE 5 electronics: e.g. implemented in DPRn,

SPRn, DSRn, labeled with "intelligence
Alarm transmitters can be activated or deactivated
included" on the instrument
and the logic of the output can be changed. All other
settings related to alarms are described in Chapter During operation the transducer type is checked ev-
19.1. ery 3 seconds by the mPDS 5. If it changes, mPDS
5 behaves as follows:
f) Carbo 2100 MVE
The solubility of the foreign gas must be set with the
Carbo 2100 MVE: Previous New Behavior/
Parameter "N2-Air-O2": Transducer Transducer Necessary
0 ... N2 (nitrogen) ; 1 ... Air ; 2 ... O2 (oxygen) Type Type Settings
PTE 3 PTE 5 Transducer con-
g) Counter inputs stants are autmat-
The counter inputs are used as bottle counter in par- ically loaded
ticular for beverage applications. The bottle count- PTE 5 PTE 3 Transducer con-
ers are recorded in Davis 5. stants (DA,DB, ...
depending on
transducer type)
are deleted. An
error "invalid
transducer
parameters
detected" will be
shown.
Enter transducer
constants accord-
ing to datasheet.
Use menu
"Setup > Sensor

and I/O Manage-
Fig. 115: Settings for the counter ment"
The weight is set on "1", i.e. a pulse at the input in- TIP: This automatic detection is only available if the
creases the counter by "1". original configuration was made for PTE 5.
Optionally you can reset the counter at the moment
of product change or at a particular time every day. i) L-Col 6100
The reset - time is given in minutes after midnight. If The sensor L-Col 6100 has to be connected to the
you set the counter as shown in Fig. 115, it will be UV/Vis board and each sensor comes with a speci-
reset 120 minutes (=2 hours) after midnight. fication sheet telling you the OPL value (Optical
Typical settings for a counter input used as bottle Path Length) and the integrated LEDs for the 1 … 3
counter: different wavelengths.
Weight=1 The Optical path length is needed for the calculation
Reset at product change=On of the color in EBC. The OPL typically lies between
Use Reset Time=Off 5 … 10 mm.
Go to menu "Setup > Sensor and I/O Management
h) Automatic PTE 3 / PTE 5 Selection " Select "L-Col 6100" and press <Edit>. Enter the
There are 2 types of electronics in our Density-, value for your sensor.
Sound Velocity- and combined Densitiy and Sound The Parameter "Sugar Comp. Option" is used to de-
Velocity Transducers: cide how the measurement values ICUMSA Color
• PTE 3 electronics: e.g. implemented in DPRn, and ICUMSA Color Turb.Comp. are calculated.
SPRn, DSRn
124 C48IB001EN-Y
19 Configuration
Sugar Comp.Option=0: Automatic selection ac- 19.4 Line Configuration

cording to following priority: L-Rix (highest) - Sugar-
AI - Sugar-Stored - L-Dens(Lowest)
Some measurement values can be automatically
Sugar Comp.Option=1 Sugar concentration from "frozen" when the product line stops. It is also pos-
L-Rix is used sible to delay the start of the measurement after the
line is started again. This eleminates fluctuating
Sugar Comp.Option=2 Sugar concentration from
measurement values at the re-start. The "freezing
analog input "Sugar-AI" is used
off" (i.e. the re-start) of the measurement can be de-
Sugar Comp.Option=3 Sugar concentration from layed, though. Tap on <menu> and select
product parameter is used
"Setup > Line Configuration"
Sugar Comp.Option=4 Sugar concentration from
The Freeze Off Delay in seconds (at a maximum of
L-Dens is used
3600 s) can be entered in this window.
j) L-Dens 7000/L-Com 5500/L-Sonic In this menu you can also adapt the behavior of the
"HOLD" - function. Also see Chapter 18.3.11 and
You find various parameters for different purposes.
Chapter 19.3.
The L-Com e.g. includes parameters for the L-Sonic
Sensor the L-Dens and the optional integrated sam-
ple pump and the optional pressure sensor. These
parameters are set correctly before shipment in the
19.5 Channel Settings
factory and normally shouldn't be changed.
The measurement values of each product within a
product type have special properties, e.g. they are
adjustable, limitable, freezable and/or visible. Aver-
age filters or spike filters can be set. These proper-
ties can be entered, modified and activated. Chose
"Setup > Product Type Settings > Product type
selection > Channel Settings"
19.5.1 Visible
Most product types offer a lot of channels, few of
them are relevant to be shown. With this option
channels that are not necessary to be displayed can
be blinded out. Mainly optional digital channels
should be blinded out with this function. Check or
Fig. 116: L-Com 5500 first page of the sensor settings
uncheck the channels in the first column of <Chan-
nel Settings>.
Fig. 117: L-Com 5500 "all brand" adjustment parameters

for density and sound velocity Fig. 118: Channel settings: visible
C48IB001EN-Y 125
19 Configuration
19.5.2 Adjustable, Limitable, Freezable NOTICE

Measurement values can be adjusted, frozen and/or When changing the column "Adjustable" or "Lim-
the limit controlled. itable" the entire database is searched for prod-
ucts of this product type.
Choose the product type and the window with the 3
columns "Limitable", "Adjustable", "Freezable" ap-
If a channel is changed from "Adjustable=yes" to
pears. By tapping on the relevant area you check or
"Adjustable=no", adjustment values of this channel
uncheck the different boxes (Fig. 119)
of all products of this product type are checked. If
there are any products with offsets or gain factors
different from default, you get a screen with a mes-
Limitable If a channel (measurement value) sage and 3 options:
is limitable, it is possible to enter e.g. "1 product with adjustments of channel ’Density
four limits (LoLo, Lo, Hi, HiHi) and at 20 °C’ found"
a target value in the menu "Prod- What should be done with these adjustments?
uct Settings". Alarm functions of
channels that are not limitable are <Reset> if you choose this option, offsets
deactivated! of ’Density at 20 °C are set to "0"
and gain factors are set to "1"
Adjustable If a channel (measurement value)
is adjustable, it appears in the <Cancel> you get back to the Edit screen,
"Laboratory Adjustment" and in where you select the product
the "Manual Adjustment" menus! type to be changed
Uncheck all channels which
should not be adjusted. <Leave Offsets and gain factors of ’Den-
unchanged> sity at 20 °C’ are not affected,
Freezable mPDS 5 has an optional digital in- but ’Density at 20 °C’ cannot be
put to "freeze" (hold) measure- adjusted. Existing adjustment
ment values (=channels) during can be changed by setting the
production stops (e.g. filter stops). "Adjustable" flag again and the
We recommend to freeze only the adjustments are set to default by
most important measurement val- "Reset adjustment".
ues (e.g. concentration, alcohol,
original extract, etc.) If a channel is changed from "Limitable=yes" to
"Limitable=no", the limit monitoring function of this
Do not freeze raw values such as channel of all products of this product type is deac-
density or temperature. tivated (Box "Active" is unchecked). Such a chan-
nel is not visible any more in the product settings.
This procedure may take some time!
19.5.3 Default Filters

From version 5.00 it is possible to change default fil-
ters. You can read, change and/or activate the de-
fault Average Filter and the default Spike Filter for all
availabe product types in the menu
selection > Channel Settings".
The table shown in Fig. 119 is continued to the right
for the Average Filter settings and the Spike Filter
settings. The filters are preset with typical values,
Fig. 119: Channel settings e.g. the product types "Beverages Diets" and "Bev-
erages Diets/Col." have activated default settings
Tap on <OK> and the measurement values for the channel "Concentration Diet" shown in
checked are can be adjusted, frozen and/or limits Fig. 120.
can be entered.
126 C48IB001EN-Y
19 Configuration
Fig. 120: Channel Settings for Beverages Diets Fig. 121: Channel Settings "Use Offset"
The filter settings can be activated/deactivated by
checking/unchecking the relevant measurement 19.5.5 Settings of Global Channels (e.g.
quantity in the column "Average Filter Active" and/or
"Spike Filter Active". The size of the Spike Filters
Hold, Flowstop, Calibration DI)
and/or the Average Filters can also be changed.
There are some global channels available inde-
pendently from the selected product type. Some
NOTICE properties (Visibility, ...) of these channels can be
These settings are used as default settings for set as well.
all new products of this product type. They will
not be applied to existing products. Go to the end of the list of available product types
If the filter of an existing product should be and select the line "(global)".
changed, go to the menu "Product Settings" Press "Channel Settings" and you get the following
(see Chapter Fig. 8.5) and use the <Edit prod- screen.
uct> function.
19.5.4 "Use Offset"

From version 5.30 it is possible to select which ad-
justment parameter should be changed during the
laboratory adjustment procedure and in Davis 5. Be-
fore version 5.30 the automatic adjustment proce-
dures changed the "Gain factor". If the option "Use
Offset" is checked, the offset is changed during lab-
oratory adjustment or via Davis 5.
Check this box in case of quantities close to "0" e.g.
for the alcohol of alcohol free beer. The alcohol of
such a beer gets very close to ’0’ ,so it may happen,
that the value even falls below ’0’ and then an adjst-
ment with gain factor is not possible. Fig. 122: Global Channels-Settings
"Setup > Product Type Settings > product type The L-Dens 7400/7500 and L-Com 5500 allow you
selection > Channel Settings". to connect the Flow Monitor directly to the sensor
electronics. In such cases the signal is transferred
via CANOpen to the mPDS 5. The signal appears as
L-D Flowstop. L-D Hold always equals L-D Flow-
stop.
So the previous channels "Flowstop" and "Hold"
(derived from the digital inputs of an mPDS 5 plug-
C48IB001EN-Y 127
19 Configuration
in board or the PLC) shouldn't be visible any more. 19.6.2 Processing units
The channel 'calibration-DI' is only needed if some-
one wants to install an external calibration button to The processing unit defines in which unit the quan-
start a Davis 5 calibration. tities are processed by analog and bus interfaces.
Changing the processing unit affects the following
interfaces:·
19.6 Unit Settings
- Analog inputs
Unit settings can be carried out for 2 different areas: - Measuring quantities in the fieldbus input
Display and processing. The 2 areas are indepen- and output data blocks
dent of each other but it is recommended to use the - Parameters in the fieldbus input and output
same units for both areas. data blocks
TIP: Changing the display or processing unit takes
effect immediately.
19.6.1 Input Units (Display Units)
The input unit defines in which unit the user enters 19.6.3 Setting the Units
parameters or in which unit parameters/limits etc.
are displayed. Tap <Menu> and select "Setup > Unit Settings"
Changing the input unit affects the following menus:
- Product management: Alarm limits
- Product management: Product parameters
that have a unit
- Manual adjustment
- Laboratory adjustment
- Analog output configuration
TIP: Changing the input unit does not change the
output unit in which each single measuring quantity
is displayed in the output fields. The units for the
output field can be changed by tapping the output
field.
Fig. 123: Measuring quantities und units
Table 23: List of quantities and units
Name of the quan- Available units Anton Paar Notes

tity internal unit
(mostly SI)
(None) - -
Beer color EBC, SRM EBC
Calories-USA kcal/w kcal/w Kilocalories/12 oz (12 oz = ca. 340g)
Color AU, CU AU "AU" stands for absorbance units ;
"CU" stands for concentration units
CO2 g/l, vol., mg/L g/L
Color cu cu = color units
Conductivity mS, S mS
Density kg/m³, g/cm³, g/ml, lb/ kg/m³
gal, g/L (=kg/m³)
128 C48IB001EN-Y
19 Configuration
Table 23: List of quantities and units
Name of the quan- Available units Anton Paar Notes

tity internal unit
(mostly SI)
Diet Concentration %, ppm, % The values don’t change when the unit
ml NaOH, is changed!
g/l TA, H3PO4
Dyn.Viscosity mPa.s, Pa.s
Ns/m², P, cP, Pa.s
Electric Current A, mA A
Extract Concentra- °Plato, °Brix, °Balling, °Plato
tion TS ... total solids, %
ICUMSA-Units IU IU
Kin. Viscosity m²/s, St, cSt, mm²/s m²/s
Mass oz, lb, g, kg kg
Mass Concentra- g/cm³, kg/m³, g/l, g/ml, kg/m³
tion mg/l
Mass Concentra- %w/w, %m/m %w/w
tion Percent
Mass Concentra- %w/w/h %w/w/h
tion Percent Incre-
ment
Mass Flow Rate kg/s, kg/h, kg/min, lbs/ kg/s
min, lbs/h
Oxygen mg/l, ppm, ppb, l mg/l
Percent %, ppm %
Pressure Pa, mbar, bar, MPa, Pa
psi
Proof Proof Proof
Speed m/s, km/h m/s
Sugar Concentra- °Plato, °Brix, °Balling, °Brix
tion TS (total solids), %
Temperature °C, K, °F °C
Temperature-F °F °F
Time s, s, h s
Turbidity EBC, EBC
ASBC-FTU, HELMS,
FTU, NTU
Volume m³, mm³, l, cm³, m³
Volume Concentra- %v/v %v/v
tion Percent
Volume Flow Rate m³/h, l/s, l/min, m³/h,l/ m³/s
h, hl/h
In this dialog all measuring quantities with units are Example: CO2 can be assigned in the unit [Vol.] to
displayed. For some quantities the unit can be an analog output and alarm limits can also be en-
changed. Typically display unit and processing unit tered in [Vol.]. When creating user functions the out-
should be identical. put quantity with required unit must be selected. The
C48IB001EN-Y 129
19 Configuration
same mechanisms apply as for the standard prod- to change the logic of this output. The error relay is
uct types. line specific.
For this configuration use the menu
19.7 Configuration of External Error Setup > External Error Status
Status You set the flag for the desired category in the col-
umn "Enabled". Any change in this menu item will
This feature can be used to configure the error cat- be applied immediately.
egories that affect error relay and Fieldbus status
bytes of the mPDS 5.The activated categories apply
to both the relay and the fieldbus. Changes take ef-
fect immediately.
Critical
OK Warning
Error
Error
closed open open
Relay
Fieldbus
1 2 4
Status
TIP: The error relay closes when no error occurs

Fig. 124: External Error Status
and mPDS 5 is in operation. It opens when errors
are active or electrical power is off. There is no way The following error categories are available:
Table 24: Error categories
Automatic
Category Description Context* Default**
update***
Limits a limit of a data channel is exceeded Line

(e.g.Low limit exceeded -> Warning -> Fieldbus
Status=2 and Error Relay=open)
Alarm an alarm (digital/relay output) is active Line

(e.g. Lo/Hi limits of concentration are assigned
to digital output 2 of module in slot 2 and one of
the limits is
exceeded …)
CAN Net- - a board (e.g. Transducer board, PROFIBUS Global x x

work board) was disconnected
(internal … - a board is in bootloader mode
boards and - PROFIBUS board Version 1 and a fieldbus
external … module plugged in simultaneously
CAN Smart - a fieldbus board is plugged in when using an
Sensors) old CANopen configuration (3.00 or lower)
Formulas calculation errors mostly regarding invalid Line x

errors
e.g. Concentration result from product type
'Liquids 2-Comp 1" is below '0'
130 C48IB001EN-Y
19 Configuration
Automatic
update***
System Error new firmware for a module (board) found Global x

incompatible firmware versions
no update directory found for a module (board)
Configura- - the system was not configured correctly Line x

tion - no physical transducer assigned to a logical
transducer, which is NOT optional (logical L-
Com was not connected to a physical L-Com)
- inactive physical transducer assigned to a
logical transducer, which is not optional
- no port assigned to a physical transducer
(PTE port not assigned to physical DSRn
transducer)
Service maintenance of a sensor is required (e.g. Line

Carbo 2100/Inline/2100 MVE)
Processing - all errors regarding current data Line or x x

- current below 4 mA of an analog input when Global
scaling is set to 4 ... 20 mA
- current is above 20 mA of an analog output
- product change over via fieldbus or touch
screen is not allowed because at least one
module (board) is in an invalid state
- invalid product number selected via fieldbus
or external product selector
- invalid or inactive product type specified when
creating product via fieldbus
- maximum number of products (=999) reached
before creating a new product via fieldbus
- fieldbus not communicating or
in an invalid state (PROFIBUS board Version1)
- wrong fieldbus protocol
- smart sensor is stopped by digital input
- Carbo 2100/Inline/2100 MVE errors
- PTE transducer drop out
- Transducer with wrong PTE electronics con-
nected
- CRC error on PTE electronics of transducer
- Invalid values from transducer with PTE elec-
tronics
- PTE 3 transducer has invalid parameters
(only when using PTE 5 transducer and auto-
matic protocol detection)
Audit Trail audit trail memory is nearly full Global x
Smart Sen- NAMUR status Failure Line x x

sor Failure
Smart Sen- NAMUR status Function Check Line x

sor Function
Check
C48IB001EN-Y 131
19 Configuration
Automatic
update***
Smart Sen- NAMUR status Out Of Specification Line x

sor Out Of
Specification
Smart Sen- NAMUR status Maintenance Line x

sor Mainte-
nance
Smart Sen- NAMUR status Invalid Values Line x

sor Invalid
Values
*) global: mPDS specific error 19.8 Configuration of Measurement

line: line specific error
**) Default settings when ordering a new mPDS 5 Values for the Input Data Block (Field-
from version 5.10
***) These categories are enabled after a system
bus)
update for versions before 5.1
Depending on the basic configuration several mea-
The error relay always signals the status of the de- surement values can the transferred via input data
vice. That means if a global error like a CAN error block to an PLC by fieldbus. In most configurations
exists, the error relay will be affected. There is no a block size of 128 byte is set ( for both in input data
way to distinguish between critical errors and warn- block and the output datablock). Then the mPDS
ings using the error relay. can transfer 26 different measurement values (pa-
rameters) to the PLC.
All measurement quanities that can be assigned to
graphical or numerical output fields, can also be as-
signed to the input data block (details see Chapter
20.6.6).
132 C48IB001EN-Y
20 Fieldbus communication with a PLC

(PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET IO, Ethernet/IP, Modbus TCP, DeviceNet)
TIP: In order to understand the following chapter, you need the individual data sheets section "Fieldbus
Configuration" valid for your mPDS 5.
Fig. 125: Configuration of fieldbus
C48IB001EN-Y 133
1. Tap <Menu> and select e.g. "Setup > PROFI- includes the required GSD-/EDS/GSDML files.
BUS Settings". According to the fieldbus board When integrating the mPDS 5 into the fieldbus
you will get a menu point "PROFIBUS Settings", network (e.g. PROFIBUS with the software
"PROFINET Settings", "Ethernet/IP Settings", "Simatic Manager") you must select one input
"Modbus TCP Settings", "DeviceNet Settings". module and one output module as specified on
the configuration sheets.
2. Enter e.g. the "Node Id" and tap <OK>.
• Carry out all settings required for the installed
3. Check or uncheck "Product Type Change" or
fieldbus ("Node ID" = address, "Subnet-
"Product Creation" flag (details see Chapter
mask",...). Details regarding the different field-
20.10)
buses are described in the following chapters.
4. Check or uncheck the "Readonly Mode" flag. If
you check this flag, it is not possible to change Functions available via fieldbus
parameters via fieldbus (alarm limits, .....)
• Product selection
5. Check the "enabled" flag to use the fieldbus. Note: Product selection may take up to 30 sec-
onds
TIP: You can install a fieldbus configuration even if
the fieldbus is not connected (this does not apply • Reading all measurement values
with DeviceNet). Uncheck "enabled" and the mPDS
• Modification of product parameters, alarms, etc.
5 behaves as if there was no fieldbus board. Then
you can use mPDS 5 or Davis 5 for product selec- • Firmware error/PROFIBUS board status infor-
tion. mation
TIP: The "IP Address" of the PROFINET IO board • Simulation of analog measurement values and
will be set automatically by the network master. digital inputs
TIP: If you do not get the menu e.g. PROFIBUS set- TIP: Whenever the fieldbus interface is active the
tings then either the PROFIBUS board is missing or product selection has to be done via PLC.
the configuration is incorrect. See attached configu- Note the Byte order for fieldbuses:
ration sheets to check the details.
PROFIBUS, PROFINET IO and MODBUS TCP:
• Each mPDS 5 with PROFIBUS board is deliv- "big endian" (=Float swapped)
ered with configuration sheets. They specify the EtherNet/IP: "little endian" (default)
configuration of the input and output data blocks
Data type "Float (swapped)"
required for the cyclical data exchange between
the mPDS 5 and the PLC via a fieldbus. Make The data are stored at two consecutive addresses,
sure that the block sizes configured in your PLC whereby the first address contains the most signifi-
match the settings of the mPDS 5. By default cant word (2 bytes) and the second address con-
both blocks are 128 Bytes long. tains the least significant word (2 bytes).
• The USB flash drive supplied with each mPDS 5
Address A Address A+1
Transmitted first last
Default Byte 2 Byte 1 (LSB) Byte 4 (MSB) Byte 3
Float (swapped) Byte 4 (MSB) Byte 3 Byte 2 Byte 1 (LSB)
The communication between mPDS 5 and PLC via read and defined. The name of the blocks and the
fieldbus is based on the same principle. There are reading and writing methods differ according to the
two data blocks, the output datablock which can fieldbus. The data and functions are the same for all
only be read and the input datablock which can be fieldbusses.
134 C48IB001EN-Y
20.1 PROFIBUS DP Node ID It corresponds with the fieldbus

address.
20.1.1 System requirements Baudrate Set the Baudrate according to
the network.
System requirements:
Readonly If the PLC must not be able to
with PROFIBUS DP board (Mat.No. Mode change parameters, check this
mPDS 5: 23965 = Version 1 or Mat.No. box.
97350 = Version 2) Product Type Chapter 20.10
PROFIBUS-DP input according to Change
EN 50170-2, IEC 61158 Product Chapter 20.10
PLC: 64-224 bytes input memory/ 64 - Creation
224 bytes output memory e.g. PLC
S7-300) Enabled Check this box to activate the
fieldbus. If "enabled" is
The difference of the two PROFIBUS boards: unchecked, fieldbus is inactive
Version 1: one LED in the front panel and it is possible to change the
product via mPDS 5 touch
Version 2: no LED in the front panel screen or Davis 5.
20.1.2 Network setting on the mPDS 20.1.3 : Integration of the mPDS 5 into the
Version 1 (with one LED in the front panel): PROFIBUS network - GSD - file
Choose the menu "Setup > PORFIBUS Settings"
for your address. With this PROFIBUS board you Profibus board Ver- AP_0AD3.GSD
can only set the address (Node ID). Due to internal sion 1
plausibility checks it can last up to 1 minute until the
address is active. Profibus board Ver- PAAR0D31.GSD
sion 2
Version 2 (Mat. No. 97350, no LED in the front pan- (Mat.No.97350)
el)
Choose the menu "Setup > PROFIBUS settings"
for all your settings. 20.1.4 Installation of the PROFIBUS Board
in a PROFIBUS Network (Siemens Simatic
S7-300)
TIP:
• This example does not claim to address all the
issues involved. To completely understand the
information, comprehensive knowledge of the
used hardware and software and the tools on
the PC is required. This knowledge cannot be
imparted within the framework of this instruction
manual.
• In order to exchange information with the PLC
(= PROFIBUS master) an input- and an output
datablock are necessary.
Fig. 126: PROFIBUS settings (version 2, Mat.No. 97350) • Terminology: Input means input to the PLC and
output of mPDS 5 and vice versa.
C48IB001EN-Y 135
TIP: Every PROFIBUS hardware and software is 20.2 PROFINET IO

different. The information and instructions given
here therefore need to be adapted to the different
system configurations. 20.2.1 System requirements
The software used in the example is "SIMATIC
STEP 7 Version 5.4, Siemens for project develop- mPDS 5: with PROFINET IO board (Mat.No.
ment". 97352)
1. Use „Extras > Install new GSD file...“ to add PLC: with PROFINET I/O input
mPDS 5 from the supplied USB flash drive to
the list in the right hand view. The name of the
GSD file is „AP_0AD3.GSD“ (Version 1) or 20.2.2 Network settings on the mPDS 5
"PAAROD31.GSD" (Version 2). After this instal-
lation the following item will appear: "Profibus- The network settings of the PROFINET IO come di-
DP“ > "Additional field instruments“ > "General“ rectly from the network. No address settings are
> "Anton Paar“ > with the module necessary on the mPDS 5.
"mPDS 5_Profibus_Module". Drag the icon Contrary to the PROFIBUS the address of each par-
"mPDS 5_Profibus_Module" to the PROFIBUS ticipant of the network is provided by the MAC-ad-
DP rail and define the PROFIBUS address. dress of each participant device and a logical IP-
2. If you open the submenu attached to address explicitly related to this physical address.
mPDS 5_Profibus_Module you must see sev- The IP-addresses are assigned via DHCP (Dynamic
eral input modules and several output modules. Host Configuration Protocol), a similar mechanism
Drag the required input module to slot 1 in the or via the protocol DCP (Discovery Configuration
lower left hand view.(e.g. "IN128 Protocol) specific for PROFINET IO.
mPDS 5>PLC")
3. Drag the required output module to the first free
slot in the lower left hand view.(e.g. "OUT128
PLC>mPDS 5“). This choice must match the
settings on mPDS 5 otherwise proper communi-
cation via PROFIBUS is not possible. See con-
figuration sheets of mPDS 5.
TIP: Use exactly one input module and one output
module to be able to use mPDS 5 in PROFIBUS
network. Do not use the "Universal module"!
There are two versions of the PROFIBUS board: Fig. 127: PROFINET Settings Readonly Mode
Version 1 has been delivered with the mPDS 5 ini-
tially. It must be used with the certified GSD-file Device It is possible to view and enter the
"AP_0AD3.GSD". name device name of the mPDS 5 used
within the PROFINET IO network.
Version 2 must be used with the certified GSD-file If several mPDS 5 units are con-
"PAAR0D31.GSD". nected to the same PROFINET IO,
it is required that all instruments get
a unique name.
Readonly If the PLC must not be able to

Mode change parameters, check this
box.
Product Chapter 20.10

Type
Change
Product Chapter 20.10

Creation
136 C48IB001EN-Y
Enabled Check this box to activate the field-

bus. If "enabled" is unchecked,
fieldbus is inactive and it is possible
to change the product via mPDS 5
touch screen of Davis 5.
20.2.3 Integration of the mPDS 5 into the

PROFINET IO Network - GSDML - file
PROFINET IO The current GSDML file is

board on the USB stick deliv-
(Mat.No. 97352) ered with each mPDS 5.
Fig. 129: Ethernet/IP Network settings step 2
20.3 EtherNet/IP DHCP If you activate DHCP, all other

spaces in the template are
invalid as the network address
20.3.1 System requirements is assigned automatically.
IP Address The address must be provided

mPDS 5: with EtherNet/IP board
by the network administrator
(Mat.No. 97353)
and it must be unique.
PLC: with EtherNet/IP input
Subnet Mask "255.255.255.0" or defined
otherwise
20.3.2 Network settings on the mPDS 5 Gateway The network administrator pro-
vides this setting.
Tap on <menu> and choose "Setup > EtherNet/IP
Settings" for your settings . Readonly If the PLC can’t change param-
Mode eters, check this box.
If you activate the DHCP Server, a valid address is
assigned to the mPDS 5 automatically. The figures Product Type Chapter 20.10
in "IP Address", "Subnet Mask" and "Gateway" are Change
not valid.
Product Cre- Chapter 20.10
ation
Enabled Check this box to activate the

unchecked, fieldbus is inactive
and it is possible to change the
product via mPDS 5 touch
screen of Davis

EtherNet/IP network
EtherNet/IP board For details of the integra-

(Mat.No. 97353) tion see literature and
Fig. 128: Ethernet/IP Network settings step 1
documentation of your
PLC.
C48IB001EN-Y 137
20.4 Modbus TCP IP Address The address must be pro-

vided by the network admin-
istrator and it must be
20.4.1 System requirements unique.
Subnet Mask "255.255.255.0" or defined

mPDS 5: with Modbus TCP board otherwise
(Mat.No. 97354)
Gateway The network administrator
PLC: with Modbus TCP input provides this setting
Readonly Mode If the PLC must not be able

20.4.2 Network settings on the mPDS 5 to change parameters, check
this box.
Tap on <menu> and choose "Settings > Modbus
TCP Settings" for your settings. Product Type Chapter 20.10
Change
Product Cre- Chapter 20.10

ation
Enabled Check this box to activate the

unchecked, fieldbus is inac-
tive and it is possible to
change the product via
mPDS 5 touch screen of
Davis 5.

Modbus TCP network
Modbus TCP Network settings (page 1)
Input register The "Input register" corre-
sponds to the input datablock
of the mPDS 5. This block
can only be read.
Holding register The "Holding register" corre-

sponds with the output data-
block of the mPDS 5. This
block can be read and
changed.
Port Some support programs‘ set-

ting is e.g. "502" (e.g. Mod-
Scan or ModbusReader...).
Addresses, Modbus TCP has only 2 byte

MSB, LSB (=Word) addresses. Note the
Fig. 130: Modbus TCP Network settings (page 2) sequence of the bytes. MSB
and LSB are specified in the
DHCP If you activate DHCP, all tables of the input- and the
other spaces in the template output datablock (see column
are invalid as the network "Address Modbus"!)
address is assigned automat-
ically.
138 C48IB001EN-Y
TIP: According to the standards for DeviceNet it

Supported com- The following "Function
must not be possible to deactivate the interface via
mands (Func- Codes" are supported.
software.
tion Codes): 0x03 Read Holding Register
0x04 Read Input Register
0x06 Write single Register Node ID Identification number of this
0x10 Write multiple Register node
0x16 Mask write Register Baudrate Set the bus speed
0x17 Read/Write mulitiple
Register Readonly If the PLC must not be able to
Mode change parameters, check this
TIP: box.
• Unlike other common fieldbuses (PROFI-
Product Type Chapter 20.10
BUS,....) adresses in the modbus point at 2
Change
bytes = 16 bits (="word").
• Coil / Register numbers of Input registers start Product Cre- Chapter 20.10
at 30001 and "Holding registers" start at 40001. ation
• Depending on the used software you have to

address input registers using "30001" - "39999" 20.5.3 Integration of the mPDS 5 into the
or "0000" - "27E" (resp. Holding registers using
"40001" - "49999" or "0000" - "27E"). Please
DeviceNet network
refer to instruction manual of the used software.
DeviceNet board For details of the integration
(Mat.No. 97349) see literature and docu-
20.5 DeviceNet mentation of your PLC.
20.5.1 System requirements 20.6 Input Datablock

mPDS 5: with DeviceNet board
(for all Fieldbuses)
(Mat.No. 97349)
The input data block is used to transfer information
PLC: with DeviceNet input from mPDS 5 to PLC! The size of the input data
block is defined during the first installation of mPDS
5 in the network. In the configuration sheets you can
20.5.2 Network settings on the mPDS 5 find details on the block sizes. The measurement
values which are contained in the input data block
Tap on <menu> and choose "Setup > DeviceNet are listed separately per product type. The mea-
Settings" for your settings. surement values are transferred in the units which
are defined in the menu "Service > Unit Settings"
("Processing Units")
TIP:The PDS 5 supports several product lines - the
data block is divided between the lines.
The first byte of the input data block is used as the
general mPDS 5 Status Byte. This byte is affected
by global errors such as CANopen errors.
You can check and change the measurement quan-
ities transferred (see Chapter 20.6.6)
Fig. 131: DeviceNet network settings
C48IB001EN-Y 139
20.6.1 General Setup of the Input Data Block

Table 25: Input data block setup
Address Address Description Type, No. Databits Field, Comment

(relative) absolute
0 Status mPDS 5 (see Notice Byte, 8

below)
0 ... Initialization
1 ... OK
2 ... Warning
4 ... Error
1 Not used Byte 8
2 1st Line-specific data block see Chapter 20.6.2
x 2nd Line-specific data block see Chapter 20.6.3
With some multi-line configurations, depending on

the input data block size and the number of lines, an NOTICE
interval of 2 bytes is positioned between the line- The Status mPDS 5 always refers to the status
specific data blocks. This is required for PROFIBUS of line 1 and line 2 and to the line-independent
in order to ensure a consistent transfer of 32 byte status. A line-independent error, for example,
blocks. would be "Node not connected" if an activated
Carbo 510 were removed from the CAN inter-
Table 26: Configurations with 2 byte intervals face. The mPDS 5 status always equals the
between the line-specific data blocks highest status value: If there is a Warning (status
2) or an Error (status 4) in one of the 3 statuses,
Input data block size 2 lines the higher value (status 4) will be indicated. If
96 2 Bytes line 1 and line 2 are OK (status 1) and the line-
independent status is Error (status 4), mPDS 5
128 2 Bytes status 4 will be indicated.
160 2 Bytes
192 2 Bytes NOTICE

224 2 Bytes (Known issue) Using EtherNet/IP please
note that the input datablock starts at relative
address 4 instead of 0. Therefore the 26th mea-
surement value can't be used and all input
addresses must be shifted by 4.
20.6.2 Setup of the Input Data Block for a

Single Line Configuration with an Input Data
Block of 128 Bytes
If the size of the input data block is changed, then
the number of transferrable measurement values
changes according to Chapter 20.6.4.
140 C48IB001EN-Y
Table 27: Input data block for a single line configuration
Address Address Address Type, No. data

Description Note
(relative) absolute Modbus bits
0 30001 Status mPDS 5 Byte, 8

(LSB) 0 ... Initialization
1 ... OK
2 ... Warning
4 ... Error
1 30001 not used Byte, 8

(MSB)
2 30002 Status of the production line (the Byte, 8

(LSB) status corresponds to the upper
right corner of the mPDS 5 main
menu)
1 ... OK
2 ... Warning (e.g. Lo limit has been
exceeded)
4 ... Alarm/error (see Configuration
Chapter 19.7 External Error Status)

(MSB)
4 30003 Product number (0 … 65535) Word, 16 binary

coded
6 30004 Product type number Word, 16 binary

coded
8 30005, Requested parameter 1 Real, 32

30006 MSB,..,LSB

30008 MSB,..,LSB

30010 MSB,..,LSB

30012 MSB,..,LSB
24 30013, Measurement value 1 Real, 32

30014 MSB,..,LSB

30016 MSB,..,LSB

30018 MSB,..,LSB
36 30019, ... Real, 32

30020 MSB,..,LSB
124 30063, Measurement value 26* Real, 32

30064 MSB,..,LSB
C48IB001EN-Y 141
*)
NOTICE
(Known issue) Using EtherNet/IP please
note that the input datablock starts at relative
address 4 instead of 0. Therefore the 26th mea-
surement value can't be used and all input
addresses must be shifted by 4.
20.6.3 Setup of the Input Data Block for a Two-line Configuration with an Input Data Block of
128 Bytes
If the size of the input data block is changed, then the number of transferrable measurement values changes
according to Chapter 20.6.4.
Table 28: Input data block for a two-line configuration

Description Note
0 30001 Status mPDS 5 Byte, 8

(LSB) 0 ... Initialization
1 ... OK
2 ... Warning
4 ... Error

(MSB)
2 30002 Status of production line 1 (the sta- Byte, 8

(LSB) tus corresponds to the upper right
corner of the mPDS 5 main menu)
1 ... OK
exceeded)
4 ... Alarm/error
(e.g. HiHi limit has been exceeded)

(MSB)
4 30003 Product number line 1 (0.. 65535) Word, 16 binary

coded
6 30004 Product type number line 1 Word, 16 binary

coded
8 30005, Requested parameter 1 line 1 Real, 32

30006 MSB,..,LSB

30008 MSB,..,LSB

30010 MSB,..,LSB

30012 MSB,..,LSB
142 C48IB001EN-Y

Description Note
24 30013, Measurement value 1 line 1 Real, 32

30014 MSB,..,LSB

30016 MSB,..,LSB

30018 MSB,..,LSB
36 30019, ... Real, 32

30020 MSB,..,LSB

30032 MSB,..,LSB
64 30033 Reserved Word, 16

(LSB)
66 30034 Status of production line 2 (the sta- Byte, 8

(LSB) tus corresponds to the upper right
corner of the mPDS 5 main menu)
1 ... OK
exceeded)
4 ... Alarm/error (e.g. HiHi limit has
been exceeded)

(MSB)
68 30035 Product number line 2 (0..65535) Word, 16 binary

(LSB) coded
70 30036 Product type number line 2 Word, 16 binary

coded

30038 MSB,..,LSB

30040 MSB,..,LSB

30042 MSB,..,LSB

30044 MSB,..,LSB

30046 MSB,..,LSB

30048 MSB,..,LSB

30050 MSB,..,LSB
C48IB001EN-Y 143

Description Note
100 30051, ... Real, 32

30052 MSB,..,LSB

30064 MSB,..,LSB
20.6.4 Number of Transferrable Measure- Table 30: Start addresses depending on block
size for 2-line systems
ment Values Depending on the Block Size (
64 - 224 Bytes) and Number of Lines 1 - 4 Input
First line Second line
specific block specific block
block
The table 29 below describes the number of trans- starts at relative starts at relative
size
ferrable measurement values dependent of the address address
block size and number of lines.
128 2 60
Table 29: Transferrable measurement values
depending on the input data block size 160 2 82
192 2 98
Input block size 1 line 2 lines
224 2 114
64 10 not possible
96 18 6 20.6.6 Configuration of Measurement Values

26 10
for the Input Data Block
128
160 34 14 NOTICE
Changing the input data block can have big
192 42 18 impact on the whole system, therefore only carry
out changes when product "0" is set. In any
224 50 22 case, the configuration must be compatible with
the program of the PLC.
20.6.5 Start Addresses Depending on Block Depending on the basic configuration several mea-
Size for 2-Line Systems surement values can the transferred via input data
block to a PLC by fieldbus. In most configurations a
Table 30: Start addresses depending on block block size of 128 byte is set (for both the input data
size for 2-line systems block and the output datablock). Then the mPDS
can transfer 26 different measurement values (vari-
First line Second line ables) to the PLC.
Input
specific block specific block All measurement quantities that can be assigned to
block
starts at relative starts at relative graphical or numerical output fields, can also be as-
size
address address signed to the input data block. The assignment can
be checked and changed.
64 2 32
96 2 50
144 C48IB001EN-Y
TIP: Do not write parameters continuously especial-

ly when the values have not changed. E.g. Send
alarm limits only if they have changed. Toggle <En-
ter> bytes only if really required. Sending too many
commands via fieldbus slows mPDS 5 down and
worst case can even block other functions such as
Davis 5 communication or updating measurement
values transferred via input data block to the PLC.
20.7 Output Data Block (for all Field-

buses)
The output data block is used to transfer information
from PLC to mPDS 5.
Fig. 132: Assignment of measurement quantities to the It is used, e.g. to set the product number, changes
input data block parameters, simulate digital inputs, etc....
In order to assign a certain measuring quantity to a The size of the output data block is defined for all
certain position of the input data block (typically 1 product types and all lines of an mPDS 5 during the
....... 26), tap the selection arrow at the end of a line. installation in the network. Measurement values
A table with all measurement quantities available from PLC must be transferred in the units which are
will be displayed. defined in the menu "Service unit setting" ("Process-
ing units").
TIP: mPDS 5 supports several production lines. The
output data block is divided among all the lines.
The size of the output data block is given on the con-
figuration sheets.
Writing parameters
After transferring parameters via the output data
block to mPDS 5 and sending the Enter command,
wait 2 seconds before sending further parameters.
During these 2 seconds the data block must not be
changed.
Writing "Offsets" or "Gain" factors is only possible if
Fig. 133: Measurement quantities available for a product
the corresponding channel is "adjustable".
type
Scroll down to the measuring quantity required, Reading parameters
mark it and tap on <OK>.
It is possible to read parameters from mPDS 5. To
TIP: Take into consideration that this configuration do this, the PLC must tell the mPDS 5 via the output
depends on the product type. Configure the input data block which parameters (index and type)
data block for all product types used. It is recom- should be read out. Each new request must be com-
mended to assign the same measuring quantities to pleted with the Enter command. mPDS 5 sends the
the same position. If you need temperature, it requested parameters as part of the input data block
should be assigned to position 21 for each product back to PLC. The parameters are part of the input
type. data block until a new request is sent.
C48IB001EN-Y 145
20.7.1 Setup of the Output Data Block for a Single Line Configuration with the Output Data
Block Size of 128 Bytes
Table 31: Output data block for a single line configuration
Address Address Address Type, No.

Description Field Note
(relative) absolute Modbus of data bits
0 40001 Product num- Word, 16 0...65 binary coded

ber 535
2.0 40002.0 DI1 from the Bit, 1 0,1

PLC
2.1 40002.1 DI2 from the Bit 1 0,1

PLC
... ... ... ...
2.7 40002.7 DI8 from the Bit, 1 0,1

PLC
3.0 40002.8 DI9 from the Bit, 1 0,1

PLC
... ... .... ...
3.7 40002.15 DI16 from the Bit, 1 0,1

PLC
4 40003 Type of the Byte, 8 See table 36

(LSB) requested
parameter 1
5 10003 Index of the Byte, 8 table 4

(MSB) requested
parameter/
meas. value 1

(LSB) requested
parameter 2

(MSB) requested
parameter/
meas. value 2

(LSB) requested
parameter 3

(MSB) requested
parameter/
meas. value 3

(LSB) requested
parameter 4
146 C48IB001EN-Y


(MSB) requested
parameter/
meas.
value 4
12 40007 "Enter" com- Word, 16 Newly requested param-

mand for the eters are stored in the
requested input data block if the
parameter new content of these
storage positions differ
from the old content.
14 40008, Measurement Real, 32 Optional

40009 value 1 from MSB,..,LSB
PLC

PLC

PLC

PLC
30 40016 Type of Byte, 8 See table 36

(LSB) parameter 1,
which should
be transferred
to mPDS 5
31 40016 Index parame- Byte, 8 0 ... table 4

(MSB) ter /meas. 255
value 1
32 40017, Value of Real, 32

40018 parameter 1, MSB,..,LSB
which should
be transferred
to mPDS 5

(LSB) parameter 2,
which should
be transferred
to mPDS 5
37 40019 Index of Byte, 8 0 ... table 4

(MSB) parameter/ 255
meas. value 2
C48IB001EN-Y 147


which should
be transferred
to mPDS 5

(LSB) parameter 3,
which should
be transferred
to mPDS 5

meas. value 3

which should
be transferred
to mPDS 5
... ... ...

(LSB) Parameter 16,
which should
be transferred
to mPDS 5

meas. value
16
122 40062, Value of Real, 32

which should
be transferred
to mPDS 5
126 40064 "Enter" com- Word, 16 After changing the con-

mand for the tents of these 2 bytes
parameters to the entered parameter
be transferred values are transferred to
the mPDS 5 database.
148 C48IB001EN-Y
20.7.2 Setup of the Output Data Block for a Two-line Configuration with Output Data Block
Size 128 Bytes
Table 32: Output data block for a two-line configuration

0 40001 Product number line Word, 16 0..655 binary coded

1 35
2.0 40002.0 DI1 from PLC line 1 Bit, 1 0,1
... ... ... ...
... ... .... ...

(LSB) requested parameter
1 line 1

(MSB) requested parame-
ter/meas. value 1
line 1

2 line 1

ter/meas. value 2
line 1

3 line 1

ters/meas. value 3
line 1

4 line 1

ter/meas. value 4
line 1
C48IB001EN-Y 149

12 40007 Enter command for Word, 16 Newly requested

the requested parameters are
parameter line 1 stored in the input
data block if the
new content of
these storage
positions differ
from the old con-
tent.
14 40008, Meas. value 1 line 1 Real, 32 Optional

10009 von from PLC MSB,..,LSB

40011 from PLC MSB,..,LSB
22 40012 Type of parameter 1 Byte, 8 See table 36

(LSB) line 1, which should
be transferred to
mPDS 5
23 40012 Index of parameter/ Byte, 8 0 ... table 4

(MSB) meas. value 1 255
24 40013, Value of parameter 1 Real, 32

40014 line 1, which should MSB,..,LSB
be transferred to
mPDS 5

be transferred to
mPDS 5


be transferred to
mPDS 5
... ...

be transferred to
mPDS 5


be transferred to
mPDS 5
150 C48IB001EN-Y

58 40030 Enter command for Word, 16 After changing the

the requested contents of these
parameter line 1 2 bytes the
entered parame-
ter values are
transferred to the
mPDS 5 data-
base.
60 40031 Product number line Word, 16 0..655

2 35
62.0 40032.0 DI1 from PLC line 2 Bit, 1 0.1
... ... ... ...
63.0 40032.8 DI9 from PLC line 2 Bit, 1 0.,1
... ... .... ...

1 line 2

ter/meas. value 1
line 2

2 line 2

ter/meas. value 2
line 2

3 line 2

ter/meas. value 3
line 2

4 line 2
C48IB001EN-Y 151


ter/meas. value 4
line 2
72 40037 Enter command for Word, 16 Newly requested

the reqested param- parameters are
eter line 2 stored in the input
data block if the
new content of
these storage
positions differ
from the old con-
tent.



be transferred to
mPDS 5


be transferred to
mPDS 5

be transferred to
mPDS 5


be transferred to
mPDS 5
... ... ...

be transferred to
mPDS 5

152 C48IB001EN-Y


be transferred to
mPDS 5
118 40060 Enter command for Word, 16 After changing the

the requested contents of these
parameter line 2 2 bytes the
entered parame-
ter values are
transferred to the
mPDS 5 data-
base.
20.7.3 Setup of the Output Data Block for a mPDS 5 can optionally request a fixed number
of 4 parameters as part of the output data block.
Multi-line Configuration with Several Output Each requested parameter requires 2 bytes.
Data Block Sizes The number of parameters that can be simulta-
neously changed depends on the number of lines
The output data block is divided among all installed
and the data block size. 6 bytes are required per pa-
lines. Each line is assigned the same size of memo-
rameter (index, type and value).
ry - in some configurations, several bytes remain un-
used at the end of the data block. Table 34: Transferable measurement values
Exception: At 2 lines and an output data block size depending on the output block size
of 224 bytes, 2 bytes are placed between the line
blocks. Output data block size 1 line 2 lines
TIP: With some configurations, 4 Byte Float values 64 5 1

exceed the consistency limits of the 32 byte blocks.
Pay special attention to ensure that these 4 byte val- 96 10 3
ues remain consistent.
128 16 6
The number of measurement values that can be
transferred from PLC to mPDS 5 depends on the
160 21 9
number of lines installed (see table 0.8). Each mea-
surement value reserves 4 bytes.
192 26 12
Table 33: Transferable measurement values
depending on the number of lines 224 32 14
Number of Number of measurement

installed values optionally transferred
lines from PLC to mPDS 5
1 4
2 2
C48IB001EN-Y 153
Table 35: Start address of blocks and "Enter" commands for 1- and 2 -line system depending on
output block size
Second Relative Relative

First line Relative Relative
line address of address of
specific address of address of
Output specific "Enter" for "Enter" for
block "Enter" for "Enter" for
block block parameter to parameter to
starts at requested requested
size starts at be be
relative parameter parameter
relative transferred transferred
address for line 1 for line 2
addresss for line 1 for line 2
64 0 30 12 42 28 58
96 0 42 12 54 40 82
128 0 60 12 72 58 118
160 0 78 12 90 76 154
192 0 96 12 108 94 190
224 0 110 12 106 106 216
20.7.4 List of Parameter Types Table 36: Overview parameter types
Table 36: Overview parameter types Type Description
72 LoLo limit output quantities user func-

Type Description
tions
0..2 not used 74 Target value output quantities user
3 Offset functions
4 Adjustment factor
20.7.5 Simulation of Digital Outputs
5 Hi limit
If an PLC unit is connected to mPDS 5 via fieldbus,
6 HiHi limit
the connection of additional digital outputs from PLC
7 Lo limit to digital inputs of mPDS 5 is usually not desired.
For this reason, PLC can simulate digital outputs by
8 LoLo limit setting certain bits in the output data block. Two
bytes of the output data block are reserved for this
9 Product parameter
purpose. The mPDS 5 configuration sheets state
10 Target value (only required by Davis 5) which virtual outputs are connected to which input
channels of mPDS 5. The function of the digital sig-
nal is usually conveyed by its name (e.g. "Hold", ...)
67 Offset output quantities user functions
20.7.6 Indices of Measurement Values and
68 Adjustment factor output quantities
user functions Parameters
69 Hi limit output quantities user functions To send or receive product parameters or parame-
ters (limits, offsets, ...) connected to measurement
70 HiHi limit output quantities user func-
values, you need to know the index of the measure-
tions
ment value or product parameter. Find the indices in
71 Lo limit output quantities user functions table 4 (measurement values) or (product parame-
ters) in the tabs "Profibus Index".
154 C48IB001EN-Y
20.8 Application Examples for a Single Table 38: "Enter" command for writing
parameters
Line System
of data bits
(relative)
Type, No.
absolute
Address
Address
20.8.1 Selecting a Product
value
Write
To select a product, use the bytes 0 and 1 of the out-
put data block. No specific Enter command has to
be sent. 126 The "Enter" command Word,
The current product number can be traced back is recognised if the 16
from the input data block (bytes 4 and 5). contents of this mem-
ory address is
TIP: To avoid confusion, make sure that PLC is the changed compared to
only instrument changing the number. In no case the old value. E.g.: Old
should an external product selection switch be con- value="1" ....
nected to the digital inputs. The product selection New value="2".
via touchscreen is also disabled.
TIP:
20.8.2 Changing Product-Specific Parame- • After sending the "Enter" command, be sure to
wait 2 seconds before sending new values/com-
ters in mPDS 5 mands.
Product-specific parameters (limits, offset, gain, • The number of parameters that can be changed
product parameters, ...) can be changed via the cy- in a single step depends on the individual con-
clical output data block. figuration.
Index, type and value must be included in the output • In real life it will be necessary to read out the old
data block and an "Enter" command sent. value of the oiffset in order to add the new offest
and transfer the result to mPDS 5 again.
Example changing the offset (single line system,
128 Bytes data block size): Example changing limits (single line system, 128
byte data block size):
You want to transfer the offset for "Original Extract"
of a product of product type ’Beer 1’. The fieldbus in- You want to enter the alarm limits for the "original
dex of "Original Extract" from table 4 is "2". Param- extract" of a product pertaining to the product type
eter type is derived from table 36. "Beer 1". The index of "original extract" from table 4
Type: 3 is "2". The parameter types can be read from
Index:2 table 36. The new limits are:
Offset = 0.15 LoLo = 10.5
Writing the "Offset" using the output datablock: Lo = 10.7
Hi = 11
Table 37: Writing the offset for "Original HiHi = 11.2
Extract"
Writing the LoLo limit using the output datablock:
Address Address Write Type, No. of
Table 39: Writing the LoLo limit
(relative) absolute value data bits
of data bits
30 3 Byte, 8
(relative)
Type, No.
absolute
Address
Address
31 2 Byte, 8
value
Write
32 0.15 Real, 32
MSB,..,LSB
30 8 Byte, 8
Send the "Enter" command for changing parame-
ters (output data block size 128 bytes!): 31 2 Byte, 8
32 10.5 Real, 32
MSB,..,LSB
Writing the Lo limit using the output datablock:
C48IB001EN-Y 155
Table 40: Writing the Lo limit Table 43: Writing the HiHi limit
126 Different from old Word, 16
of data bits
(relative)
value!
Type, No.
absolute
Address
Address
value
Write TIP:
• After sending the "Enter" command, be sure to
36 7 Byte, 8 wait 2 seconds before sending new values/com-
mands.
37 2 Byte, 8
• The number of parameters that can be changed
38 10,7 Real, 32 MSB,..,LSB in a single step depends on the individual con-
figuration.
Writing the Hi limit using the output datablock:
Table 41: Writing the Hi limit 20.8.3 Changing Product Parameters in

mPDS 5 (e.g. "CO2-stored", "Original Extract
of data bits
Stored 1")
(relative)
Type, No.
absolute
Address
Address
value
Write
If you want to transfer a 15.5 °Plato as new value for

product parameter "Original Extract Stored 1" of a
42 5 Byte, 8 product of type "Beer Ferment. Ri". The fieldbus in-
dex of the product parameter "Original Extract
43 2 Byte, 8 Stored 1" must be looked up in the last column of
table 8). The parameter type is derived from
44 11 Real, 32 MSB,..,LSB table 36 (9 for product parameter).
Writing the HiHi limit using the output datablock: Type: 9
Table 42: Writing the HiHi limit Index: 6
Value: 15.5
of data bits
(relative)
Type, No.
of data bits
absolute
Address
Address
(relative)
Type, No.
absolute
Address
Address
value
Write
value
Write
48 6 Byte, 8
30 9 Byte, 8
49 2 Byte, 8
31 6 Byte, 8
50 11.2 Real, 32 MSB,..,LSB
32 15.5 Real, 32 MSB,..,LSB
Send the "Enter" command for changing parame-
ters (output data block size 128 bytes!): Send the "Enter" command for changing parame-
ters (valid for output data block size 128 bytes!):
Table 43: Writing the HiHi limit
of data bits
(relative)
Type, No.
absolute
Address
Address
of data bits
(relative)
value
Type, No.
Write
absolute
Address
Address
value
Write
126 Different from old Word, 16

value!
156 C48IB001EN-Y
20.8.4 Read Product Parameters from Read the Hi limit of "original extract" as "requested
parameter 3". (Bytes 16 ...19 in the input data
mPDS 5 block):
It is possible to read product parameters from Table 46: Writing the Hi limit
mPDS 5 via the input/output data blocks.
of data bits
First request the parameters you wish to read (in-
(relative)
Type, No.
absolute
Address
Address
dex, type and "Enter" command) via the output data
value
block; the requested parameters are then sent via
Write
the input data block.
Example:
8 5 Byte, 8
You would like to read the alarm limits for "original
9 2 Byte, 8
extract" from mPDS 5. The index of "original extract"
from table 4 is "2". The parameter type can be read Read the HiHi limit of "original extract" as "request-
from the table 36. ed parameter 4". (Bytes 20 ...23 in the input data
TIP: To read a parameter you have to send certain block):
values via output data block to the mPDS 5 in a first
Table 47: Writing the HiHi limit
step. The mPDS 5 sends the requested parameters
back via input data block in a second step.
of data bits
(relative)
Type, No.
Read the LoLo limit of "original extract" as "request-
absolute
Address
Address
ed parameter 1". (Bytes 8 ...11 in the input data
value
Write
block):
Table 44: Writing the LoLo limit
10 6 Byte, 8
of data bits
11 2 Byte, 8
(relative)
Type, No.
absolute
Address
Address
value
Send the Enter command for reading parameters

Write
(output data block size 128 bytes!):
4 8 Byte, 8 Table 48: Enter command for reading the

parameters
5 2 Byte, 8 of data bits
(relative)
Type, No.
Read the Lo limit of "original extract" as "requested

absolute
Address
Address
parameter 2". (Bytes 12 ...15 in the input data

value
Write
block):
Table 45: Writing the Lo limit
10 6 Byte, 8
of data bits
(relative)
TIP:
Type, No.
absolute
Address
Address
• After sending the Enter command, be sure to

value
Write
wait 2 seconds before sending new values/com-

mands.
6 7 Byte, 8
• The requested parameters are part of the input
7 2 Byte, 8 data block (bytes 8...23) as long as no new
parameters are requested.
C48IB001EN-Y 157
20.9 Important Application Notes for the mPDS 5
PLCs connected via Fieldbus • If commands are sent frequently, the mPDS 5
slows down and reduces the available recording
time for the diagnosis of errors.
1. Functions to be used as often as required:
Only read measurement values and status informa-
• Reading measurement values
tion every second.
• Reading status information
• Sending "analog" measurement values and digi-
tal inputs
20.10 Product Creation/Product Type
2. Functions to be used only occasionally if abso-
Change via Fieldbus
lutely necessary
The previous points in Chapter 20 describe the stan-
• Reading or changing product parameters, dard protocol via fieldbus. Some customers require
alarm, limits, offsets additional special functions described below. This
• Changing the product chapter describes only the changes to the standard
protocol.
NOTICE To synchronize the product list on the fieldbus termi-

Example: nal (PLC) with the product list on the mPDS 5, it is
If product parameters are sent every second, possible to create a product or change the product
this causes a lot of unnecessary CPU load and type of an existing product via fieldbus.
slows down the other functions (keyboard opera- TIP: Synchronize the lists during maintenance as it
tions) takes some time (up to 1 minute) .
Use menu
A typical application could be the following:
Menu > Setup > PROFIBUS/EtherNet/IP/Modbus
• send product number and read back for verifica- TCP Settings
tion
(depending on the fieldbus system at the custom-
• receive measurement values er‘s) to activate or deactivate the special functions.
• Check or set offsets and gain factors after the Check the flags in the fieldbus settings dialog. The
product change if necessary "Readonly" mode must be deactivated (unchecked).
• read and evaluate status If you want to create new products, check the option
"Product creation" - if you want to change the prod-
• set digital inputs on demand if configured uct type, check the option "Product Type Change".
• transfer individual measurement values, if con-
figured, instead of analog inputs to be displayed
or used for further calculation (e.g. "CO2-AI") on Set the product type in your fieldbus output data
block. Use the addresses normally taken to write
158 C48IB001EN-Y
Table 49: Change of datablocks when product synchronisation is activated (example output
datablock size 128)
Use of output data block when Product

Default use of output data block
synchronisation activated
Type, No. Type, No.

Address Description Address Description
data bits data bits
0 Product Number Word, 16 0 Product Number Word, 16
...
...
26 Measured Value 4 Real, 32 26 Measured Value 4 Real, 32

MSB,..,LSB MSB,..,LSB
30 [Parameter 1] Type Byte, 8 30 Product Type Word, 16
31 [Parameter 1] Byte, 8 32 Create Product Byte, 8

Index
32 [Parameter 1] Real, 32 33 (Reserved) -

Value MSB,..,LSB
36 [Parameter 2] Type Byte, 8 36 [Parameter 1] Byte, 8

Type
.. .. .. .. .. ..
.. .. .. .. .. ..
20.10.1 How to Create a new Product via 20.10.2 How to Change a Product Type via
Fieldbus Fieldbus
• Set a product number (1 ... 65535). If you want • Select an existing product (1 ... 65535). The
to create a product, the product number must product type of product 0 can not be changed.
not exist yet.
• Set the new product type. If product type is set
• Set product type. If product type is set to 0, to 0, product type will not be changed. The
product will not be created. The selected prod- selected product type must exist and must be
uct type must exist and must be activated in the activated in the configuration (look up product
configuration. (look up product type numbers in type numbers in table 6)
table 6.)
If the new product type is different to the old one, the
• Set "Create Product" byte > 0. If this byte is not following steps are carried out:
set, the product will not be created.
Example:
The product will be created and set as active prod-
uct. The name of the new product will be built by - Current product = 5
adding the number of the product to the text "Prod- - Product 0 will be selected
uct #". If this name already exists, a slash and a - The current product 5 will be deleted
counter are added. So if you are creating the prod- - A new product 5 with the selected product
uct with number 10 and product with the name type will be created. The name will be taken
"Product #10" already exists, the new product is from the old product.
named "Product #10/2". - The new product will be selected.
C48IB001EN-Y 159
21 Communication with External PC - Download of System Information
NOTICE
All data of the product (except name and num-
ber) get lost when changing a product type.
When changing a product type and using
Davis 5, the product with the new type will be
recognized as a new product.
21 Communication with External PC - Download of

System Information
You can download the system information from your
instrument to any PC of your local network via
EtherNet.
1. Connect the instrument to your local network via
the ethernet interface.
> Network".
3. Activate the option "Obtain an IP address auto-
matically (DHCP)" or enter the network parame-
ters manually.
4. For details about the network settings, see
Chapter 10.3.
Fig. 134: Screenshot of a browser connected to mPDS 5
5. Open an internet browser on a PC that is con-
nected to your local network.
6. Enter the IP address of mPDS 5 in the address
field of the browser and press the <ok> key.
Now the system information of your instrument
is displayed.
160 C48IB001EN-Y
22 Technical Data
22 Technical Data
22.1 General Technical Data
Dimensions (W x H x D): 275 x 215 x 240 mm

(10.83 x 8.47 x 9.45 inches)
Dimenisons panel cutout 249 x 189 mm

(W x H): (9.81 x 7.45 inches)
Weight (depending on the configuration): max. 4.6 kg
Voltage: DC 24 V -15% / +20% (UL Class 2)
Power consumption: max. 60 W (depending on the config.)
Degree of Protection: IP54 from the front (only after proper installation in
a control panel, switch cabinet,...)
Ambient temperature: + 5 °C to + 40 °C (+ 41 °F to + 104 °F)
Air humidity: 0 to 90% relative humidity, noncondensing
Pollution degree: 2
Altitude: maximum 3000 m (9000 feet)
Touch screen: 8.4 inch TFT, 640 x 480 px
Radiated emissions Class A. This equipment can generate radiated

disturbances in residential environment.
UL/CSA certificates ANSI/UL 61010-1

CAN/CSA C22.2
Embedded PC 1 GHz, 512 MB DDRAM, 1 Gbyte Flash
Operating System Windows CE 6.0 or higher
Input and Output Specifications

All in- and outputs (inlcuding relay ouputs) connected to mPDS 5 have to accord with PELV (protective ex-
tra-low voltage) of EN 61140 or SELV specification of EN 60950, i.e. maximum voltage Umax must not ex-
ceed 24 V + 20% = 28.8 V and a maximum current Imax = 0.7 A.(except CPU power connection).
22.2 Analog and Digital Inputs/Output (I/O Board and Transducer Board)
Relay outputs e.g. for limit monitoring:
Table 50: Specifications relay output
Printed board with floating contacts, external fuse required!
Maximum current Imax: 0.7 A
Max. switching current: 0.7 A
Maximum contact voltage Umax: 28.8 V
C48IB001EN-Y 161
22 Technical Data
Table 50: Specifications relay output
External safety specification max. T 3.15 A
Contact resistance: approx. 0.6 
Lifetime: 106 cycles
Analog input:
Table 51: Specifications analog input
Galvanically isolated from mPDS 5 .

Voltage-frequency analog/digital converter.
Input current range: 0 to 20 mA / 4 to 20 mA
Accuracy: 0.1% (= 0.02 mA) at 10 °C
Resolution: 14 bit
Auxiliary internal voltage: DC 15 V, 30 mA
Max. input voltage: DC 28.8 V
Max. current: 40 mA
Input impedance: <300 
Temperature coefficient: 135 ppm/K of 20 mA

55 ppm/K of 20 mA (typical)
Analog output:
Table 52: Specifications analog output
Galvanically isolated from mPDS 5.
Output current: 4 to 20 mA
Accuracy: 0.1% (= 0.02 mA) at 10 °C
Resolution: 14 bit
Maximum load impedance Rmax: <600 
Filter: Low pass filter 4. order
Filter cut-off frequency: 70 Hz
Temperature coefficient: 125 ppm/K of 20 mA

45 ppm/K of 20 mA (typical)
Digital input/Counter input:
Table 53: Specifications digital input
Galvanically isolated, passive inputs complying with EN 61131-2; All inputs have one common ground
terminal.
Input voltage: DC 24 V - 15% / +20%
External safety specification: max. T 3.15 A
162 C48IB001EN-Y
22 Technical Data
Table 53: Specifications digital input
Maximal voltage for the status = "0": DC 5 V
Minimal voltage for the status = "1": DC 15 V
Input impedance: >2.5 k
When used as counter input: Max. frequency: 300 Hz

min. pulse length: 0.5 ms
Digital outputs (Transducer board and I/O board):
Table 54: Specifications digital outputs (Transducer board and I/O board)
All outputs are supplied internally or externally and have to comply with EN 61131-2. All outputs have
one supply and one common ground terminal.
External supply
Power supply: DC 24 V - 15% / +20%
External safety specification: max. T 3.15 A
Nominal current per output: 0.5 A
Max. current per output: 0.7 A
Breaking current (after 50 µs): 2A
Max. internal resistance per output: 2
Max. leakage current: 10 µA
Internal supply
Power supply: DC 15 V
Sum of all currents (all outputs): 25 mA
Internal resistance per output: 2
Max. leakage current: 10 µA
Digital outputs (LED board, Cobrix 5500/5600 only)
Table 55: Specifications digital output (LED board, Cobrix 5500/5600)
Power supply: DC 24 V - 15% / +20%
Max. current per output: max. 0.4 A
22.3 Transducer Inputs (Transducer Board)

Table 56: Specifications transducer input
Transducer Input 1/2
Electrically isolated interface for an Anton Paar DPR(n), SPR(n), SPRn 2S or DSRn transducer.
This input is short-circuit-proof. Do not connect an active signal to this input.
Voltage: < DC 16.5 V
Current: < 40 mA
C48IB001EN-Y 163
22 Technical Data
22.4 USB/CAN/Ethernet (CPU Board)

Table 57: Specifications embedded-PC and CAN interface
Embedded-PC
Temperature operating conditions: 0 °C to + 70 °C (+ 32 °F to + 158 °F)
Ethernet interface: IEEE 802.3u 100 Base-T Fast Ethernet
Ethernet cable specifications using plug with Mat. Solid and stranded wire AWG 27 to AWG 22
No. 96694 Cat. 6
Cable diameter 4.5 - 9 mm
USB interface: 2.0 compliant
CAN user interface
Protocol: CAN 2.0 A
Plug connection (pin configuration according to 9-pin D-Sub-connector

recommendation CiA DR 303-1):
Maximum length of the entire CAN network: 250 m (at 250 Kbit/s)
Stubs: max. 1 m
Table 58: Pinning CAN D-SUB plug
Pin No. Signal Description
1 not used
2 CAN L CAN low signal
3 CAN GND CAN signal ground
4 not used
5 CAN SHLD CAN shield
6 GND optional supply
7 CAN H CAN high signal
8 not used
9 Vs optional supply
22.5 PROFIBUS (PROFIBUS Board Version 1 and 2)

Table 59: Specifications PROFIBUS boards
PROFIBUS data
Protocol: PROFIBUS-DP
Physical layer: RS-485
Transfer rate: 9600 bit/s to 12 Mbit/s
164 C48IB001EN-Y
22 Technical Data
Maximum Line Lengths at Different Data Rates

Table 60: Line lengths at different data rates
Data rate in [kbit/s] 9.6 19.2 45.45 93.75 187.5 500 1500 3000 6000 12000
Line length in [m] 1200 1200 1200 1200 1000 400 200 100 100 100
Line Parameters
PROFIBUS line type A (IEC 61158)
Table 61: Specifications PROFIBUS cable
Parameter Specification
Impedance in [] 135 ... 165 (at 3 ... 20 MHz)
Capacitance [pF/m] < 30
Loop resistance [/km] < 110
Core diameter [mm] > 0.64
Core cross section [mm²] > 0.34
PROFIBUS D-SUB Plug Pinning

The D-SUB plug with 9 pins is defined as follows:
Fig. 135: D-SUB plug (female)
Table 62: Plug pinning PROFIBUS D-SUB plug
Pin No. Signal Description Input/output
1 Not used -
2 Not used -
3 RxD/TxD-P Receive/Transmit data P, B-line, positive data line Input/Output
4 CNTR-P Repeater control signal; RTS signal, TTL-level Output
5 DGND Data ground (Reference voltage VP) Output
6 VP Power supply; (P 5 V) Output
7 not connected -
8 RxD/TxD-N Receive/Transmit data- N, A-line, negative Data Input/Output

line
C48IB001EN-Y 165
22 Technical Data
Table 62: Plug pinning PROFIBUS D-SUB plug
9 Not used
Metal case Shield Shield or PE
22.6 Fieldbuses Based on Ethernet (PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP)

Table 63: Specifications Ethernet
Cable Shielded 4-wire Cat5 cable ("Twisted pair") or opti-

cal fiber
Plug RJ 45
Transfer rate 100 MBit/s
Switches Full duplex transfer, auto crossover, auto negotia-

tion
22.7 Fieldbuses Based on CAN-Bus (DeviceNet)

Table 64: CAN-Bus specifications
Cable PROFIBUS/CAN cable 2x2x0.22 (acc. to DIN

19245 and EN 50170), wave impedance 100-120
Ohm, e.g. our Mat.No. 94268
Plug e.g. Anton Paar Mat.No. 184983
Transfer speed 125/250/500 kBit/s
Wire length as a function of the transfer speed 125 kbit/s : 500 m

250 kbit/s : 250 m
500 kbit/s : 100 m
Stub length Max. 6 m (whole)
Terminating resistance 120 
Number of nodes max. 64
22.8 UV/Vis board (for L-Col 6100 sen-

sor)
This board can only be used for the L-Col 6100 Sen-
sor. The sensor supply voltage is also available via
this interface. Do not connect any other device to
this interface. Refer to Chapter 18.3.20 for details of
Fig. 136: DeviceNet-Terminals the pinning.
NOTICE
The external power supply for DeviceNet must
be PELV or SELV (see Chapter 18.3).
166 C48IB001EN-Y
23 Troubleshooting
23 Troubleshooting
If you need support from Anton Paar, it is necessary
to create a log file and send it to your Anton Paar Reset alarm
distribution partner.
Select "service > system information" and tap on
<save logfile> to copy the full logfile to the USB
stick.
23.1 Message List - Inactive Output

fields
• If an error occurs, the symbol in the upper right
corner of the status area changes.
Table 65: Status symbols
Status = ok
Instrument and measurement
values are within warning/alarm Fig. 137: Message list example
limits Tap the status button to open the message list win-
dow. The "Message List" (see Fig. 137) explains the
Status = Warning
warnings and alarms. Tap the <reset> arrow to reset
e.g. One or more warning limits
the alarm. To close the message list window tap on
exceeded, special warnings
the "X" in the upper right corner.
could come up reminding the
user to carry out a maintenance If an exceeded limit is linked to a physical alarm out-
e.g. on a Carbo CO2 analyzer put (DIO or Relay) a reset button is shown right be-
side the message.
Status = Error You can reset (=deactivate) the physical alarm for a
- mPDS 5 errors (configuration, certain time by tapping on this field. See Chapter
etc. ) 19.1.
- one or more alarm limits
exceeded If a sensor is defective or not connected, related
- sensor disconnected or defec- measuring quantities are invalid and instead of the
tive expected value the string ’inactive’ is displayed in
the output field. E.g. if an mPDS 5 is set up for a
DSRn and the DSRn is defective or not connected
all output field linked to density, sound velocity and
temperature will read ’inactive’ e.g. Concentra-
tion.
You find below examples of common error messag-
es and suggestions of corrections.
C48IB001EN-Y 167
23 Troubleshooting
Table 66: Examples of typical errors
Error message Cause Correction
DSRn No signal at the transducer input Check the connecting cable.

No sensor connected 1 or 2.
DSRn mPDS 5 expects a DSRn to be Change the configuration of mPDS

Unexpected sensor type connected - a DPRn or SPRn 5 to match the connected sensor
found was connected instead type or connect a DSRn sensor.
Original Extract Original extract has exceeded The production is out of specifica-
Upper alarm limit exceeded the HiHi Limit (=upper alarm tions - bring the original extract into
limit) the allowed range by e.g. adding
more water.
Ethanol %v/v 20 °C Ethanol %v/v 20 °C has The production is out of specifica-

Upper warning limit exceeded the Hi Limit (=upper tions - bring the ethanol %v/v 20 °C
exceeded warning limit) concentration into the allowed range
by e.g. adding more water.
DSRn/DPRn/SPRn etc. Error in the transferred sensor Exchange sensor electronics

A CRC error occurred constants of PTE5
NaN "NaN" stands for "Not a Num- Check all input values and parame-
ber". The calculated result fea- ters.
tures an invalid number.
Input value below 3.8 mA the current at the analog input Check cable and externally con-
falls below 3.8 mA nected 4 - 20 mA transmitter set-
tings and errors
Invalid value Values of DPR/SPR/DSRn MWA - fill the pipe

out of valid range: - increase the pressure
Density: 0 ... 3000 kg/m³ - install a back pressure valve
Soundvelocity.: 0 .... 3000 m/s - prevent sudden starts and stops
Temperature: -100 ... 400 °C
Pipe not filled completely.
TIP: Messages in the message list window are not

updated. Close this window and re-open it to get an
updated list.
23.2 Diagnosis Windows

If you want detailed information on a single input or
output tap <Menu> and select "Service> Diagno-
sis". You get a list of available alarms (e.g. Alarm1,
Alarm2), Anton Paar sensors (e.g. L-Com), con-
nected 4-20 mA transmitters (e.g. conductivity),
connected digital input signal (e.g. Hold) ... . Select
the item you want to get detailed information about
and tap <Details> in the buttons area.
Fig. 138: Diagnosis window - list of available "sensors"
Selecting the details of DSRn would give the follow-
ing window.
168 C48IB001EN-Y
23 Troubleshooting
Table 67: NAMUR status
Bit 7...5 Initializing or measurement values

invalid
Bit 4 Initializing or measurement values

invalid
Bit 3 Maintenance request
Bit 2 Out of specification
Bit 1 Function check
Bit 0 Failure
Errors are reported in the message list. All errors ex-

cept ’Initializing’ can be reset. Tapping "reset" caus-
Fig. 139: Details of a DSRn sensor: Connectors, Input
Quantities, etc
es a smart sensor to be initialized.
A smart sensor failure (no "Heartbeat") can cause
the following:
• Error mesage that a node has failed
• All measuring quantities related to a node are
set to "inactive"
• All functions of mPDS 5 not related to the CAN
sensor continue running normally.
A failing smart sensor, which starts to work properly
in the CAN network ("Heartbeat" is OK), causes the
following reactions:
• Error message that a node has failed is deleted
• All measuring quantities related to a node are
set to "active"
Fig. 140: Input Quantities of a DSRn sensor
• mPDS 5 is running normally
TIP: Take a close look at "PTE5-State"!
Anton Paar sensors such as the DPRn, SPRn and TIP: Note that a smart sensor must be disconnected
DSRn give an additional status information from power for at least one minute before it can be
("PTExxx -state"), which is very important to check. connected to the network again. Otherwise the firm-
See Chapter 15.2 table 17 for more details on the ware of the smart sensor does not run correctly,
PTE5-State. possibly overflowing mPDS 5 with error messages
causing a crash or unpredictable errors of mPDS 5.
If a CAN device, which was connected to the CAN
23.3 Smart Sensor (Carbo 510, Carbo network but not switched on at the time mPDS 5
520 Optical, Cobrix 2600, Inline Pump started, is switched on later it is automatically inte-
grated in the network.
5,...) Diagnosis If a CAN device is not connected to the CAN net-
work, when mPDS 5 starts up it is necessary to re-
CAN Devices (Smart Sensors from Anton Paar) re-
boot mPDS 5 after the CAN device has been
port their status using the NAMUR status via the
connected.
CAN lines.
There is no collision detection for CAN devices with
identical CAN addresses. mPDS 5 expects each
CAN device to have a unique address.
C48IB001EN-Y 169
23 Troubleshooting
Firmware updates have to be carried out via Menu 23.3.1 Inline Pump 5 / Inline Pump 520:
"Service > Update > Module Firmware". Use the lat-
est firmware version for all smart sensors. Input Quantities, Parameters and Error List
For all details please see Chapter 15.1. Inline Pump 5 (IP5) and Inline Pump 520 (IP 520)
Smart Sensor errors which have the NAMUR status behave quite similarly. The Inline Pump 520 offers
"failure" (bit 0 = "1") are not reset automatically and diagnosis via several LEDs. IP 520 comes with
typically all measurement values of the smart sen- hardware version 2.000.000 or higher. Some of the
sor are set to "0". input quantities are not available for the IP 5 and
some parameters are not editable in IP 520!
Smart Sensor errors which have the NAMUR status
"Out of specification" Input Quantities:
(bit 2 = "1") are reset automatically as soon as the
conditions for the error are not true any more. Name
You find the status of the different errors in the ta- NAMUR status
bles below in the last column.
Error
Errors with an 'X' in the last column ("Autom. reset")
are reset automatically. Inline Pump Stop input
Parameters including measurement values for

diagnosis:
Table 68: Parameters of Inline Pump
Name Unit Editable Range
CAN Bus address
Operating time Days
Pump power up count
Motor power up count
NAMUR status
Target speed rpm yes 500 ... 4000
Autostart yes (IP 5 only)
Supply voltage V
Motor speed rpm
Motor power W
Motor current A
Microchip temperature °C
Motor temperature °C
Error code
Dry check active yes (IP 5 only)
Motor driver temperature °C
Circuit board temperature °C
170 C48IB001EN-Y
23 Troubleshooting
Table 68: Parameters of Inline Pump
DI stop - delay min yes 0 ... 1000
DI stop - Is output
DI stop - reverse logic yes
TIP: Inline Pump 5 is delivered with Autostart=1 because the pump is also used without mPDS 5. As soon
as the pump is connected via CAN to mPDS 5 mPDS 5 takes over the control of Inline Pump 5. Product 0
stops the pump and for all other products the pump must be running.
The fixed settings for the Inline Pump 520 are:
Dry run detection = 1 (on)
Autostart = 0 (off)
23.3.1.1 "Inline Pump Error" - Codes
Error
Description
Inline Pump
0 ok
-1 Inline Pump stopped by digital input or by PLC via fieldbus
1 - 255 NAMUR status if none of the error messages below concerning IP 5 is active
all other values Error messages from Inline Pump 5 / Inline Pump 520 (see table below)
Inline Pump
Namur Autom.
Error Codes Error Message Reason / Troubleshooting
Status Reset
(decimal)
4097 0x01 Stall Error Blocked impeller or pump motor.

Remove pump adapter and check impeller for
damaging.
4098 0x01 Watchdog Error Blocked impeller or pump motor.

Remove pump adapter and check impeller for
damaging.
8705 0x04 Motor current Motor current consumption too low. X

too low Check specifications of the power supply (min.
3 A)
Optionally install stronger power supply.
8706 0x01 Motor current Motor current consumption too high (IP 5:
too high >3A; IP520: >6A) Viscosity of liquid could be
too high. Start up the Inline Pump without liq-
uid. If the error message appears again, send
the pump back to your Anton Paar representa-
tive.
8707 0x01 Current peak For a short moment the maximum current was
detected exceeded. Possible reasons: Impeller defec-
(IP 520 only) tive, Sample viscosity too high. Check impeller
and reduce rotation speed.
C48IB001EN-Y 171
23 Troubleshooting
Inline Pump
Namur Autom.
Status Reset
(decimal)
12801 0x04 Voltage too low Supply voltage too low. Minimum power sup- X
ply DC 20 V.
Measure the voltage at the pump (min.
DC 20 V). Optionally install a stronger power
supply or increase voltage at an adjustable
power supply. Just a warning! If the voltage
reaches the allowed range, this message is
reset automatically.
12802 0x04 Voltage Supply voltage too high.Maximum voltage: DC X

too high 30 V
Measure the voltage at the Inline Pump 5
(max. DC 30 V). Just a warning! If the voltage
reaches the allowed range, this message is
reset automatically.
16641 0x01 Microchip tem- Temperature at the electronic board of the

perature too Inline Pump 5 exceeded. Maximum tempera-
high ture at the Microchip: 85 °C
Check liquid temperature: IP 5: 85 °C,
IP 520: 73 °C
CIP temp.: +120 °C max. 30 min.
Max. liquid temperature: +100 °C
16642 0x01 Motor tempera- Maximum motor power exceeded. Check liq-
ture too high uid temperature. IP 5: 100 °C, IP 520: 120 °C
CIP temp.: +120 °C max. 30 min.
16644 0x01 Driver stage Current consumption too high (viscosity or

temperature rotation speed), Continuous power rating too
too high (IP520 high, Voltage of power supply
only) < DC 24 V
- Ambient temp. too high
- Sample temp. very high
Remedy: Reduce rotation speed, reduce sam-
ple temp. if possible.
Max. driver stage temperature: 95 °C
16645 0x01 Electronics Current consumption too high (viscosity or

temperature rotation speed), Ambient temp. too high, sam-
too high (IP520 ple temp. very high
only) - Reduce rotation speed
- Reduce sample temp.
Max. electronics temp.: 73 °C
20481 0x01 Power con- Maximum motor temperature exceeded.

sumption too Check voltage and current consumption (IP 5:
high 60 W; IP 520: 155 W)
20482 0x04 Speed devia- Motor cannot keep the target speed. Decrease X
tion too high motor speed with the mPDS 5. The viscosity of
liquid may be too high.
20483 0x01 Dry line Switch off the pump or fill the line with liquid.
detected Long dry-run destroys the pump.
172 C48IB001EN-Y
23 Troubleshooting
Inline Pump
Namur Autom.
Status Reset
(decimal)
33040 0x01 Inline pump CAN communication error! Reset error manu-
error ally or power off - on. If error remains, contact
Anton Paar Service
33056 0x01 Inline pump CAN communication error. Reset error manu-
error ally or power off - on. If error remains, contact
Anton Paar Service
23.3.2 Carbo 510: Input Quantities, Parame- Name

ters and Error List
Pressure Line Carbo
Carbo 510 is connected via CAN Bus to mPDS 5. In
Temperature Carbo
addition it is possible to connect a signal to a digital
input of mPDS 5 to stop Carbo 510. See "diagnosis" NAMUR status
to check which input is used.
Pressure Carbo
Input Quantities:
Pressure Gas Carbo
Name Stop Input
CO2 Carbo Pressure Parameters including measurement values for

diagnosis:
Pressure Gas Carbo
CO2 Carbo
Table 69: Parameters of Carbo 510
CAN Bus address
Operating time Days
Power up count
Measuring cyles
Time to next maintenance Days
Bus voltage DC V
Motor current A
State
Case temperature °C
Pressure Gas Pa
Temperature Gas °C
Offset P-Sensor yes -3.4 e + 38 ... + 3.4 e + 38
Gain P-Sensor yes -3.4 e + 38 ... + 3.4 e + 38
C48IB001EN-Y 173
23 Troubleshooting
Table 69: Parameters of Carbo 510
Offset T-Sensor yes -3.4 e + 38 ... + 3.4 e + 38
Gain T-Sensor yes -3.4 e + 38 ... + 3.4 e + 38
Rinse time s yes 7 ... 1000
Measuring time s yes 7 ... 25
Check frequency yes 0 ... 65536
Autostart
Next maintenance
Median filter size* yes 1 ... 19; only odd values
Average filter size* yes 1 ... 19; only odd values
Disable valve check yes 0/1 (Values > 0 deactivate the

valve check, required if the dis-
solved CO2 is very low)
DI Stop - Reverse Logic yes True/False
Product group
User defined solubility factor
User defined absorption factor
Error code
NAMUR state
*) The average filter size must always be 2 units smaller than the "median filter size". If the median filter and
average filter are set to "1", both filters are deactivated.
23.3.2.1 "Error Carbo" available for Carbo 510
"Error Carbo" Description
0 OK
-1 Carbo 510 stopped by digital input or by PLC via fieldbus
1 - 255 NAMUR status if none of the below errors is submitted by Carbo 510
all other values One of the below error codes from Carbo 510 Smart Sensor (see table
below table 70)
Table 70: Carbo 510 Error codes, - messages, - description
Carbo 510
Namur Autom.
Status Reset
(decimal)
4098 0x01 Watchdog Power on - off, if error remains, con-
tact Anton Paar Service
8705 0x04 Motor current too low check connection wires and impeller X
(power < 10 mA)
174 C48IB001EN-Y
23 Troubleshooting
Table 70: Carbo 510 Error codes, - messages, - description
Carbo 510
Namur Autom.
Status Reset
(decimal)
8706 0x01 Motor current too high Check for short circuit or change
motor (power > 600 mA)
12801 0x04 Voltage too low Check power supply (> DC 20 V) X
12802 0x01 Voltage too high Check power supply (< DC 30 V)
12803 0x01 Internal Supply Voltage Change sensor board
Failure, Possible Rea-
son: Fuse on Sensor-
board
16641 0x04 Microchip temp. too high Contact Anton Paar Service (tem- X
perature > 80 °C)
16642 0x04 Liquid temperature too Cleaning mode active X
high
16643 0x01 Liquid temperature too Liquid temperature < - 5 °C: beyond
low measurement range allowed
20482 0x01 Impeller defective Degassing error! Check impeller and
impeller drive
20483 0x04 Valve error Bubbles in chamber or valves defec- X
tive
20484 0x01 Temp Sensor dropout Check connections or change sensor
20485 0x01 Pressure Sensor dropout Check connections or change sensor
20488 0x01 Impeller speed too low (Rotation speed < 500 rpm)
Liquid too viscous or impeller defec-
tive
28673 0x04 Line pressure too low Line pressure < 0.5 bar X
28674 0x04 Line pressure too high Line pressure > 10 bar X
28677 0x04 Air in measuring cham- Criterion: gas pressure approx. 10% X
ber lower than line pressure. Check line
or open bypass valves
28678 0x04 Measuring chamber Electronics recognized dry-run. Fill X
empty line or stop measurement instrument
33040 0x01 Carbo 510 error CAN communication error!. Reset
error manually or power off - on. If
error remains, contact Anton Paar
Service
33056 0x01 Carbo 510 error CAN communication error. Reset
Service
C48IB001EN-Y 175
23 Troubleshooting
23.3.3 Carbo 520 Optical/Cobrix 2600: Input Name

Quantities, Parameters and Error List
CO2 pressure
Carbo 520 Optical/Cobrix 2600 is connected via
Line temperature
CAN Bus to mPDS 5. In addition it is possible to con-
nect a signal to a digital input of mPDS 5 to stop Car- NAMUR state
bo 520/Optical/Cobrix 2600. The input used can be
seen in the diagnosis window. Carbo Stop - Input
Input quantities of Carbo 520/Cobrix 2600 Sugar Brix
Name Parameters including measurement values for

diagnosis
CO2
CO2 in Package
Table 71: Paramters for Carbo 520 Optical/Cobrix 2600
Carbo 520 Optical 0 ... Carbo 520 Optical

1 ... Cobrix 2600
CO2 Raw [kg/m³]
CO2 Raw Pa
Offset ADCO2 [V]
Gain ADCO2
Internal cleaning unit yes
Product group yes
User defined Absorption Coef yes
Operating time [days]
Power on Cycle Count
Internal cleaning unit cycles
Supply voltage [V]
Internal cleaning unit current [A]
Sensorboard Temperature [°C]
Sensor Type
Detector temp. control current [A]
Detector temperature [°C]
Detector temp. control PWM
Case temperature [°C]
176 C48IB001EN-Y
23 Troubleshooting
Signal Extract [V]
Reference Extract [V]
Signal CO2 [V]
Reference CO2 [V]
CAN-Bus Adress
Measure Medium Temperature Max [°C]
Measure Medium Temperature Min [°C]
Detector current maximum [A]
Detector current minimum [A]
Measure Case Temperature Max [°C]
Measure Case Temperature Min [°C]
Emitter Current Max [A]
Emitter Current Min [A]
CO2 Value Max [kg/m³]
CO2 - Value Min [kg/m³]
Detector AntiwindUp
Peltier_b0
Peltier_b1
Peltier_c0
Peltier_c1
Ay0
AA1
At1
Bny0
BnA1
Bnt1
Cny0
CnA1
Cnt1
BTy0
BTA1
BTt1
C48IB001EN-Y 177
23 Troubleshooting
Emitter 1 current [A]
Emitter 2 current [A]
Expected sensor board S/N
Offset Probe Temperatrue [°C]
Gain Probe Temperature [°C]
Offset ADn [V]
Gain ADn
Adn [V]
ADCO2 [V]
Emitter 1 Resistance
Emitter 2 Resistance
Subboards State
Emitter temperature [°C]
Sensor board S/N
Sensor board version
Error code
NAMUR state
DI Stop - IsOutput
DI Stop - Reverse Logic yes
23.3.3.1 "Error Carbo" for Carbo 520 Optical/Cobrix 2600
"Error Carbo" Description
0 OK
-1 Carbo 520 Optical/Cobrix 2600 stopped by digital input por by PLC via fieldbus
1 - 255 NAMUR if there is no error message from Carbo 520 Optical/Cobrix 2600
all other values Error messages from Carbo 520 Optical/Cobrix 2600 table 72
178 C48IB001EN-Y
23 Troubleshooting
Table 72: Carbo 520 Optical/Cobrix 2600 - Error codes, - messages, - descriptions
Carbo 520
Optical/
Namur Error Message Autom.
Cobrix 2600 Reason / Troubleshooting
Status Reset
Error Codes
(decimal)
8709 0x01 Internal cleaning Interruption of current at the internal

unit current too low cleaning unit, contact Anton Paar Service!
8710 0x01 Internal cleaning Short circuit at the internal cleaning unit,
unit current too high contact Anton Paar Service!
12801 0x01 Voltage too low Supply voltage < DC 20 V, check if volt-
age supply is between 20 V and 30 V.
Check current consumption
12802 0x01 Voltage too high Supply voltage > DC 30 V, check if volt-
age supply is between 20 V and 30 V.
Check current consumption.
16641 0x01 Line temperature Line temperature < -5 °C (during mea-

too low surement). Increase line temperature
> -5 °C.
16642 0x04 Line temperature Line temperature > 35 °C! Cleaning mode X
too high active. Reduce temperature to < 35 °C!
16645 0x04 Sensor board tem- CIP Mode X

perature > 75°C
16646 0x01 Detector tempera- Wait until detector setpoint is reached

ture instable (max. 3 min.)
16647 0x01 Case temperature Case temperature < -5 °C. Increase case
too low temperature > -5 -°C.
16648 0x01 Case temperature Case temperature > 80 °C. Decrease

too high case temperature < 80 °C.
20482 0x01 Line temperature Line temperature sensor failure, contact

sensor failure Anton Paar Service!
20483 0x01 Sensor board tem- Temperature sensor of sensor board

perature sensor fail- defect, contact Anton Paar Service!
ure
20484 0x01 Detector tempera- Temperature sensor of Detector defect,

ture sensor failure contact Anton Paar Service!
20486 0x01 Detector failure Detector defect, contact Anton Paar Ser-
vice!
20487 0x01 Emitter failure Emitter defect, contact Anton Paar Ser-
vice!
20489 0x01 Sensor board failure Sensor board defect, contact Anton Paar
Service!
20490 0x01 Detector tempera- Temperature control unit of Detectors

ture control error defect, contact Anton Paar Service!
C48IB001EN-Y 179
23 Troubleshooting
Table 72: Carbo 520 Optical/Cobrix 2600 - Error codes, - messages, - descriptions
Carbo 520
Optical/
Namur Error Message Autom.
Cobrix 2600 Reason / Troubleshooting
Status Reset
Error Codes
(decimal)
20491 0x01 Emitter temperature Temperature sensor of emitter defect,

sensor failure contact Anton Paar Service!
20492 0x04 Internal cleaning Cleaning mode active, reduce line tem- X
unit active perature to < 35 °C
25344 0x04 Factory adjustment Adjustment constants do not correspond X

invalid with the serial number of sensor module
28673 0x04 Bubbles on sapphire CO2 degassed, check line pressure X

(sensor head)
33040 0x01 Carbo 520 error CAN communication error!. Reset error
manually or power off - on. If error
remains, contact Anton Paar Service
33056 0x01 Carbo 520 error CAN communication error. Reset error
manually or power off - on. If error
remains, contact Anton Paar Service
23.3.4 L-Vis 510 / 520 Ex: Input Quantities, Input quantities:

Parameters and Error List
Name
The L-Vis 510 / 520 Ex Smart Sensor is connected
NAMUR status
via a CAN-Bus to mPDS 5. Additionally a digital sig-
nal can be connected to a digital input of mPDS 5 L-Vis stop input
and used to stop L-Vis 510. The diagnosis window
shows which input is used for which purpose. Temperature
Viscosity
Parameters incl. measurement values for diag-

nosis:
Table 73: Parameters of L-Vis 510 / 520 Ex
Product group
Mode
Speed low [1/Min] 1/min
Speed high [1/Min] 1/min
Meas. time low [s] s yes 65536 (maximum)

Meas. time high [s]
Adapting time [s] s yes 65536 (maximum)
180 C48IB001EN-Y
23 Troubleshooting

Service counter [days] days

VL 0 yes
VL 1 yes
VL 2 yes
VL 3 yes
VM 0 yes
VM 1 yes
VM 2 yes
VM3 yes
VH 0 yes
VH 1 yes
VH 2 yes
VH3 yes
Temp k0 yes
Temp k1 yes
Power up counter
Operating time [days] days
Service in [days] days
Power supply [V] V
Current [A] A
Speed [1/Min] 1/min
Motor power [W] W
Speed difference [1/Min] 1/min
Speed deviation [%] %
Distance
Distance difference
Temperature difference [°C] °C
Temperature [°C] °C
Quench temperature [°C] °C
Microchip temperature
C48IB001EN-Y 181
23 Troubleshooting
Error code
NAMUR state
CAN-Bus address
DI stop - polarity yes
DI stop - IsOutput
Hysteresis (automode) % yes
* The average filter size must always be 2 units smaller than the "medium filter size". If the median filter and
Table 74: L-Vis 510 / 520 Ex Error codes, - messages, - description
L-Vis 510
L-Vis 520 Ex NAMUR Autom.
Error Message Reason / Troubleshooting
Error Codes Status Reset
(decimal)
4097 0x01 Motor malfunction! Generic drive error

- Contact Anton Paar Service
4098 0x01 Motor malfunction Firmware issue, restart motor
4099 0x01 Motor speed deviation Motor speed uneven

error! - Check and clean the sensor
8706 0x01 Current high! Drive current high (> 2.5 A)

- Check wires and power supply
12801 0x01 Voltage low! Supply voltage low (< 20 V)

- Check power supply
12802 0x01 Voltage high! Supply voltage high (> 30 V)

- Check power supply
16641 0x01 Liquid temp. high! Liquid temperature too high

- Lower temperature or remove
instrument
20481 0x01 Power high! Drive power high

- Check and clean the sensor
20482 0x01 Temp. sensor failure in the Internal temperature sensor fail-
buffer fluid reservoir! ure
20483 0x01 Temp. sensor failure! Internal temperature sensor fail-

ure
20484 0x01 Deflection sensor failure! Deflection sensor failure

16641 0x01 Chip temp. too high! Electronics temperature too high
182 C48IB001EN-Y
23 Troubleshooting
Table 74: L-Vis 510 / 520 Ex Error codes, - messages, - description
L-Vis 510
L-Vis 520 Ex NAMUR Autom.
Error Message Reason / Troubleshooting
Error Codes Status Reset
(decimal)
33040 0x01 L-Vis error CAN communication error!.

Reset error manually or power off
- on. If error remains, contact
Anton Paar Service
33056 0x01 L-Vis error CAN communication error. Reset

error manually or power off - on.
If error remains, contact Anton
Paar Service
23.3.5 L-Rix Input Quantities, Parameters Input quantities:

and Error List
Name
L-Rix is connected via CAN Bus to mPDS 5. In ad-
Refractive index
dition it is possible to connect a signal to a digital in-
put of mPDS 5 to stop L-Rix. The input used can be NAMUR status
seen in the diagnosis window.
Temperature
Concentration
Error
L-Rix Stop - Input
Parameters incl. measurement values for diagnosis:
Table 75: Parameters of L-Rix
Error code
CAN bus address
Fit state
Curve state
QSigma 1
QSigma 2
QSigma 3
TIP 1
TIP 2
TIP 3
LedIntensityControlOutput
C48IB001EN-Y 183
23 Troubleshooting
Table 75: Parameters of L-Rix
Humidity %
Humidity temp. °C
LED current mA
LED temp. °C
XYZ temp. °C
PT100 ref. V
Raw RI nD
Supply voltage V
PT100 resistor Ohm
Product group
LED intensity %
LED intensity control
LED intensity KP
LedIntensityTN
LedIntensityControlStartPixel
LedIntensityControlEndPixel
Median filter size yes 1 ... 19, only odd values*
Average filter size yes 1 ... 19, only odd values*
DI Stop - IsOutput
DI Stop - Reverse Logic
*) "Average filter size" must always be 2 units smaller than the "Median filter size". If "Median filter size and
"Average filter size" are set to "1", both filters are deactivated.
Table 76: L-Rix - Error codes, - messages, - descriptions
L-Rix
Error NAMUR Autom.
Error message Reason/Troubleshooting
Codes status Reset
(decimal)
0x08 Maintenance Request! Relative humidity in optical system

Error! exceeds specifications.
Contact Anton Paar Service!
4144 0x04 RI Measurement failed! RI could not be calculated or X

no sample on sensor.
Check sample!
184 C48IB001EN-Y
23 Troubleshooting
L-Rix
Error NAMUR Autom.
Codes status Reset
(decimal)
4146 0x04 Not enough sample volume! The sample volume is not suff- X
iecient for measurement.
Check sample!
4147 0x04 RI out of Range! Measured RI is out ouf range. X

Check sample!
8739 0x04 LED Error! LED Hardware error X
12881 0x01 Line Temperature Sensor Line temperature could not be

Error! measured.
12896 0x04 Voltage below DC 20 V Supply voltage out of specified X

range.
Check power supply!
12897 0x04 Voltage above DC 30 V Supply voltage out of specified X

range.
Check power supply!
16400 0x04 Line Temperature below Line temperature out of specifica- X

-20 °C! tion.
Check Line!
16401 0x04 Line Temperature above Line temperature out of specifica- X

100°C! tion.
Check Line!
16464 0x01 LED Temperature above Temperature on LED Board above

100°C! 100°C (212 F).
Check Line!
20498 0x01 Line Temperature Sensor Line temperature could not be

Error! measured.
20499 0x01 Line Temperature Sensor Line temperature sensor is defect.

Error! Contact Anton Paar Service!
20513 0x01 Sensor Error! Sensor hardware error.

20514 0x04 LED Error! LED intensity could not be set. X

Check for interfering extraneous
light sources.
20544 0x01 Humidity Sensor Dropout! Communication to humidity sensor

failed.
C48IB001EN-Y 185
23 Troubleshooting
L-Rix
Error NAMUR Autom.
Codes status Reset
(decimal)
20563 0x01 LED Temperature Sensor LED temperature could not be

Error! measured.
Contact Anton Paar Service
20564 0x01 Lens Temperature Sensor Lens temperature could not be

Error! measured.
20578 0x04 Supply Voltage Measure- Supply voltage could not be mea-
ment Error! sured.
24864 0x01 Sensor Error Sensor hardware error
25381 0x01 LED Intensity Error LED intensity could not be set.
25393 0x01 Optical Error Error in the optical system.

33040 0x01 L-Rix Error CAN communication error!. Reset

Service
33056 0x01 L-Rix Error CAN communication error. Reset

Service
23.3.6 Oxy 510/5100 Input Quantities, TIP: Some parameters/messages/etc. apply to the
Oxy 510 only and some to the Oxy 5100, exclusive-
Parameters and Error List ly. In these cases there is an extra hint in the manu-
al. In most cases there is no difference between the
Oxy 510/5100 is connected via CAN Bus to mPDS Oxy 510 and Oxy 5100.
5. In addition it is possible to connect a signal to a
digital input of mPDS 5 to stop Oxy 510/5100. The
input used can be seen in the diagnosis window.
186 C48IB001EN-Y
23 Troubleshooting
Input quantities:
Table 77: Input Quantities
Name Oxy 510 Oxy 5100 Description
Concentration x x Displays dissolved oxygen concentration.

This input quantity is only available when the
measuring mode "Dissolved Oxygen" is chosen.
NAMUR status x x
Temperature x x
Error x x
Signal Amplitude x x
Phase Shift x x
Oxy 510 Stop - Input x x
Remaining cap life [%] x x Refer to the description in the Oxy 510 or the
Oxy 5100 instruction manual
Sensor cap SN x x
Gas Concentration [ppm] x Displays the oxygen concentration in the gas

phase.This input quantity is only available when
the measuring mode "Gas phase" is chosen.
Partial Pressure [hPa] x Displays the partial pressure of oxygen in fluids.

This input quantity is only available when the
measuring mode "Oxygen partial pressure" is
chosen.
Remaining Cap Life [d] x Displays the remaining cap life in days.
Cap CIP/SIP Count x
Cap Pulse Count x
C48IB001EN-Y 187
23 Troubleshooting
Parameters inc. measurement values for diagnosis:
Table 78: Parameters of Oxy 510/5100
Edit- Oxy Oxy

Name Unit Range/Explanation
able 510 5100
Max. cap CIP/SIP cycles yes This parameter allows the optimization x
of the Life Time Estimator (LTE) perfor-
mance. The optimization instructions
are given in the Instruction Manual and
Safety Information for Oxy 5100, Chap-
ter "Exchanging the Sensor Cap
according to the Life Time Estimator".
Min. CIP/SIP temp °C yes The Oxy 5100 switches off automati- x
cally if the line temperature exceeds
70 °C or the min. CIP/SIP temperature
(whichever is lower). Therefore the
parameter "Min. CIP/SIP temp" must be
set according to the real CIP/SIP and
production data. The sensor automati-
cally goes back to operation when the
temperature decreases 3 °C below the
switch-off temperature.
The "Min. CIP/SIP temp" is the thresh-

old temperature to detect a CIP/SIP
cycle and increase the CIP/SIP counter.
Correct detection of CIP/SIP cycles is
important for the proper function of the
LTE.
For details and graphical instruction

refer to the Instruction Manual and
ter "Automatic Switch"
Total CIP/SIP time min yes This parameter is used to protect the x
sensor cap during a cold CIP phase
(i.e. @ temperatures below "Min. CIP/
SIP temp"). A delay time is set to keep
the sensor disabled after cooling down.
ter "Automatic Switch"
The total CIP/SIP time only becomes
active if a CIP/SIP is detected. Hence
the parameter "Min. CIP/SIP temp" and
"Min. CIP/SIP time" must be set cor-
rectly.
Note: "The total CIP/SIP time" will only

become active if a CIP/SIP is detected.
For this purpose the parameters "Min.
CIP/SIP temp" and "Min. CIP/SIP time"
must be set correctly.
188 C48IB001EN-Y
23 Troubleshooting
Edit- Oxy Oxy

able 510 5100
Min. CIP/SIP time min yes This is the min. time which the line tem- x
perature must be above the "Min. Cip/
SIP temp" to detect a CIP/SIP cycle. So
it can be prevented that short hot water
flushes will be detected as CIP/SIP.
This parameter is important for correct
function of the Life time Estimator
(LTE).

ter "Configuration for Hot Water Flush
Applications".
Sensor cap SN Serial number of the sensor cap x x
Sensor type 2... Wide Range x x

3... Trace Range
6... Ultra Trace Range
Remaining cap life [%] % Please refer to the Instruction Manual x x

and Safety Information for Oxy 510 and
Oxy 5100.
Remaining cap life [d] d Estimation of the remaining cap life in x

days
Cap CIP/SIP cycles Detected cap CIP/SIP cycles. x x

Oxy 5100: This parameter allows
empirical optimization of the Life Time
Estimator (LTE) performance. For a
correct detection the parameter "Min.
CIP/SIP temp" and "Min. CIP/SIP time"
must be set according the real CIP/SIP
process data.
Measuring mode yes 0... Dissolved Oxygen (default setting x

for measuring in liquids)
1... Gas phase (default setting for mea-
suring in gas)
2... Oxygen partial pressure (choose
this setting to enable measuring of
"Partial pressure" in liquids)
C48IB001EN-Y 189
23 Troubleshooting
Edit- Oxy Oxy

able 510 5100
Measure interval ms yes 1000... 360 000 x x

Make sure to set the measurement
interval so that the sensor cap's life
time cycles will be optimized and that
reasonable measurement values will be
provided after process changes. The
oxygen concentration is typically a slow
changing process and therefore mea-
surement interval of 15 seconds is rec-
ommended (default setting). If you
change the measurement interval,
always clear the history data (refer to
Instruction Manual and Safety Informa-
tion for Oxy 510 - Chapter "Clear his-
tory function")
Start-up phase s yes 0 ... 7200 s (=0...2h) The Oxy 510/5100 x x

uses the shorter "Start-up (measure)
interval for the first Start-up phase sec-
onds.
TIP The increased measure interval will
be active after switching from Product 0
to a certain product and also after CIP.
It will not be active after switching from
one Product to another. Default: 0
Start-up interval ms yes 1000 ... 360,000; This parameter x x

defines the measure interval during the
start-up phase. Default 1000 ms
Median filter size* yes 1 ... 19, only odd values* x x
Average filter size* yes x x
Salinity per yes 0 ... 1000 required for special applica- x x

mil tions.
The solubility of gases (oxygen) in
water usually decreases by the addition
of other solutes, particularly electrolytes
(e.g. NaCl). For special applications it
may be necessary to enter a correct
salt concentration in [per mil]. Salt in [g]
per 1000 g of liquid.
Source of line pressure yes Only relevant for measuring mode x

"Gasphase"
0... Pressure sensor connected to the
analog input of the Oxy 5100
1... Line pressure stored (only applica-
ble if the line pressure is constant)
190 C48IB001EN-Y
23 Troubleshooting
Edit- Oxy Oxy

able 510 5100
Line pressure stored mbar yes Only necessary for measuring mode x
(abs.) "Gasphase". Applicable if the line pres-
sure is constant, otherwise a pressure
sensor is needed.
Pressure 20 mA (abs.) mbar yes Scaling of the analog input for the pres- x
sure sensor. Only necessary for mea-
suring mode "Gasphase".
Pressure 4 mA (abs) mbar yes Scaling of the anlaog input for the pres- x
sure sensor. Only necessary for mea-
suring mode "Gasphase".
AI Curr Analog input current of the optional x

pressure sensor. Only necessary for
measuring mode "Gasphase".
AI Pressure Pressure value of the sensor connected x

to the analog input. Only necessary for
measuring mode "Gasphase".
Statemaster disabled yes In some applications (e.g. cleaning with x

hot water) the calculation of the life time
of a sensor cap is not correct. There-
fore it is possible to deactivate the
Statemaster feature. The customer
must check the correct function of the
Oxy regularly by comparing the results
with a reference method.
0 ... Statemaster active
1 ... Statemaster inactive
TIP From version 6.30 it is possible to
define the percentage of hot water rins-
ing cycles in order to improve the
remaining cap life calculation.
See above explanation for the parame-
ter "Relative CIP rate"
NAMUR state x x
Error code x x
SB version x x
SB serial x x
SB temperature °C x x
Case temperature °C x x
Compensation tempera- °C x x
ture
Operating hours h x x
Voltage supply V x x
C48IB001EN-Y 191
23 Troubleshooting
Edit- Oxy Oxy

able 510 5100
Voltage sensor V x x
Critical SB temperature x x
occurrence
Memory state SB x x
Power on self test x x
CAN Bus baud rate x x
dPHhi1 x x
dPHhi2 x x
m x x
dKSV1 x x
dKSV2 x x
f1 x x
Cal. 2nd point integer x x

part
Cal. 2nd point decimal x x

part
Cal. 2nd O2 unit x x

(0=% a.s. and 1=% O2)
Calibration temperature °C x x
1st
Calibration phase angle ° x x

1st
Calibration temperature °C x x
2nd
Calibration phase angle ° x x

2nd
Pressure of calibration hPa x x
Calibration type gas x x
Signal LED current mA x x
Reference LED current mA x x
Internal memory write x x

mode
Inactive after hot CIP min yes 0 ... 120, if cold CIP is applied; after hot x
CIP the sensor may be switched off for
a certain time after hot CIP. This pre-
vents damages of the sensor cap.
192 C48IB001EN-Y
23 Troubleshooting
Edit- Oxy Oxy

able 510 5100
Cap adjustment set yes 0 ... 1 x x
Relative CIP rate yes 0 ... 1 x

For some applications (e.g. cleaning
with hot water without any cleaning
agents) the calculation of the remaining
service life of a sensor cap is not cor-
rect. The cap’s service life is not influ-
enced by hot water rinsing cycles
("HotWaterCycles"). As the Oxy 510/
5100 interprets each cycle with a tem-
perature of > 43 °C as CIP, the remain-
ing service life is not calculated
correctly without knowing the ratio of
hot water cycles compared with true
CIP cycles ("CIPCycles; using acids
and alkalies):
Relative CIP rate = CIPCycles / (Hot-
WaterCycles+CIPCycles)
Example: 2 CIPCycles per week; 7 hot
water rinsing cycles per week
Relative CIP Rate: 2/9 = 0.22
Cap pulse counts x x
Rescan success
DI Stop - IsOutput x x
DI Stop - Reverse logic yes true/false x x
Error code x x
C48IB001EN-Y 193
23 Troubleshooting
Table 79: Oxy 510/5100 - Error codes, - messages, - descriptions
Oxy 510/5100
NAMUR Autom.
Error Codes Error message Reason/Troubleshooting
Status Reset
decimal
4096-4101 0x04 Sensor block error: Con- Power on - off, if error remains, x
tact Anton Paar Contact Anton Paar Service
4102 0x04 Signal amplitude low: Received amplitude signal from x

Oxy 510 only Check/exchange sensor sensor cap is too low,
cap possible reasons
- Measurement is out of the
specified range
- Sensor cap is worn out
Check if inside the specified mea-
surement range - refer to typical
concentrations, alternatively per-
form a reference measurement. If
the actual DO concentration is
inside the measurement range, it
is necessary to replace the sensor
cap.
4103 0x04 Exchange sensor cap! The sensor cap has reached the x
end of its recommended service
Oxy 510 only life. The accuracy and the quality
of the measurement can no longer
be guaranteed to be within specifi-
cation.
This warning can be reset, how-
ever, it will return after each hot
CIP/SIP and after the sensor is
restarted. The cap request notifi-
cation will not affect the Oxy 510
performance - the sensor will con-
tinue to measure. To disable the
warning the sensor cap must be
exchanged or the Statemaster
feature must be deactivated.
4104-41016, 0x04 Sensor block error: Con- Power on - off, if error remains, x
41018 tact Anton Paar Contact Anton Paar Service
4117 0x04 No sensor cap detected: No cap mounted or toolmaster x

Check sensor cap defective
4119-4121 0x04 Sensor cap error: Check No cap mounted or toolmaster x

sensor cap defective; if error remains,
8448 0x04 Sensor block error Power on - off, if error remains,

8480 0x01 Pressure sensor analog Check functionality of pressure x

Oxy 5100 only input is out of valid range sensor output
194 C48IB001EN-Y
23 Troubleshooting
Oxy 510/5100
NAMUR Autom.
Status Reset
decimal
12896 0x04 Supply voltage is below Check power supply (> DC 20 V) x

DC 20 V. Check the power
supply! Voltage must be
between 20 V and 30 V!
Mind the power consump-
tion!
12897 0x04 Supply voltage is above Check power supply (< DC 30 V) x

DC 30 V. Check the power
supply! Voltage between
must be 20 and 30V! Mind
the power consumption!
16385 0x04 Line temperature below Line temperature < -5 °C: beyond x
limit! measurement range
16386 0x04 Line temperature above The Oxy 510/5100 automatically x

limit! switches off when the line tem-
perature exceeds the limit (for
Oxy 510 > 43°C, for Oxy 5100 >
70°C). The sensor automatically
goes back to operation when the
temperature is reduced below the
limit (for Oxy 510 < 40°C, for Oxy
5100 < 67°C).
16387 0x01 Line temperature sensor Line temperature sensor defect;

failure: Contact Anton Contact Anton Paar Service
Paar.
16391 0x04 Case temperature below Ambient temperature too low x

limit
16392 0x04 Case temperature above Ambient temperature too high x

limit
16393 0x04 Sensor block temperature Ambient temperature too low x

below limit
16400 0x04 Sensor block temperature Sensor block temperature too x

above limit high! Reduce line and/or ambient
temperature
16401 0x01 Sensor block temperature Sensor block temperature sensor

sensor failure: Contact defect; Contact Anton Paar Ser-
Anton Paar vice
C48IB001EN-Y 195
23 Troubleshooting
Oxy 510/5100
NAMUR Autom.
Status Reset
decimal
end of its recommended service
Oxy 510 only life. The accuracy and the quality
of the measurement can no longer
be guaranteed to be within specifi-
cation. This warning can be reset,
however, it will return after each
hot CIP/SIP and after the sensor
is restarted. The cap request noti-
fication will not affect the Oxy 510
performance - the sensor will con-
tinue measuring. To disable the
warning the sensor cap must be
exchanged or the Statemaster
feature must be deactivated.
20489 0x01 Sensor block dropout: Sensor block defect;

Contact Anton Paar Contact Anton Paar Service
end of its life time. The sensor cap
Oxy 5100 only must be exchanged.
20499, 20500 0x04 The sensor cap will soon The sensor cap will soon reach x
reach the end of its life- the end of its life time:
Oxy 5100 only time! Exchange sensor
cap soon! 1. Make sure a replacement cap is
available. If not, sensor caps are
available from Anton Paar web-
shop shop.anton-paar.com
2. Check if the remaining cap life

estimation shows 0% (0 days). If
not, you can optimize the remain-
ing life time estimation. Do this by
setting the value of the "max. CIP/
SIP cycles" to the actual "Cap
CIP/SIP cycles" value.
Note: The optimization must be

done before exchanging the sen-
sor cap and before the error mes-
sage "Exchange sensor cap!"
occurs.
3. Exchange the sensor cap.
20501 0x01 Exchange sensor cap! The sensor cap has reached the
end of its life time. The sensor cap
Oxy 5100 only must be exchanged.
196 C48IB001EN-Y
23 Troubleshooting
Oxy 510/5100
NAMUR Autom.
Status Reset
decimal
20502 0x04 CIP/SIP in progress: Mea- The measurement is deactivated x

surement is deactivated to to increase cap lifetime. This
Oxy 5100 only increase cap lifetime warning activates when "min. CIP/
SIP temp" is reached and remains
active for the duration of the "Total
CIP/SIP time (Fig. 141.below this
table)
20504 0x04 There is a newer sensor- The current sensor cap has a x
cap version available. limited temperature range
Oxy 5100 only Limited temperature range < 40 °C.
< 40°C. There is a newer sensor cap ver-
sion available from shop.anton-
paar.com
Oxy 510 only 0x08 Sensor cap: <10% life- The sensor cap will soon reach x
span left the end of its recommended ser-
vice life. Make sure that a replace-
ment cap is available. If not,
sensor caps are available from
the shop.anton-paar.com
33040 0x01 Oxy error CAN communication error!. Reset

Service
33056 0x01 Oxy error CAN communication error. Reset

Service
Fig. 141: Deactivated measurement to increase the life time of the cap
C48IB001EN-Y 197
23 Troubleshooting
23.4 Carbo 2100/Inline/2100 MVE 23.4.2 Input Quantities

Diagnosis All Carbos have the same input quantities. In case
of a malfunction it is important to understand the
Tap <Menu> and select "Service > Diagnosis" meaning of the different quantities.
<Details> and tap the different buttons in the buttons
area. In Chapter 23.4 "Carbo" is used for "Carbo
2100/Inline/2100 MVE" to make the text easier to
read.
23.4.1 Connectors
Each Carbo needs 2 analog inputs ("Temperature"
and "Pressure") and 2 digital outputs ("Valve" and
"Impeller"). One digital input ("Stop") must be used
to stop Carbo when the line is empty to prevent Car-
bo from running dry.
Fig. 143: Input quantities, 1st page
Fig. 142: Default connectors for a Carbo 2100 (MVE)/

Inline
Table 80: Input quantities Carbo 2100 (MVE) / Inline
Name Description
AI Pressure Current pressure in [bar]
AI Temperature Current at the analog input for temperature
CO2 Carbo Pressure CO2 concentration in [Pa]. Commonly used for sparkling wines
CO2 Carbo CO2 concentration in [g/l]
CO2 Package CO2 Carbo value in [g/l] adjusted to the results from the laboratory (bottle/
package CO2 content)
Error Error code from Carbo. Error messages are the same as before (mPDS
2000V3). If there are several error messages they are added and give a
resulting error code. E.g. Error=21 means errors 1, 4 and 16. For details see
table 81
Impeller Display For internal use
Pressure Current pressure
198 C48IB001EN-Y
23 Troubleshooting
Table 80: Input quantities Carbo 2100 (MVE) / Inline
Name Description
Pressure Gas Gas pressure used for the calculation of the CO2 concentration.
Pressure Line Pressure measured when the Carbo measuring chamber is open. Therefore
this is the line pressure. "Pressure Line" should be at least 0.5 bar higher than
the "Pressure Gas" to keep the CO2 in solution.
DI Stop Status of the input used to stop the Carbo when the line is empty.
Temperature Carbo temperature calculated by mPDS 5
Valve Display For internal use
TIP: For internal reasons several values are listed twice.
Table 81: Error codes Carbo 2100 (MVE) / Inline
Error
Description
No.
1 Valve error (Pressure Gas

> = Pressure Line - 0.05)
2 Concentration out of range

(CO2 Carbo > 20 g/l)
4 Pressure Gas out of range

(< 0 bar or > 10 bar)
8 Temperature Carbo out of range

(< -5°C or > 120 °C)
16 Pressure Line out of range Fig. 144: Input quantities Carbo 2100 (MVE) / Inline, 2nd
(< 0 bar or > 10 bar) page
32 Carbo stopped via external digital

input
64 No dissolved CO2 or degassing error

(impeller/oscillator defective)
128 Air (measuring chamber filled with air)
Fig. 145: Input quantities Carbo 2100 (MVE) / Inline, 3rd

page
C48IB001EN-Y 199
23 Troubleshooting
23.4.3 Output Quantities

Carbos are controlled by mPDS 5 via 2 digital out-
puts (for valves and impeller/oscillator). The current
state of these outputs can be viewed in this window.
Fig. 148: Parameters Carbo 2100 (MVE) / Inline, 2nd

page.
Fig. 146: Output Quantities Carbo 2100 (MVE) / Inline
23.4.4 Parameters
Carbo parameters are typically set by Anton Paar
before delivery.
Fig. 149: Parameters Carbo 2100 (MVE) / Inline, 3rd

page
Fig. 147: Parameters Carbo 2100 (MVE) / Inline, 1st

page
Fig. 150: Parameters Carbo 2100 (MVE) / Inline, 4th

page
200 C48IB001EN-Y
23 Troubleshooting
23.5 L-Dens 7000, L-Sonic 5100/6100, TIP: Note that a CAN sensor must be disconnected
from power for at least one minute before it can be
L-Com 5500 connected to the network again. Otherwise the firm-
ware of the sensor does not run correctly, possibly
CAN sensors (Smart Sensors and L-Dens 7000 overflowing mPDS 5 with error messages causing a
sensors from Anton Paar) report their status using crash or unpredictable errors of mPDS 5.
the NAMUR status via the CAN lines.
If a CAN sensor, which was connected to the CAN
network but not switched on at the time mPDS 5
Bit 7...5 started, is switched on later it is automatically inte-
Bit 4 Initializing or measurement values grated in the network.
invalid If a CAN sensor is not connected to the CAN net-
work, when mPDS 5 starts up it is necessary to re-
Bit 3 Maintenance request
boot mPDS 5 after the CAN sensor has been
connected.
Bit 2 Out of specification There is no collision detection for CAN sensors with
Bit 1 Function check identical CAN addresses. mPDS 5 expects each
CAN sensor to have a unique address. Firmware
Bit 0 Failure updates have to be carried out via Menu "Service >
Update > Module Firmware". Use the latest firm-
Errors are reported in the message list. All errors ex- ware version for all sensors. All CAN error messag-
cept 'Initializing' can be reset. es are listed in Chapter 22.5.
Tapping "reset" causes a sensor to be initialized. A CAN sensor errors which have the NAMUR status
sensor failure (no "Heartbeat") can cause the follow- "failure" (bit 0 = "1") are not reset automatically and
ing: typically all measurement values of the CAN sensor
are set to "0". CAN sensor errors which have the
NAMUR status "Out of specification" (bit 2 = "1") are
- Error message that a node has failed
reset automatically as soon as the conditions for the
- All measuring quantities related to a node
error are not true.
are set to "inactive"
- All functions of mPDS 5 not related to the
CAN sensor keep running normally. 23.5.1 Connectors
L-Dens 7000, L-Sonic 5100/6100, L-Com 5500 are
A failing CAN sensor, which starts to work properly
connected via CAN Bus to mPDS 5. The "Slot"
in the CAN network ("Heartbeat" is OK), causes the
(=CAN node ID) is listed when you press the button
following reactions:
<Connectors> in the diagnosis window.
- Error message that a node has failed is

deleted In addition it is possible to connect a signal to a dig-
- All measuring quantities related to a node ital input of mPDS 5 to stop the sensor. The input
are set to "active" used can be seen in the diagnosis window.
- mPDS 5 is running normally
23.5.2 L-Dens 7000 Input quantities
Name Comment
L-D Temp PCB
Density
L-D Quality
C48IB001EN-Y 201
23 Troubleshooting
Name Comment
L-D Error
L-D Flow This is the signal derived from the Flow Monitor directly connected to the sen-
sor board of L-Dens or L-Com
L-D Flowstop If "Use Flowstop" = True then this is the inverted L-D Flow signal otherwise
this value is always 0 ("false")
L-D Hold If "Use Hold" = True then this is the inverted L-D Flow signal otherwise this
value is always 0 ("false")
L-D Pump mA
L-D Pump mA
L-D Pump mA Raw
L-D NAMUR State
L-D Period
L-D Phase
L-D Phase SD
L-D Phase SD Raw
L-D Pickup V
L-D Pickup V Raw
L-D Pressure
L-D Temp
L-D Temp Diff
L-D Temp Diff Raw
23.5.3 L-Sonic 5500/5600 Input Quantities
Name Name
L-S Amp Ratio Sound Vel
L-S Error L-S Quality
L-S Temp L-S Run Time
L-S Namur State DI Stop
23.5.4 L-Com 5500 Input Quantities

The Input quantities of the L-Com are a combination of all input quantities of the L-Dens 7000 and the L-
Sonic 5100/6100. See corresponding tables above.
202 C48IB001EN-Y
23 Troubleshooting
23.5.5 Editable parameters

The L-Com uses all parameters of the following list, the L-Dens and the L-Sonic only part of the list. Some
parameters are related to the integrated sample pump (ISP) and have no function if the ISP is not installed.
Parameter "Integrated Sample Pump" ... "0" or "1".
Name Unit Range/Default/Comments
Use FlowStop - 0 ... 1 (1 ... The flowstop signal is derived from the Flow Monitor
directly connected to the sensor board)
Use Hold - 0 ... 1 (1 ... The hold signal is derived from the flowstop signal com-
ing from the Flow Monitor directly connected to the sensor board
DI Stop - Polarity of the stop input
Pressure Sensor - 0 ... 1 (1 ... Pressure sensor connected)
Pressure 4mA - Pressure which equals 4 mA
Pressure 20mA - Pressure which equals 20 mA
Integrated Sample - 0 ... 1 (1 ... sample pump connected)
Pump
Pump Speed [%] % Default: 45 % ; do not change!
Dry Run Waiting Time s Default: 60; 0 ... 600 (E.g. if 60 is set dry run conditions must be
detected for 60 seconds before the integrated sample pump is
stopped)
Dry Run Attempts - Default: 30; 0 ... 100 (e.g. "10" means that the pump tries to start 10
times. Under dry conditions the pumps stops after 10x60 seconds
by default and must be restarted manually or via product change
over)
L-D Pump Lo mA Lower limit used to detect a dry run. Default: 200, do not change!
L-D Pump Hi mA Upper current limit to detect motor faults. This limit protects the
motor from being damaged. Default: 850, do not change!
Pressure Gain
Pressure Offset
DA
DB
DA1
DA2
DB1
DP1
DP2
DP3
DP4
pref
C48IB001EN-Y 203
23 Troubleshooting
Name Unit Range/Default/Comments
CH0_R0
CH0_A
CH0_B
CH1_R0
CH1_A
CH1_B
Density Gain Default: 1
Density Offset kg/m³ Default: 0
Sound Velocity Gain Default:1
Sound Velocity Offset m/s Default:0
SA
SA1
SB
SB1
T1R0
T1A
T1B
T2R0
T2A
T2B
23.5.6 Error / Warning Messages

The L-Com consists of an L-Dens of the series 7000 and an L-Sonic 5500/5600, so the error messages and
warnings of the L-Dens and the L-Sonic apply to the L-Com as well.
204 C48IB001EN-Y
23 Troubleshooting
States of the L-Dens 7000 Series / L-Sonic 5500/5600
Table 82: States of the L-Dens/L-Sonic
NAMUR
Condition Description Consequence
Status
Normal opera- 0x00 ----

tion
Warning A sensor parameter is outside the 0x04 A warning is automatically

specification, but the sensor still deleted when the out of spec
works and provides a measuring condition is removed.
value. The measuring value may be
out of specification.
Error Sensor failure 0x01 The sensor will stay in this

Measurement is stopped condition until the error is
Density readout: "NaN" (invalid). reset. Use the mPDS 5, Pico
The temperature readout is main- 3000 (HMI or Software) to
tained unless the error is caused by reset the error.
the temperature sensors.
Warning Codes: L-Dens 7000 Series
Table 83: Warning Codes - L-Dens 7000
Code
decimal Condition Cause Solution
(hexadec.)
4098 Density mea- Density readout < 0 or >3000 kg/m³

(1002) suring error due to:
• Incorrect adjustment constants • Compare adjustment con-
stants to sensor protocol
and correct constants
• Abnormal liquid properties or • Restore standard operat-
operating conditions ing conditions
8448 p AI: Current • Incorrect Sensor configuration: • Match sensor configuration

(2100) < 3.8 mA Pressure sensor expected but no and hardware configura-
pressure sensor connected tion.
• Output current of pressure sensor • Contact Anton Paar for
< 3.8 mA due to malfunction replace pressure sensor.
8449 p AI: Current Output current of pressure sensor Contact Anton Paar for replace
(2101) > 20.5 mA > 20.5 mA due to malfunction pressure sensor.
12289 Supply voltage Supply voltage at sensor terminal

(3001) too low <19 VDC due to:
• Power supply voltage too low • Increase supply voltage to
DC 24 V
• Voltage drop along cable too large • Reduce cable length or
increase cable cross sec-
tion
C48IB001EN-Y 205
23 Troubleshooting
Table 83: Warning Codes - L-Dens 7000
Code
(hexadec.)
12290 Supply voltage The supply voltage of the sensor is Check power supply.
(3002) too high above 29 V.
8960 Pump current Power consumption of integrated

(2300) too low sample pump < 15 mA due to
• Broken cable • Check cabeling
• Defective pump • Contact Anton Paar for
replacing the integrated
pump
8961 Pump current Power consumption of integrated

(2301) too high sample pump > 1 A due to
• Too high viscosity of liquid • Get the viscosity of liquid
into the specified range
• Defective pump • Contact Anton Paar for
replacing the integrated
pump.
16384 Process temp. Temperature of the measured liquid Get temperature of liquid into
(4000) too low is < - 40 °C the specified range.
Density and temperature readout
inaccurate
16385 Process temp. • Temperature of the measured liq- Get temperature of liquid into
(4001) too high uid is > +147 °C the specified range.
• Density and temperature readout
inaccurate
Error Codes: L-Dens 7000 Series
Table 84: Error codes - L-Dens 7000
Code
(hexadec.)
8602 Dry run of A dry run was detected and the inte- Fill product!
(2302) pump grated sample pump was stopped
16387 Temperature • Connection between sensor Contact Anton Paar for

(4003) sensor error board and temperature sensor replacement of the sensor
defective board
• Electronics error
20496 ADC error: Electronics error Contact Anton Paar for

(5010) pressure replacement of the sensor
board
206 C48IB001EN-Y
23 Troubleshooting
Table 84: Error codes - L-Dens 7000
Code
(hexadec.)
20497 ADC error: volt- Electronics error Contact Anton Paar for
(5011) age replacement of the sensor
board
20498 ADC error: Electronics error Contact Anton Paar for

(5012) temperature replacement of the sensor
board
20499 ADC error: cur- Electronics error Contact Anton Paar for
(5013) rent pump replacement of the sensor
board
Warning Codes: L-Sonic 5500/5600
Table 85: Warning codes - L-Sonic
Code
(hexadec.)
12289 Supply voltage Supply voltage at sensor terminal

(3001) too low <19 VDC due to:
"Power supply voltage too low
• Increase supply voltage to
"Voltage drop along cable too large
DC 24 V
• Reduce cable length or
tion
12290 Supply voltage The supply voltage of the sensor is Check power supply
(3002) too high above 29 V.
16384 Process temp. • Temperature of the measured liq- Get temperature of

(4000) too low uid is < - 25 °C liquid into the specified range
• Sound velocity and temperature
readout inaccurate
16385 Process temp. • Temperature of the measured liq- Get temperature of

(4001) too high uid is > +147 °C liquid into the specified range
• Sound velocity and temperature
readout inaccurate
C48IB001EN-Y 207
23 Troubleshooting
Error Codes: L-Sonic 5500/5600
Table 86: Error codes - L-Sonic
Code
(hexadec.)
16387 Temperature • Connection between sensor Contact Anton Paar for

(4003) sensor error board and temperature sensor replacement of the
defective sensor board
• Electronics error
20497 ADC error: volt- Electronics error Contact Anton Paar for
(5011) age replacement of the
sensor board
20498 ADC error: Electronics error • Increase supply voltage to

(5012) temperature DC 24 V
• Reduce cable length or
tion
23.5.7 L-Dens 7000 Firmware Checksum Input Quantities:
Certain versions of the L-Dens (Firmware/Hard- Name

ware) are certified according to OIML.
Beer Color [EBC]
Among other details the OIML certificate specifies
the firmware and a corresponding check sum to Beer Color Turb.Comp. [EBC]
make sure that the sensor at hand is equipped with
the correct firmware. Absorbance 1 [AU]
The checksum of an L-Dens 7000 sensor can be Absorbance 2 [AU]

called up via the menu "Service > Diagnosis ..... >
Details > Parameters. Absorbance 3 [AU]
Error
23.6 L-Col 6100: Input Quantities, NAMUR state
Parameters and Error List Rel. Absorbance 1 [%]
The L-Col 6100 is connected via the dedicated UV/ Rel. Absorbance 2 [%]
Vis board (RS485) to the mPDS 5.
Rel. Absorbance 3 [%]
CAN address of the UV/Vis board is "99", Slot="-1".
The L-Col 6100 is available with different LEDs for 1
… 3 different wavelengths. So some of the parame-
ters listed below may be "inactive".
208 C48IB001EN-Y
23 Troubleshooting
Parameters including measurement values for diagnosis:
Pre-defined Error Field
CAN Bus Address 99
CAN Bus Baud Rate
Slot Number
Zero Offset Absorbance 1 AU yes -10 … 10(default=0)
Optical Path Length [mm] mm yes 2 … 100 (default=5mm)
Humidity %
Operating hours h
Turbidity Compensation Weight yes 0.1 … 10 (default … 1)
Temperature °C
"L-Col Error" available for L-Col 6100
L-Col Error Description
0 OK
1 ... 255 NAMUR status if none of the below errors is submitted by L-Col 6100
All other values One of the below error codes from L-Col 6100 (see table 87)
Error Messages
Table 87: Error codes L-Col 6100
L-Col 6100
Namur Autom.
Error Codes Error Message Reason
Status Reset
Decimal (Hex)
24577d 0x01 The Default settings have

(6001h) been reloaded.
24579d 0x01 Checksum Error in expert - Electromagnetic mal-

(6003h) data. function
- Defect in the elec-
tronic system
24580d (6004h) 0x01 Checksum Error in user - Electromagnetic mal-

data. function
tronic system
C48IB001EN-Y 209
23 Troubleshooting
L-Col 6100
Namur Autom.
Status Reset
Decimal (Hex)
24581d (6005h) 0x01 Checksum Error in display - Electromagnetic mal-

data. function
tronic system
24639d (603Fh) 0x01 Wrong software version on

sensor.
24592d (6010h) 0x01 An internal analog voltage is

out of range.
24593d (6011h) 0x01 A calculation error occurred.

Division by zero or value out
of range
24595d (6013h) 0x01 No signal from Light Source Defective light source!
1 Contact service techni-
cian
cian
cian
24653d (604Dh) 0x01 The relative humidity in the There are 2 humidity
device is above 50 %. sensors - one in each
Check the screw connection part of the sensor. This
of the calibration slit. error message is based
on the average value of
both sensors. Always
replace the desiccant
cartridges in both parts.
20489d (5009h) 0x01 Communication Error,

Check sensor connection
cable.
6002h (24578d) 0x04 An internal error occurred. X

The sensor has been
restarted.
24601d (6019h) 0x04 Voltage out of tolerance, X

check the power supply.
24603d (601Bh) 0x04 Adjustment failed X
24605d (601Dh) 0x04 Temperature in the device is X

above 65 °C. Check ambient The medium or ambient
temperature. temperature is too high.
210 C48IB001EN-Y
23 Troubleshooting
L-Col 6100
Namur Autom.
Status Reset
Decimal (Hex)
24606d (601Eh) 0x04 Humidity in transmitter or - The desiccant is satu- X

receiver is close to the limit. rated.
Check the screw connection - The seals on the
of the calibration slit. electronic compo-
nent are defective.
- The instrument was
open for a long
period.
24617d (6029h) 0x04 The temperature sensor Contact Anton Paar Ser- X
failed. vice
20496d (5010h) 0x04 Communication Error, X

Check sensor connection
cable.
39321d (9999h) 0x04 An unknown error occured. X
C48IB001EN-Y 211
23 Troubleshooting
23.7 CAN Error Messages

Table 88: CAN error messages mPDS 5
Message Explanation Possible cause
Error #5 Invalid (too old) configuration
Error #9 A board (CAN sensor) is missing (slot is

empty)
Error #11 There is a board in a slot not matching the

configuration stored on the embedded com-
puter module
Error #12 There is a board in a slot not matching the

configuration stored on the embedded com-
puter module
Error #19 A board (CAN sensor) is not accessible Wrong wiring of external CAN smart
because e.g. it has been pulled out sensors
Error #21 A board (CAN sensor) reports an error
Error #22 CAN open Initialisation failed Shortcut of CAN line H/L/GND
Error #30 Start- Stop- or Reset command from WinCE- Wrong wiring of external CAN smart
Master failed sensors
212 C48IB001EN-Y
Appendix A: mPDS 5 Menu Structure
Adjustments Laboratory Adjustment

Manual Adjustment
Reset Adjustment
Data Memory Audit Trail

Measurement Data Export
Product Settings
Setup Control Panel Date and Time

Regional Settings
Network
Instrument Name and
Location
Calibrate Touch Screen
Display Brightness
Davis 5 Interaction Settings
PROFIBUS Settings*
Unit Settings
Product Type Settings Product type selection Analog Output

Configuration
Alarm Configuration
Channel Settings
User functions
Fieldbus input data block
configuration
Line Configuration
Sensor and I/O
Management
External Error Status
User Management
Operator Permissions
Audit Trail
Unlock Service
C48IB001EN-Y 213
Service Backup Instrument

Settings
Restore Instrument
Settings
Update System Update

Module Firmware Update
Install Language Pack
Logging Configuration
Export User Function
Import User Function
Live Raw Data

Diagnosis
System Information
Service Log**
Sensor Service
*) or EtherNet/IP or Modbus TCP settings

**) Visible for service technicians only
214 C48IB001EN-Y
Appendix B: EU Declaration of Conformity
Appendix B: EU Declaration of Conformity
C48IB001EN-Y 215
Appendix C: Document Numbers

Document No. Date Comment
C48IB01A 25.03.2009 First release
C48IB01B 15.12.2009 User Interface Fimware 2.0 (or higher),

main changes:
- Supports up to 2 lines
- Supports additional languages
- Additional Product types: "Beverages Diets/Col.", "Density
Control", "Milk", "DMA HPM Wide Range", "Liquids 3-Comp
2", "Liquids 3-Comp 3", "Boron EDF",
- Supports Davis 5
C48IB001EN-C 19.10.2010 User Interface Fimware 3.0

- Configuration (Alarms, AOs, sensors, units,..)
- Smart sensor support (Carbo 510, Inline Pump 5)
- Support for 2 lines
C48IB001EN-D 09.12.2010 Proof-read in English
C48IB001EN-E 03.03.2011 V 4.0

- Support of Smart Sensor (L-Vis 510)
- Support of 5 different fieldbusses
- New product types for L-Vis, CIP-cleaning, - QUERTZ-key-
board
- Input of target value (for Davis 5)
- Davis 5 compatibility
- 8 bit binary product switch
(256 products) available
C48IB001EN-F 30.6.2011 V 4.10

- User functions (2D-polynomials, 3D-polynomials and formu-
las)
- Davis 5: connection state icon
- Button: <Start Davis 5 calibration>
- Product numbers up to 65535 can be entered (max. 1000
products !)
- Additional option for moving average filter: Reset if within
LoLo<> HiHi
C48IB001EN-G 15.01.2012 V 4.20

- Title changed to Reference Manual
- Import/Export of User functions
- Protected User Functions
- Hold Off Delay: Line Configuration
- Channel Settings
- Read-Only Mode for fieldbus interface
- Improved support of DMA HPM
216 C48IB001EN-Y
C48IB001EN-H 02.07.2012 V 5.00

- Performance improvement (Change of product)
- New Product types "Bioethanol", "Liquids 3 Comp 4", "Beer
1 custom"
- Optional Pressure Compensation for Density Transducers
- Additional generic AIs
- Default filter settings
C48IB001EN-I 10.12.2012 V 5.10

- New user interface design
- Improved menu structure
- Recording Data: higher capacity
- External error status configuration
- Fielbus settings: Product Type Change
Product Creation
- Automatic PTE3/PTE5 Selection
- Carbo 510: Error status
C48IB001EN-J 25.03.2013 Version 5.11

- New Product types
- Enlarged 3-component formula
- 2 general digital inputs
- Data channels can be blinded out
- Fieldbus can be deactivated temporarily
C48IB001EN-K 07.01.2014 Version 5.20

- New smart sensor Carbo 520 Optical
- Assignment of measuring quantities and fieldbus input data
block visible and changeable
- Ignoring "Hold" after product change
- Stop Inline Pump 5 directly via fieldbus
- New product type "Ethanol Counter 1"
- Fieldbus: DeviceNet
C48IB001EN-L 27.06.2014 Version 5.30

- New product types: "Cider", "Petroleum Fuels2", "Liquids 3-
Comp. 5"
- Offset can be used for laboratory adjustments and Davis 5
adjustments
- L-Vis: Kinematic Viscosity according to ASTM D341
- Beer 3: Alcohol calculation for Beer Monitor Basic
- "Beer Wort1/2": New results "Mass of Extract", "Total Mass"
and "Conc. Extract average" in combination with volume
flow meter
C48IB001EN-M 05.12.2014 Version 5.40

- Support of Tegra 2 Embedded PC Module
- Improved boot time
C48IB001EN-N 05.05.2015 Minor changes
C48IB001EN-Y 217
C48IB001EN-O 05.01.2016 Version 5.50

- Support for Smart Sensor L-Rix 510 and 4 # product types
"L-Rix ...".
- New product types: "Petroleum, Fuels 2 Visc", "Beverages
Diets/UV",
- Limits and range control for user function outputs
- New network setting: "DNS Domain"
- 4 Additional calories formulas for "Beer 1/2", "Beverages
Alc/Sugar", "Beer 1 custom"
- "Beer 1" optional volume counter for volume/mass totaliza-
tion
- "All brand" (= global) adjustment of density/sound velocity/
temperature
- "Beer Wort 1" wide range formulas added
C48IB001EN-P 15.01.2017 Version 5.60

- Adaption acc. to directives of "New Legislative Framework"
2014
- New product type "Milk 2" for two density sensors (continu-
ous skim milk adjustment)
- Additional results for milk applications (D20, SG20, SNF,
CLR and TS)
- New product type "L-Rix generic"
- Beer Monitor: Alcohol with 3 digits after the comma
- Support for new smart sensor Oxy 510
- New multi-sensor product type for up to 4 # Oxy 510 per line
- New service password rules (Service password automati-
cally changes every 4 months)
- DMA HPM and DMA HPM wide range: 9 additional results
according to ASTM D1250-08
- Filter for PTE3/5 transducers ("Error delay time")
- Optional external input to start a Davis 5 calibration
- New product type "L-Vis Auto Viscosity" ... automatic range
selection for Newtonian liquids
C48IB001EN-Q 22.06.2017 Version 5.70

- New density sensor L-Dens 7000
- New product type "L-Rix multisensor" .. 4 # L-Rix smart sen-
sors on one line
- New product type "L-Rix sugar counter": additional volume
and mass totalization functions in combination with one L-
Rix 510.
C48IB001EN-R 4.12.2017 Version 6.0

- New product type "L-Rix 520 Beverages": Exclusively for L-
Rix 520 and sugared soft drinks
- AP Brix formula for "L-Rix Multisensor" and "L-Rix Sugar
Counter"
- Channel Settings of global channels (Flowstop, Hold,...)
- Support for L-Com 5500 and L-Sonic 5100/6100
- L-D Flowstop/L-D Hold signals via CAN from L-Com or L-
Dens
- New LED board for Cobrix 5500/5600
- Support for integrated sample pump of L-Dens 7000 and L-
Com 5500
218 C48IB001EN-Y
C48IB001EN-S 10.03.2018 Version 6.10

New sensor L-Col 6100 for "Color EBC" of Beer (new UV/Vis
board)
C48IB001EN-T 25.6.2018 Version 6.20

- Support for Cobrix 2600
- New product type for 4 # Carbo 520 Optical
- Support for additional Oxy 510 parameters (Salinity, rem.cap
life, S/N as channel, inactivity after hot CIP, increased
meas.interval at start-up)
- Sacharose inversion - extended range 10 - 70 °C,
- 0-67°Brix
- New product type "L-Rix Beer Ferment." with various results
such as alcohol, apparent extract density, degree of fermen-
tation, fermentation speed
- New product type "Liqueur Ri-Dens 1" for products with high
alcohol and high sugar concentration
- (10 - 30 °C; 0-25°Brix; 0-45 %v/v Alcohol)
- The target of any measurement value can be assigned to a
4-20 mA analog output. Create low-cost control systems by
using the measured value and the target as inputs to a third
party controller.
C48IB001EN-U August 2018 New Layout
C48IB001EN-V 28.02.2019 Version 6.30

- Extended Oxy 510 functions (add. parameters e.g. "relative
CIP rate")
- Beer 1: Extended formulas especially for low alcohol beer
- Operator gets configurable permissions (e.g. operators only
allowed to change product)
- Logic of DI/DO can be inverted
- Support for L-Rix 5100/5200
- L-Col 6100 for wine
- Oxy 510 for milk product types
- mPDS 5 with CPU only (message list updated correctly)
- Product type "L-Rix Beer Ferment" renamed: "Beer Fer-
ment. Ri"
- PROFINET IO: Device name can be changed via mPDS 5
UI
- L-Col: Name changes for the raw measuring quantities
C48IB001EN-W 25.11.2019 Chapters about Upkeep and Maintenance added

Troubleshooting for Oxy 510: textual adaptions
C48IB001EN-X 10.01.2020 Version 6.40

- New CO2 unit "mg/L"
- Beverages Sugar: "ICUMSA Color" and "ICUMSA Color
- Turb.Comp." added
- Extension for product type "Beer Fermentation Ri" ... the
automatic method can be used for 4 sensors (tanks) inde-
pendently.
- A product using any available product number and behaving
like product "0" can be created
C48IB001EN-Y 219
C48IB001EN-Y 20.03.2020 Version 6.41

- Support for new sensor Oxy 5100
220 C48IB001EN-Y

C48ib001en y Mpds 5 Refguide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

C48ib001en y Mpds 5 Refguide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Measure

Changes, copyright, trademarks etc.

Date: April 2020

1.2 Special Safety Instructions

1.3 Conventions for Safety Messages Description of risk.

3 Checking the Supplied Parts

Photo Pcs. Article Description Mat. No.

1 mPDS 5 with CPU/transducer and I/O boards 79233

1 4 GByte USB flash drive 87093

2 Mounting brackets 70335

1 Stainless steel housing for mPDS 5, complete 86824

1 Power supply for panel mounting: 79719

1 PROFIBUS DP 90° connector (12 Mbit) 18689

1 DSUB plug CANopen with terminating resistor 184983

1 Industrial plug 10G RJ45 96694

4 Checklist for Quick Start-up

5 General Operating Instructions

Content area with output fields/graphs:

The layout (=number and size of numerical/graphi-

In addition to the above layout which uses the entire

Fig. 3: Example: Selecting the quantity to be manually

5.2.1 Handling Multiple Process Lines

The user group indicator

The instrument does not accept any input until

To retrieve a forgotten password in the "log on"

To define the number of graphical and numeri-

Fig. 8: Explanation of the scaling of the y-axis (e.g. 10 %)

3... Side menu 4... The buttons area

5.3.1 Special Operating Elements

Fig. 13: On-screen alphabetical keyboard

Fig. 14: On-screen numeric-symbol keyboard

Fig. 15: On-screen numeric keyboard

6 Available Measuring Quantities

Name Units Description Fieldbus

Absorbance 1 AU Absorbance at a wavelength of the first 111

Absorbance 2 AU Absorbance at a wavelength of the second 112

Absorbance 3 AU Absorbance at a wavelength of the third 113

Absorbance 420.10 AU Coming from L-Col for wine 150

Absorbance 520.10 AU Coming from L-Col for wine 151

Absorbance 620.10 AU Coming from L-Col for wine 152

AI Skim Temperature °C Temperature from the density sensor installed 235

Air-N2-O2 MVE ppm, ... Foreign gas (Air/N2/O2) concentration calcu- 93

Alarm 1 Boron EDF Special Alarm for type Boron EDF 59

Alarm 2 Boron EDF -"- 60

Alarm 3 Boron EDF -"- 61

Table 4: Overview of measuring quantities

Name Units Description Fieldbus

Alarm 4 Boron EDF -"- 62

Alarm Output Special Alarm output for product type "Density 97

Alc. 20 °C Wastewater %v/v This is an auxiliary measuring quantity for the 1

Alc./Real Ext.Ratio Ratio alcohol / real extract, used for beverage 22

Alcohol %w/w, ... Used for beverage product types 18

Alcohol 15 °C %v/v Used for beverage product types 66

Alcohol 20 °C %v/v used for beverage product types 1

Alcohol 20 °C g/l, ... used for beverage product types 92

Amplitude Ratio 2 %,... Internal service value for SPRn 2S 101

API 15 °C API number at 15 °C according to ASTM D1250 85

API 15.56 °C API number at 15.56 °C (60°F) according to 245

API 20 °C API number at 20 °C according to ASTM D1250 82

App. Degree Ferment. %, ... 6

Apparent Extract °Plato, ... 9

Ash Content Ash content for the calculation of carbohydrates 28

Table 4: Overview of measuring quantities